manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 Series, Service Manual

Share
Download
Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 Series Service Manual Download Page 854

8

8

8-72

8-72

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

MTF-S2

MTF value 2 setting: vert scan [Back]

Lv.1 Details

This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color 

Image Reader Unit-C1 only. 

Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. 

Enter the value of service label on the Reader.

Use case

When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data

Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range

20 to 85

Default value

50

Related service mode

COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

MTF-S3

MTF value 3 setting: vert scan [Back]

Lv.1 Details

This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color 

Image Reader Unit-C1 only. 

Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. 

Enter the value of service label on the Reader.

Use case

When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data

Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range

20 to 85

Default value

50

Related service mode

COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

MTF-S4

MTF value 4 setting: vert scan [Back]

Lv.1 Details

This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color 

Image Reader Unit-C1 only. 

Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. 

Enter the value of service label on the Reader.

Use case

When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data

Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range

20 to 85

Default value

50

Related service mode

COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

MTF-S5

MTF value 5 setting: vert scan [Back]

Lv.1 Details

This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color 

Image Reader Unit-C1 only. 

Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. 

Enter the value of service label on the Reader.

Use case

When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data

Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range

20 to 85

Default value

50

Related service mode

COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

MTF-S6

MTF value 6 setting: vert scan [Back]

Lv.1 Details

This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color 

Image Reader Unit-C1 only. 

Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. 

Enter the value of service label on the Reader.

Use case

When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data

Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range

20 to 85

Default value

50

Related service mode

COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

MTF-S7

MTF value 7 setting: vert scan [Back]

Lv.1 Details

This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color 

Image Reader Unit-C1 only. 

Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. 

Enter the value of service label on the Reader.

Use case

When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data

Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range

20 to 85

Default value

50

Related service mode

COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

MTF-S8

MTF value 8 setting: vert scan [Back]

Lv.1 Details

This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color 

Image Reader Unit-C1 only. 

Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. 

Enter the value of service label on the Reader.

Use case

When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data

Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range

20 to 85

Default value

50

Related service mode

COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

MTF-S9

MTF value 9 setting: vert scan [Back]

Lv.1 Details

This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color 

Image Reader Unit-C1 only. 

Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation. 

Enter the value of service label on the Reader.

Use case

When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data

Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range

20 to 85

Default value

50

Related service mode

COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC

Summary of Contents for imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 Series

Page 1: ...RUNNER ADVANCE 6075 6065 6055 Series Service Manual Revision 5 June 3 2011 Product Overview Technology Periodic Service Parts Replacement and Clearning Adjustment Troubleshooting Error Code Service Mode Installation Appendix ...

Page 2: ...mation as the need arises In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copy...

Page 3: ...switch closing the front door and closing the delivery unit door which results in supplying the machine with power 2 In the digital circuits 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically a...

Page 4: ...Blank Page ...

Page 5: ...tions 1 9 Applying New Connectors 1 10 Specifications 1 11 Product Specifications 1 11 Power Supply Specifications 1 12 Weight and Size 1 12 Productivity Print Speed 1 13 Paper Type 1 14 External View Internal View 1 25 External View 1 25 External Cover 1 25 Switches I F Others 1 26 Cross Section View 1 26 Operation 1 27 Power Switch 1 27 Types of Power Switches 1 27 Points to Note on Turning ON O...

Page 6: ...Specifications 2 44 Parts Configuration 2 45 Drive Configuration 2 48 Print Process 2 50 Controls 2 52 Exposure 2 53 Primary Charging 2 54 Developing 2 56 Transfer 2 58 Separation 2 62 Drum Cleaning 2 64 Drum related Issues 2 65 Toner Supply Area 2 68 Waste Toner Feeding Area 2 70 Image Stabilization Control 2 72 Auxiliary Control 2 79 Servicing 2 84 Periodically Replaced Parts 2 84 Consumable Par...

Page 7: ...on 2 141 Side Registration Control 2 142 Circulation quantity and limit 2 143 Jam Detection 2 147 Jam Code List 2 147 Forced Paper Feed Control 2 149 Servicing 2 150 Periodically Replaced Parts 2 150 Consumable Parts 2 150 Periodical Servicing List 2 150 When Replacing Parts 2 150 Major Adjustments 2 150 Troubleshooting 2 150 External Auxiliary System 2 151 Overview 2 151 Power Supply Configuratio...

Page 8: ...cense file suspending a license 2 187 Downloading Removing an Invalidated License File 2 188 Outline 2 188 Procedure downloading removing an invalidated license file 2 188 Reusable license 2 190 Outline 2 190 License for forwarding 2 190 Outline 2 190 Procedure to create license for forwarding 2 190 Uninstalling an Application 2 193 Procedure to uninstall an application 2 193 Login Service 2 194 A...

Page 9: ... 242 Distribution Flow 2 242 Firmware Installation Flow 2 242 MEAP Application System Option Installation Flow 2 243 Limitations and Cautions 2 243 Limitations 2 243 Cautions 2 243 Overview of Preparation 2 245 Setting Sales Company s HQ 2 245 Network Settings 2 246 Connecting to External Network 2 246 Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server 2 246 Communication Test 2 248 Enabling UGW Link 2...

Page 10: ...Removing the Drum Unit 4 121 Removing the Photosensitive Drum 4 122 Cleaning Photosensitive Drum 4 126 Cleaning the Drum edges 4 127 Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw 4 127 Removing the Side Seal 4 128 Removing the Developing Assembly 4 129 Cleaning the Developing Assembly 4 131 Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller 4 132 Removing the ETB Unit 4 137 Removing the ETB 4 139 C...

Page 11: ... Feed Roller 4 205 Removing the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller 4 206 Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly 4 207 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit 4 215 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit 4 216 Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit 4 217 Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 4 218 Removing the Registration Unit 4 221 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit 4 22...

Page 12: ... Diagnosis 6 29 Introduction 6 29 Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool 6 29 Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool 6 29 Overview 6 29 Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool 6 29 Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool 6 30 Layout Drawing 6 30 Basic Flowchart 6 31 Basic Check Items 6 32 Operation 6 32 Boot System Error Diagnosis 6 32 Diagnosis Time 6 33 Error Diagnosis 6 34 Controller System Error Diagnosis 6...

Page 13: ...es 6 93 Error Messages 6 94 Error Codes 6 100 How to read an error code 6 100 Error Code 6 101 Debug log 6 105 Scope of Application 6 105 Purpose 6 105 Overview 6 105 Function Overview 6 105 Storing System Information 6 105 Storage Method of System Information 6 105 Description of Log to be Collected 6 105 Collecting System Information 6 106 Collection Destination 6 106 Collecting Debug Log USB me...

Page 14: ...SOR 8 39 MISC 8 39 ENVRNT 8 40 2D SHADE 8 40 I O I O display mode 8 41 Host Machine_Main Controller DC CON P001 to P005 8 50 Reader R CON P001 to P005 8 51 ADF FEEDER P001 to P007 8 52 Paper Deck Uint A1 SORTER P048 to P050 8 53 Paper Deck Uint D1 SORTER P048 to P050 8 54 Inserter L1 SORTER P047 to P061 8 55 Paper Folding Inserter Unit H1 SORTER P047 to P061 8 56 External Punch A1 SORTER SORTER P0...

Page 15: ...stallation 9 2 Checking Power Supply 9 2 Checking the Installation Environment 9 2 Checking Installation Space 9 2 Points to Note at Installation Work 9 3 Table of Options Combination 9 4 Order to Install the Host machine and the Options 9 4 Checking the Contents 9 5 Unpacking 9 8 Installation 9 10 Installing the Developing Assembly 9 10 Installing the Pickup Assembly 9 13 Installing the Fixing As...

Page 16: ... Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 9 48 Installation Procedure 9 49 Cassette Heater Unit 9 54 Checking the Contents Asia only 9 54 Cassette Heater Unit 38 9 54 Checking the Parts to be Installed Europe only 9 54 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 9 54 Installation Procedure 9 54 Paper Deck Heater Unit A1 9 58 Checking the Contents 9 58 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 9 59 ...

Page 17: ...B 9 130 Removable HDD Kit 9 131 Points to Note Regarding Data Backup Export 9 132 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only 9 133 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 9 137 Installation Procedure 9 137 Assembling the Option HDD 9 137 Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit 9 140 Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit 9 142 Installing the HDD Case Unit 9 144 Installing the System Softwar...

Page 18: ...after Installation 9 208 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work 9 208 Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment 9 208 TYPE 7 Option HDD 250GB HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 9 209 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 9 209 Checking the Contents 9 209 Option HDD 250GB 9 210 HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 9 211 Points to Note Regarding Data Backup E...

Page 19: ...Security Mark 9 282 Setting for Mirroring 9 283 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work Only When HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit has been Installed 9 283 Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment 9 283 TYPE 10 Removable HDD Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 9 285 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 9 285 Checking the Contents 9 285 Removable HDD...

Page 20: ...am 9 24 XX General Circuit Diagram 10 24 XXI General Circuit Diagram 11 24 XXII General Circuit Diagram 12 24 XXIII General Circuit Diagram 13 24 XXIV General Circuit Diagram 14 24 XXV General Circuit Diagram 15 24 XXVI General Circuit Diagram 16 24 XXVII General Circuit Diagram 17 24 XXVIII General Circuit Diagram 18 24 XXIX General Circuit Diagram 19 24 XXX General Circuit Diagram 20 24 XXXI Gen...

Page 21: ...LXIX Soft counter specifications LXIX Soft Counter List LXIX 000 to 099 LXIX 100 to 199 LXX 200 to 299 LXXI 300 to 399 LXXII 400 to 499 LXXIII 500 to 599 LXXIV 600 to 699 LXXIV 700 to 799 LXXIV 800 to 899 LXXV 900 to 999 LXXVI ...

Page 22: ...ety Handling of Laser System Turn power switch ON Safety of Toner Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Notes Before it Works Serving Points to Note at Cleaning Safety Precautions imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 6065 6055 Series ...

Page 23: ...e United States A different description may be used for a different product Laser Safety Laser beam radiation may pose a danger to the human body A laser scanner mounted on the machine is sealed with the protection housing and external cover to prevent the laser beam from leaking to the outside The laser beam never leaks out of the scanner as far as users operate the machine normally F 0 1 Handlin...

Page 24: ...n and small amounts of dye Do not throw toner into fire It may cause explosion Toner on Clothing or Skin If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner wipe it off with tissue then wash it off with water Do not use warm water which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth Tonner is easy to react with plastic material avoid contact with plastic Notes...

Page 25: ...0 4 0 4 Points to Note at Cleaning When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling ...

Page 26: ...1 1 Product Overview Product Overview Product Lineup Features Specifications External View Internal View Operation ...

Page 27: ...value indicates the print speed ppm print per minute imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6065 iimageRUNNER ADVANCE 6055 Print speed 75 ppm 65 ppm 55 ppm Positioning Target machine iR5075 Control Panel Flat Control Panel Option Upright Control Panel HDD Standard 80 GB Maximum 250 GB Communication method with pickup delivery option Pickup delivery option IPC Inter Process Communication F 1 ...

Page 28: ...r size B5 to 13 x 19 2 Paper weight 60 to 256 g m2 Other than CMJ CCN CKBS TAIWAN T 1 2 Product name Japan Required options conditions etc Paper Folding Insertion Unit H1 Folding Unit Insertion Unit Staple Finisher Booklet Finisher is required at the downstream side Folding Unit Folding type Z Fold C Fold Half Fold Accordion Z Fold Double Parallel Fold Paper type thin paper plain paper color paper...

Page 29: ...or original or color mixed original 64 to 220 g m2 Stacking capacity Max 300 sheets Other than CEL Duplex Color Image Reader Unit C1 Simultaneous 2 sided scanning B W 1 sided 2 sided 600 dpi 120 120 ipm 300 dpi 120 200 ipm Color 1 sided 2 sided 600 dpi 51 51 ipm 300 dpi 85 100 ipm Paper weight 1 sided AB configuration 38 to 220 g m2 Inch configuration 50 to 220 g m2 2 sided 50 to 220 g m2 Color or...

Page 30: ...e required Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AF1 Super G3 FAX Board AF1 or Super G3 additional kit is required Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board AE1 Super G3 FAX Board AF1 is required Other than CEL CCN Handset G2 Super G3 FAX Board AF1 and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AF1 is required Using with Utility Tray A1 A2 is not available CMJ only imagePASS U1 No particular options and conditions are required Othe...

Page 31: ...quired CMJ only Universal Send Advanced Feature Set E1 No particular options and conditions are required Other than CMJ Scan Solution Security Function Expansion Kit A1 No particular options and conditions are required CMJ only Universal Send Security Feature Set D1 No particular options and conditions are required Other than CMJ CCN Direct Print Expansion Kit for PDF XPS H1 No particular options ...

Page 32: ...roductivity High productivity High image quality High productivity High image quality High image quality Energy saving High productivity F 1 5 Service Features Improved Service Operability Removing of the Process Unit becomes easy The Process Unit can be removed by accessing only from the front side Preparation 1 Open the Inner Cover 2 Remove the Primary Charging Assembly 3 Remove the Pre transfer...

Page 33: ...ide As a result service modes can be executed even when working at rear side of the host machine Procedure 1 Remove the Shaft Support Cover Left 2 Remove the screw on the arm and turn the Upright Control Panel Upright Control Panel Screw F 1 7 F 1 8 New Service Mode The description of each service mode item is displayed as well Features Display in natural language Items in the following are newly ...

Page 34: ...played on the screen when an error occurs yyyy sub code Exxxxxx yyyy aa xxxxxx error code aa location F 1 10 F 1 11 Service Advantage When a paper jam error is reported from the user The location device causing the paper jam error can be recognized before the service technician is sent to the user site The cause of trouble and the remedy can be assumed before the service technician is sent to the ...

Page 35: ...ctor at the time of servicing Features Easy to hold because the overall height of the housing is high Connector can be inserted with less force Lever lock mechanism is available Proper insertion can be determined by the sound snap or clicky feeling Points to Caution when Inserting Removing the Connector Be sure to keep the following in mind during work While releasing the lever lock of the housing...

Page 36: ...in paper heavy paper color paper recycled paper pre punched paper letterhead bond paper Cassette 52 to 220 g m2 Deck feedable type index paper tab paper Multi purpose Tray 52 to 256 g m2 Deck feedable type transparency labels tracing paper postcard Installation type of main body Console type Paper size Deck A4 B5 LTR Cassette A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R 8K 16K LDR LGL LTR LTRR STMTR EXE Multi purpose ...

Page 37: ... 5 100 240 5 100 240 5 100 240 5 Shift Tray E1 Main body Staple Finisher E1 Main body Saddle Finisher E1 Main body External Puncher A1 Finisher Duplex Color Image Reader Unit C1 Main body Color Image Reader Unit C1 Main body T 1 8 Weight and Size Product name Width mm Depth mm Height mm Weight kg imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 6065 6055 645 770 1220 235 Paper Deck Unit A1 323 583 570 37 Paper Deck Unit ...

Page 38: ... 0 16 0 29 0 14 5 32 0 16 0 29 0 14 5 A3R 420 0 297 0 37 0 18 5 33 0 16 5 32 0 16 0 29 0 14 5 32 0 16 0 29 0 14 5 LDRR 431 8 279 4 37 0 18 5 33 0 16 5 32 0 16 0 29 0 14 5 32 0 16 0 29 0 14 5 Heavy 1 91 to 180 g m2 Heavy 2 181 to 220 g m2 Heavy 3 221 to 256 g m2 A5R 210 0 148 5 35 0 17 5 35 0 17 5 35 0 17 5 35 0 17 5 35 0 17 5 35 0 17 5 STMTR 215 9 139 7 35 0 17 5 35 0 17 5 35 0 17 5 35 0 17 5 35 0...

Page 39: ...om paper size 1 1 182 0 to 209 9 139 7 to 181 9 Custom paper size 1 2 210 0 to 279 2 Custom paper size 1 3 279 3 to 432 0 Custom paper size 1 4 432 1 to 487 7 Custom paper size 2 1 182 0 to 209 9 182 0 to 210 0 Custom paper size 2 2 210 0 to 279 2 Custom paper size 2 3 279 3 to 432 0 Custom paper size 2 4 432 1 to 487 7 Custom paper size 3 1 182 0 to 209 9 210 1 to 297 0 Custom paper size 3 2 210 ...

Page 40: ...Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes Yes Yes SRA3 450 320 12x18 457 2 304 8 EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes Yes Yes E OFFICIO 320 220 Yes Yes Yes B OFFICIO 355 216 Yes Yes Yes M OFFICIO 341 216 Yes Yes Yes A OFFICIO 340 220 Yes Yes Yes A LTR 220 280 Yes Yes Yes A LTRR 280 220 Yes Yes Yes GLTR R 266 7 203 2 Yes Yes Yes GLTR 203 2 266 7 ...

Page 41: ...R 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes Yes Yes SRA3 450 320 12x18 457 2 304 8 EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes Yes Yes E OFFICIO 320 220 Yes Yes Yes B OFFICIO 355 216 Yes Yes Yes M OFFICIO 341 216 Yes Yes Yes A OFFICIO 340 220 Yes Yes Yes A LTR 220 280 Yes Yes Yes A LTRR 280 220 Yes Yes Yes GLTR R 266 7 203 2...

Page 42: ...Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes Yes Yes SRA3 450 320 12x18 457 2 304 8 EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes Yes Yes E OFFICIO 320 220 Yes Yes Yes B OFFICIO 355 216 Yes Yes Yes M OFFICIO 341 216 Yes Yes Yes A OFFICIO 340 220 Yes Yes Yes A LTR 220 280 Yes Yes Yes A LTRR 280 220 Yes Yes Yes GLTR R 266 7 203 2 Yes Yes Yes GLTR 203 ...

Page 43: ...es Yes Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes Yes Yes SRA3 450 320 12x18 457 2 304 8 EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes Yes Yes E OFFICIO 320 220 Yes Yes Yes B OFFICIO 355 216 Yes Yes Yes M OFFICIO 341 216 Yes Yes Yes A OFFICIO 340 220 Yes Yes Yes A LTR 220 280 Yes Yes Yes A LTRR 280 220 Yes Yes Yes GLTR R 266 7 203 2 Yes Yes Yes GLTR 203 2 266...

Page 44: ... LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes SRA3 450 320 12x18 457 2 304 8 EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes E OFFICIO 320 220 Yes B OFFICIO 355 216 Yes M OFFICIO 341 216 Yes A OFFICIO 340 220 Yes A LTR 220 280 Yes A LTRR 280 220 Yes GLTR R 266 7 203 2 Yes GLTR 203 2 266 7 Yes GLGL 330 2 203 2 Yes AFLS 337 206 Yes FLS 330 2 215 9 Y...

Page 45: ...x17 431 8 279 4 LGL 355 6 215 9 LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 SRA3 450 320 12x18 457 2 304 8 EXEC 184 1 266 7 OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 E OFFICIO 320 220 B OFFICIO 355 216 M OFFICIO 341 216 A OFFICIO 340 220 A LTR 220 280 A LTRR 280 220 GLTR R 266 7 203 2 GLTR 203 2 266 7 GLGL 330 2 203 2 AFLS 337 206 FLS 330 2 215 9 13x19 482 6 330 2 K8 390 270 K16 195 270 K16R 270 195 F4A ...

Page 46: ...15 9 Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes SRA3 450 320 12x18 457 2 304 8 EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes E OFFICIO 320 220 Yes B OFFICIO 355 216 Yes M OFFICIO 341 216 Yes A OFFICIO 340 220 Yes A LTR 220 280 Yes A LTRR 280 220 Yes GLTR R 266 7 203 2 Yes GLTR 203 2 266 7 Yes GLGL 330 2 203 2 Yes AFLS 337 206 Yes FLS 330 2 215 9 Yes 13x19 482 6 330 2 K8 390 ...

Page 47: ...Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes SRA3 450 320 12x18 457 2 304 8 EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes E OFFICIO 320 220 Yes B OFFICIO 355 216 Yes M OFFICIO 341 216 Yes A OFFICIO 340 220 Yes A LTR 220 280 Yes A LTRR 280 220 Yes GLTR R 266 7 203 2 Yes GLTR 203 2 266 7 Yes GLGL 330 2 203 2 Yes AFLS 337 206 Yes FLS 330 2 215 9 Yes 13x19 482 6 330 2 K8 390 270 Y...

Page 48: ...es Yes Yes Yes LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes STMTR 215 9 139 7 SRA3 450 320 12x18 457 2 304 8 EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 E OFFICIO 320 220 B OFFICIO 355 216 M OFFICIO 341 216 A OFFICIO 340 220 A LTR 220 280 A LTRR 280 220 GLTR R 266 7 203 2 GLTR 203 2 266 7 GLGL 330 2 203 2 AFLS 337 206 FLS 330 2 215 9 13x19 482 6 330 2 K8 390 270 K16 195 270 K16R 270 195 F4A 342 9...

Page 49: ...Width direction mm Pickup position Multi purpose Tray Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Paper Deck A1 Paper Deck D1 Insertion Unit Pre Punched paper A4 210 297 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Postcard Postcard 148 100 Yes Reply Postcard 200 148 Yes 4 on 1 Postcard 200 296 Yes T 1 12 ...

Page 50: ...er 6 Front Cover 7 Deck Left Cover 8 Deck Right Cover 9 Cassette Front Cover 10 Cassette Front Cover 11 Left Front Cover 12 Left Lower Cover 13 Left Handle Cover 14 Delivery Cover 15 Finisher Connector Cover 16 Left Upper Cover 17 Upper Rear Cover 18 Left Rear Cover 19 Rear Upper Cover 20 Rear Lower Cover 21 Filter Cover 22 Waste Toner Container Cover 23 Right Lower Cover 24 Right Rear Cover 2 25 ...

Page 51: ... LED is off 2 Using a pen point press the test button of the breaker on the rear side of the machine 3 Check that the breaker switch is OFF O side 4 Return the breaker switch to ON I side 5 Turn ON the main power switch F 1 15 Cross Section View Laser Scanner Unit Right Deck Pickup Paper Path Unit Transfer Cleaning Unit Pre transfer Charging Assembly Primary Charging Assembly Pre exposure LED Drum...

Page 52: ...to turn OFF the Main Power Switch to cut the power there is no need to perform the shutdown sequence which has been performed with the conventional machines After turning OFF the power after turning OFF the Main Power Switch do not turn ON the Main Power Switch unless the screen disappears Do not turn OFF the power during downloading Control Panel Control Panel 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 11 ...

Page 53: ...I Fax Inbox 6 Secured Print 7 Remote Scanner 8 Shortcut to Settings Registration 9 Introduction to Useful Features F 1 18 Differences in Main Menu iR 7105 iR 5075 Series iR ADVANCE 8105 iR ADVANCE 6075 Series Copy Copy Send Fax Scan and Send Mail Box Scan and Save New Access Stored Files New Fax I Fax Inbox Menu Switch Key Print Secured Print Remote Scanner Remote Scanner Shortcut to Settings Regi...

Page 54: ...nation TOP OK 1 1 Management Settings 1 2 3 4 5 1 Preferences 2 Adjustment Maintenance 3 Function Settings 4 Set Destination 5 Management Settings F 1 19 Differences in Settings Registration Menu iR 5075 5065 5055 Series iR ADVANCE 6075 6065 6055 Series Common Settings Preferences Timer Setting Adjustment Cleaning Adjustment Maintenance System Settings Management Settings Output Report Function Se...

Page 55: ...chnology Technology Basic Configuration Main Controller Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing Pickup Feed System External Auxiliary System MEAP Embedded RDS Updater System Management Operations ...

Page 56: ...em block laser exposure system block image formation system block fixing system block and pickup feed system block ETB Main controller 1 2 DC controller HDD Option board Controller system Reader controller CCD Cassette4 Cassette3 Left deck Right deck Pickup Transfer Drum unit Bk Laser scanner unit Bk Fixing Delivery Duplexing feed Exposure lamp Document exposure system Laser exposure system Image ...

Page 57: ...Y CCW CCW CW Polygon Motor M44 ETB Motor M43 Developing Motor M2 Drum Motor M1 Developing Clutch CL1 Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Potential Sensor EPC1 Developing DC bias Pre transfer charging bias Pre exposure LED Primary charging bias Transfer bias Fixing Motor M3 Fixing Heater H3 Duplex Feed Merging Motor M32 Duplex Feed Left Motor M19 Duplex Feed Right Motor M18 Delivery Motor M13 Mul...

Page 58: ...tor M43 Developing Motor M2 Drum Motor M1 Developing Clutch CL1 Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Potential Sensor EPC1 Developing DC bias Pre transfer charging bias Pre exposure LED Primary charging bias Transfer bias Print Status Fixing Motor M3 Duplex Feed Left Motor M19 Fixing Heater H3 Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid SL5 Delivery Motor M13 Multi purpose Tray Registration Front Motor M33 Ri...

Page 59: ...Standby Temperature Control Start key ON Polygon Motor M44 Video Signal PTOP ETB Motor M43 Developing Motor M2 Drum Motor M1 Developing Clutch CL1 Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Potential Sensor EPC1 Developing DC bias Pre transfer charging bias Pre exposure LED Primary charging bias Transfer bias Print Status Fixing Motor M3 Duplex Feed Merging Motor M32 Fixing Heater H3 Duplex Feed Left M...

Page 60: ...age quality and high functionality Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 1 controls the entire system while Main Controller PCB 2 mainly controls image processing F 2 5 Main Controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the Riser connector for interface Removability installability of Main Controller PCB 1 has been improved by introducing this configuration Slot in out F 2...

Page 61: ...hina models Main controller PCB 2 CPU 400 MHz Image control Image processing resolution conversion image rotation halftone process scanner image process printer image process compression decompression decoding direct mapping image area determination generation of histogram Trimming Masking USB devise control I F Reader Printer FAX HDD Power supply HDD 2 5 inch SATA I F Standard 80 GB Up to 2 HDDs ...

Page 62: ...quired when 600dpi color scanning mode is used SRAM 16 Mbit To save data in Settings Registration Mode Service Mode and image data management information in HDD Lithium battery BAT1 For SRAM backup Life approx 10 years F 2 9 T 2 3 I F connector Main controller PCB 1 UI J1003 Mini USB J1007 FAN J1015 LAN J1017 USB D J1018 USB H J1021 CC VI J1026 Coin J1027 TPM J1022 PCI J1025 Flash J1020 Riser J101...

Page 63: ... Controller Control J22 DC Controller Image J21 Riser J2 Jack No Function specifications Jack No Function specifications J2 Riser I F To connect Main Controller PCB 1 J21 DC Controller image data I F To connect from the back of Main Controller PCB 2 J4 Power Supply I F J22 DC Controller Control data I F J5 Power Supply Control I F J23 Power Supply FAN I F T 2 4 F 2 11 Jack No Function specificatio...

Page 64: ...y for non Japanese models Expansion Bus PCB Product name Expansion Bus F1 F2 Required when PCI option Wireless LAN Board B1 IPSec Board B2 is installed Wireless LAN PCB Product name Wireless LAN Board B1 B2 Expansion Bus F1 is required Only for non Japanese models IPSec PCB Encryption composition processing of packet data Product name IPSec Board B2 Expansion Bus F1 F2 is required F 2 12 T 2 6 Mai...

Page 65: ... PDL spooling FAX data Address book filter MEAP application Universal data MEAP saving data System log Text management table PDL related file font registration form etc Job archiving chasing System software System language RUI etc Thumbnail For Advanced Box For distribution server F 2 14 Boot Shutdown sequence Boot sequence Starting BIOS Main controller PCB 1 Starting IPL OS Flash PCB Starting app...

Page 66: ...0 4001 Shutdown sequence Before turning OFF the main power switch it is necessary to perform HDD completion processing to preventdamage on the HDD cooling of the internal printer to prevent fixed toner due to high temperature and exhaust to prevent smeared image due to chemical reaction of ozone in the machine and photosensitive drum This sequential processing is called shutdown sequence and was e...

Page 67: ... Copy Reader Image data buffer SDRAM Compression SDRAM Decompression To DC Controller Print type image processing Main Controller PCB 2 Spool HDD Scan type image processing Image data buffer Main Controller PCB 1 Riser Connector F 2 16 Print Network SDRAM SDRAM LAN Controller Rendering Printer driver language interpretation HDD Image data buffer Image data buffer Compression Decompression Main Con...

Page 68: ...p set for generating and storing encryption keys and computing public key encryption T TP PM M M Ma ai in n c co on nt tr ro ol ll le er r P PC CB B 1 1 Removable The TPM PCB protects security information passwords certificates and encryption keys stored in the HDD and SRAM Note that this PCB does not protect set registered or stored data other than security information The TPM key embedded in the...

Page 69: ...ation is decodable even after servicing Note that the F 2 21 security information is not decodable correctly in case the HDD is failed or formatted because the public key information stored in the HDD is cleared If this occurs execute Initialize All Data Settings in user mode to set the TPM setting to OFF This will maintain the password information in the SRAM even after the password information i...

Page 70: ...lect Export from Custom Menu of the Remote UI to back up Custom Menu Setting Information 3 Log in to the system as Administrator from User Management of Advanced Box on Remote UI Then execute Export to back up User Information of Advanced Box Works before after introduction Execute the following in Setting Registration mode TPM setting is OFF by default 1 Enable the feature 2 Backup the TPM key 3 ...

Page 71: ...ing Data Management TPM Setting to ON Setting Registration 2 Click Yes and restart the machine This setting is enabled after the machine is restarted F 2 23 F 2 24 2 TPM Key Backup The TPM key backup file can be stored only in USB flash drive supported file system FAT32 Note that this file requires the memory free space of several MBs 1 Insert the USB flash drive to the machine The USB I F host is...

Page 72: ...s is aborted and the message and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen Take an appropriate measure to recover this The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine 2 or more USB flash drives are inserted to the machine The USB flash drive has insufficient free memory space The USB flash drive is write protected No key is found CAUTION The USB flash drive should be securely stored Giv...

Page 73: ...K on Start Restoration Screen The restoration process is started 5 Click OK on Restoration Completion Screen Remove the USB flash drive and turn OFF ON the main power switch F 2 29 CAUTION The following may cause failures in restoration If any of the following is detected the restoration process is aborted and the message and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen Take an appropriate me...

Page 74: ...eserved transmission Job logs Contents set in Setting Registration Image composite registration form Registered transfer settings F 2 30 Key pair and server certificate registered in Management Setting Setting Registration Device Management Certificate Settings Steps of data restoration after recovery The restoration process triggers Setting Registration Management Setting Data Management Import E...

Page 75: ...cally restored in the SRAM 3 The TPM setting on the control panel is reset to OFF Manually set the TPM setting to ON the machine is operated in the TPM setting ON 4 Restore the password information stored in the SRAM see 1 1 Replace the main controller PCB 2 2 The common key backed up in the HDD will be automatically restored in the SRAM 3 Restore the password information stored in the SRAM see 1 ...

Page 76: ... System software is downloaded and the machine restarts automatically T 2 10 Security Information Storage Location Storage Location Data Type Function Name of Data Backup Availability HDD Password PIN BOX BOX Password Yes HDD Password PIN BOX Password for Fax BOX Yes HDD Password PIN SEND Password for a file destination of Address Book Yes HDD Password PIN MEAP Authentication information registere...

Page 77: ... High capacity HDD Option The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 80GB as standard Mounting a 2 5 inch 250GB HDD D1 option makes 250 GB in HDD capacity High capacity is required in the case of saving large amounts of data with Advanced Box Mounting this option increases capacity for Advanced Box 9GB in the case of 80GB HDD capacity 114GB in the case of 250GB HDD capacity TMP_GEN TMP_PSS FSTDEV...

Page 78: ...rations according to the HDD capacity 80GB 250GB Master HDD1 Backup HDD2 Mirroring PCB LED PCB H HD DD D M Mi ir rr ro or ri in ng g K Ki it t E E1 1 2 2 5 5i in nc ch h 8 80 0G GB B H HD DD D C C1 1 Master HDD1 Backup HDD2 Mirroring PCB LED PCB H HD DD D M Mi ir rr ro or ri in ng g K Ki it t E E1 1 2 2 5 5i in nc ch h 250 250 G GB B H HD DD D D D1 1 Ch A Ch B 80 GB Standard 80 GB Option Ch A Ch B...

Page 79: ... 80 GB HDD Approx 20 minutes 250GB HDD Approx 60 minutes Install the mirroring PCB and LED PCB for HDD1 HDD2 HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the mirroring PCB HDD2 is connected to Ch B on the mirroring PCB CH B CH A Slot 2 HDD2 Slot 1 HDD1 F 2 34 Rebuild progress is shown in a massage at the status line on the control panel Copying hard disk data xx NOTE This machine can be used even during rebuild p...

Page 80: ...5 T 2 13 Description of Modes The mirroring system of this machine consists of 4 modes The modes in parentheses show the mirroring system statuses The status flows among the modes below during operation The table below lists descriptions of modes and operational overview Name of Mode Description Master HDD Status Backup HDD Status Mirror Mode Both HDDs are normally operated In normal operation In ...

Page 81: ...grade Mode Unable to detect Master HDD at Start up Halt Mode Trouble See Overview of Trouble Recovery Trouble See Overview of Trouble Recovery See Overview of Trouble Recovery See Overview of Trouble Recovery Mirror Mode F 2 36 Mode Flow during Operation Mirror Mode Halt Mode Rebuild Mode Degrade Mode Unable to detect Master HDD In which HDD Both HDDs Either HDD Halt Mode In which HDD Master HDD B...

Page 82: ...e other model The used HDD holds the ID specific to the firstly installed machine thus this machine is unable to recognize it If done you need to reinstall the HDD recognized in this machine T 2 15 Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality 1 The modes other than Mirror Mode indicate troubles which require swift recovery The power can be turned OFF even during Rebuild process H...

Page 83: ... data as well as user data in BOX and Advanced BOX Such images or user file information are saved in the HDD only with system information cleared Under this condition the data or images can be restored by accessing directly to the stolen HDD using the access editor and the like To counter such threats against securities data written to the disk should be always encrypted to protect them from illeg...

Page 84: ...tall the system Main controller 1 replacement not cleared N A N A Main controller clear Information held in SRAM cleared After MN CON clear process is done MN CON clear does not clear authentication information no work is required specifically for HDD encryption kit 1 How to Initialize Encryption Board F 2 39 T 2 16 1 Initialize the encryption board via SST This step makes the disk unformatted E60...

Page 85: ...ed to initialize the memory space where the key is stored Turn OFF ON the power If the error is not recovered this may be caused by hardware related factors 0102 Failure in the HDD encryption key Error in initialization Failed to initialize the encryption processing unit Turn OFF ON the power If the error is not recovered this may be caused by hardware related factors 0201 Failure in the HDD encry...

Page 86: ... 2 After Replacing 1 HDD format 1 1 Start with the safe mode While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously turn ON the main powerswitch 1 2 Use SST to format all partitions 2 Downloading system software 2 1 Use SST to download the system software System LANG RUI and others 3 Initializing the key certificate and CA certificate Lv 2 COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR CA KEY 4 Turning OFF and ON the main power switc...

Page 87: ... Manager ID and System PIN are not registered card registration to device cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting operation 3 Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body again 4 After downloading is completed go to Management Settings User Management Department ID Management Page Totals Be sure that only the downloaded card ID is displayed 5 Prin...

Page 88: ...in Controller PCB 2 NOTE Resetting registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced Main Controller PCB 2 Procedure of parts replacement see Removing Main Controller PCB 2 on p 4 86 Procedure of adjustment Service part Setting unit Main Controller PCB 2 Controller Box Frame Main Controller PCB 2 F 2 45 ...

Page 89: ...er Settings Paper Information 2 Printing the set registered data Use the service mode Lv 1 COPIER FUNCTION MISC P USER PRT List of the set registered data which cannot be backed up is printed 2 When Replacing 1 Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB DDR2 SDRAM 1 pc When option DDR2 SDRAM is installed 2 pc Memory PCB DDR2 SDRAM Memory PCB Prohibited Operation Do not transfer the following p...

Page 90: ...tificate request the user to generate them again TPM PCB Procedure of parts replacement see Removing Main Controller PCB 1 on p 4 81 Procedure of adjustment When TPM setting is OFF Any operation is not necessary at replacement When TPM setting is ON It is necessary to restore the TPM key which was backed up after changing the setting to ON 1 Removing the network cable Until the TPM key is restored...

Page 91: ...e signal BD signal Laser Driver PCB Image Formation Lens small Image Formation Lens large Reflection mirror BD PCB Polygon motor BD Mirror Main Controller PCB 2 Video signal DC Controller PCB Photosensitive Drum Laser H Laser A Laser B F 2 47 Laser is applied to the Nom image image on the positively charged drum with this machine Enlarged view Image area Non image area Non image area Laser ON Lase...

Page 92: ...nization control Laser beam intensity control APC control Others Laser scanner motor control Laser shutter control T 2 19 Parts Configuration Laser Driver PCB BD PCB Polygon motor BD Mirror Reflection mirror Image Formation Lens small Image Formation Lens large Name Role Laser driver Laser driver Polygonal mirror Perform scanning with a laser beam in the main scanning direction Reflection mirror R...

Page 93: ...ontrol 1Performed to keep a specified level of laser beam for each line Laser polygon motor control To be executed to rotate the Polygon Mirror at the specified speed Laser shutter control To prevent exposure of laser light in the machine when the Cover is open F 2 51 T 2 21 Laser ON Timing Control Laser ON OFF Control This control is performed to turn ON OFF a laser beam according to the combinat...

Page 94: ...nning direction on an 8 lines basis at the generation area of synchronization signal in horizontal scanning direction 6 Once the PBD signal is received Main Controller PCB 2 sends video signal to the DC Controller PCB 7 The video signal sent from Main Controller PCB 2 is output to the Laser Driver PCB according to the synchronization signal in horizontal scanning direction Laser Driver PCB Laser H...

Page 95: ...rive signal to the Laser Driver PCB to turn on the laser DC Controller PCB Laser Driver PCB PVREQ Image signal Image ASIC Main Controller PCB 2 F 2 55 Laser Beam Intensity Control APC Auto Power Control Control To keep constant laser light intensity per 8 beams 1BD basis Execution timing When the laser is scanned per line Control Description 1 The DC Controller PCB outputs laser control signal to ...

Page 96: ...ignal DEC are controlled to keep the specified speed Polygon motor BD PCB BD DEC ACC DC Controller PCB Related Error Code E100 Failure to detect PLOCK signal during BD rotation E110 Failure to detect VLOCK signal during FG rotation F 2 57 Laser Shutter Control To prevent laser exposure in the machine when the Cover is open Execution timing When the Front Door or Multi tray Cover opens closes Contr...

Page 97: ...Qty Cleaning interval Remarks Dust proof glass 1 Clean when black lines or the like occurs due to soil on the Dustproof Glass When Replacing Parts No Parts Name When replacing parts 1 Laser Scanner Unit 1 Execution of potential control COPIER FUNCTION DPC DPC 2 Write down the write start position adjustment value of laser in the following service mode on the service label COPIER ADJUST LASER PVE O...

Page 98: ...ive Drum Material A Si Drum diameter 84 mm diameter Cleaning Cleaning Blade Process speed iR ADV 6075 350 mm sec iR ADV 6065 6055 290 mm sec Separation method Curvature separation separation claw Drum Heater Yes 42 2 deg C Drum HP detection Yes Developing Assembly Developing method Dry 1 component toner projection method Developing Cylinder iR ADV 6075 6065 6055 series 1 cylinder single developing...

Page 99: ... 530 to 800 V To be specified by the estimated life and environment Developing bias AC bias 1200 V Fixed value ON OFF only DC bias 200 to 300 V To be specified by the estimated life and environment Dust collection bias DC bias 800 V Constant voltage control Pre transfer charging bias AC bias 8300 V Fixed value ON OFF only DC bias 0 to 6000 V Constant current control to be specified by the environm...

Page 100: ...exposure LED Primary Charging Assembly Primary Charging Wire Potential Sensor Grid Wire Pre transfer Charging Wire Pre transfer Charging Assembly Photosensitive Drum Developing Cylinder Dust Collecting Roller Developing Blade Toner Stirrer F 2 62 Transfer Area Static Eliminator Drive Roller Cleaning Blade Transfer Roller Idler Roller Transfer Belt Engagement Arm Engagement Cam Waste Toner Feed Scr...

Page 101: ...ainer Toner Container Hopper Hopper Toner Feed Screw Toner Feed Screw Magnet Roller Buffer Buffer Toner Stirrer Toner Stirrer Sub Hopper Sub Hopper Right Side View Front View Magnet Roller F 2 64 Waste Toner Feeding Area Waste Toner Feed Assembly Waste Toner Feed Screw Waste Toner Feed Screw Waste Toner Container ETB cleaning Unit Drum Cleaning Unit Waste Toner F 2 65 ...

Page 102: ...nsfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor To drive the Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad and the Pre transfer Charging Shutter CL1 Developing Clutch To drive the Developing Cylinder and the Toner Stirring Plate TS1 Developing Toner Sensor To detect toner level in the Developing Assembly PS61 Drum Home Position Sensor To detect home position of the Photosensitive Drum F 2 66 T 2 27 Transfer Area M43...

Page 103: ...tor To drive the Toner Feed Screw and the Toner Stirring Plate to feed toner CL5 Developing Assembly Toner Supply Clutch To drive the Magnet Roller to supply toner to the Developing Assembly F 2 68 Code Parts name Function TS2 Buffer Toner Sensor 1 To detect toner level in the Buffer To avoid oversupply to the Buffer TS3 Buffer Toner Sensor 2 To detect toner level in the Buffer to detect absence o...

Page 104: ...ent image on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum When the laser beam is applied on the surface of the positively charged Photosensitive Drum the potential at the emitted part is reduced Developing block Transfer block 4 Developing With the magnetic 1 component toner projection developing method toner that has been negatively charged by the Developing Cylinder is attached to the latent image on ...

Page 105: ...m Cleaning 1 Pre exposure 2 Primary Charging 3 Laser exposure 4 Development 1 Electrostatic latent image formation Block 6 Drum cleaning Block 2 Development Block 3 Transfer Block 4 Fixing Block 5 ETB cleaning Block ETB Unit Photosensitive Drum Flow of paper Rotation of photosensitive drum and ETB Deck Cassette 9 ETB cleaning 7 Separation 6 Transfer 5 Pre transfer Charging F 2 70 ...

Page 106: ...by ozone generated from the Primary Charging Wire Developing Developing bias control To apply positive potential to the Developing Cylinder so that the toner on the Developing Cylinder is attached on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum Dust collection bias control To collect the scattered toner to prevent toner that scatters during developing process from being attached to the Photosensitive Dr...

Page 107: ...control To correct uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum by laser exposure Other Control Startup Contrast Potential To adjust the contrast potential Vcont at startup in order to maintain the density consistently Laser APC control To correct the laser output control value to prevent changes in surface potential by the laser output Blank Band Control To blow off the reversely charged toner on ...

Page 108: ...ecution timing Interruption at every 2000 sheets of continuous print the value can be changed in service mode 100 to 2000 sheets After last rotation which is performed on the 1500th sheet and later since the last cleaning 1 roundtrip In the case of executing Clean Wire in user mode 1 roundtrip In the case of executing the wire cleaning in service mode 1 roundtrip or 3 roundtrip Control description...

Page 109: ...in 3 to 5 8 23 deg C 30 OFF 270 min 4 to 8 9 23 deg C 50 OFF 255 min Energy save to 12 41 22 deg C 75 OFF 240 min 5 to 15 23 deg C 70 ON Not close 6 to 18 27 deg C 80 ON Not close 7 to 12 41 30 deg C 80 ON Not close T 2 33 Image formation is completed or Standby mode starts DC Controller starts DCON alarm 240 min to 300 min Recovery starts Sleep mode starts Min 10 sec Max 240 min Sleep mode restar...

Page 110: ...ng Shutter Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor M6 Primary Charging Shutter Sensor PS94 Screw Primary Charging Wire Grid Wire Grid Wire Charging Shutter Photosensitive Drum Primary Charging Wire Related error code E060 0001 Primary Charging Shutter HP open error E060 0002 Primary Charging Shutter HP close error F 2 76 Developing Developing Bias Control To form a toner image on the Photosensitive D...

Page 111: ...upply Mouths of the Developing Assembly and the Buffer Unit to prevent toner scattering The Developing Shutter and Buffer Shutter is opened closed in conjunction with push in and pull out of the Developing Assembly Opening and Closing Operations of the Developing Shutter By pushing the Developing Assembly in the main body the Developing Shutter comes in contact with the Buffer Unit By pushing the ...

Page 112: ...m is pushed by the protrusion on the Developing Shutter so the Buffer Shutter is closed followed by the Supply Mouth The Shutter Arm lifts up by hitting to the bottom of the Hopper Projection Spring Toner Push Developing Assembly Buffer Assembly Shutter Open Buffer Assembly Shutter Buffer Assembly Shutter Buffer Assembly Buffer Assembly Developing Assembly F 2 80 Transfer Pre transfer Charging Bia...

Page 113: ...n be changed within the range between 1000 and 5000 sheets COPIER OPTION CLEANING W CLN P F 2 82 Pre transfer Charging Shutter Control To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products nitrogen oxide accumulated on the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Execution timing To be executed together with the Pre transfer charging wire cleaning control at the same time Contr...

Page 114: ...ailure in paper separation Paper interval bias the bias to be applied between sheets The bias value is determined by the environment the paper type and the mode table Transfer High Voltage PCB PCB13 DC positive Transfer Roller Photosensitive Drum F 2 84 ETB Cleaning Control To prevent image failure caused by toner soil on the ETB the residual toner on the Transfer Belt is removed Control descripti...

Page 115: ...Disengagement Cam rotate 2 Rotation of the Disengagement Cam moves the Disengagement Arm up and down to make the Transfer Belt engaged disengaged with the Photosensitive Drum 3 Following 2 sensors detect position of the Transfer Belt Transfer Belt Engage Sensor PS55 to detect engagement of the Transfer Belt Transfer Belt Disengage Sensor PS56 to detect disengagement home position of the Transfer B...

Page 116: ...ion Separation Control Separation from the Drum Separation is performed using the curvature separation method Paper NOTE The Separation Claw separates sheets before entering the Drum Cleaning Unit This effectively avoids failure in paper feed double feed etc F 2 87 Photosensitive Drum Separation Claw Separation Claw Paper F 2 88 ...

Page 117: ...iming During printing while the Developing Motor is driving Control Description Making the Separation Claw move back and forth by transmitting the rotation force of the Developing Motor Drive via the cam and Gear Unit Reciprocation width 25mm 1 The drive of the Developing Drive Motor makes the cam rotate 2 The Drive Lever moves in a pendulum motion by the rotation of the cam which make the Drive S...

Page 118: ...Feeding Screw feeds the scraped waste toner to the Waste Toner Container Drum Cleaning Blade Drum Cleaning Unit Waste Toner Feed Screw Magnet Roller Auxiliary Roller Photosensitive Drum F 2 91 Separation Bias Control To prevent image soil caused by toner accumulated on the Drum Separation Claw this control prevents attachment of toner on the Photosensitive Drum with the Drum Separation Claw Execut...

Page 119: ...rol is used during the 2D shading control Photosensitive Drum Drum Home Position Sensor PS61 Flag F 2 93 Drum Heater Control To make potential characteristic for charging or exposure stable by keeping the specified temperature of the Photosensitive Drum The Drum Heater is the flat heater located inside the Photosensitive Drum to keep moisture content on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum const...

Page 120: ... OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Environment control 1 Environment control 1 ON ON Cassette OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Reader OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Environment Switch ON Mode Main Power OFF sleep mode low energy consumption 3 sleep mode high energy consumption 3 WarmUp Recovery Standby Energy Saver Copy Print Switch Main SW OFF ON Cassette SW OFF ON O...

Page 121: ...gy consumption 3 sleep mode high energy consumption 3 WarmUp Recovery Standby Energy Saver Copy Print Switch Main SW OFF ON Cassette SW OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Heater Drum ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 OFF OFF ON 1 ON 1 ON ON Cassette OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Reader ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 It can be switched by COPIR OPTION IMG MCON 2D S...

Page 122: ... Drum Heater when startup time is delayed because of the increase of controls due to 2 dimensional shading ON COPIER OPTION IMG LSR 2D SHADE Image priority mode 2 dimensional shading ON OFF 0 2 dimensional shading OFF Default 1 2 dimensional shading ON The Drum Heater is turned ON at first time for the day sleep standby energy saving potential control and 2 dimensional shading T 2 38 Toner Supply ...

Page 123: ...eveloping Assembly Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper displacement toner absence E020 0021 Error in Developing Assembly Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper displacement toner presence Toner Level Detection Developing Assembly Toner Container Sub Hopper TS2 TS3 TS1 Buffer Toner level Status Message Operation 100 to 25 TS1 TS2 TS3 No When TS3 detects absence of toner the Toner Supply Motor M10 is driven Once T...

Page 124: ...Panel After the Toner Container is replaced the toner level returns to 100 The number 900 sheets is a logical value derived from calculation thus it varies approx 30 In addition with Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW T RUN LV approx 140 sheets can be printed with 30 of variation T 2 40 Waste Toner Feeding Area Waste Toner Full Level Detection The waste toner of the Drum Cleaning Unit and the ETB U...

Page 125: ...vel of waste toner Full criterion Host machine is stopped error display The Drive Gear escapes when a certain load is applied to the Waste Toner Feeding Screw and an error is displayed after the Host Machine has been stopped T 2 41 T 2 42 Waste Toner Feed Screw Lock Detection To detect lock state of the Waste Toner Feed Screw The drive by the Developing Motor M2 is transmitted to the Screw Gear wh...

Page 126: ... control prevents image failure due to change of the environment or deterioration of the Photosensitive Drum to ensure stabilized print Primary Charging Wire Developing Cylinder Laser Potential Sensor Potential control DC Controller PCB Laser APC control Developing bias Vdc Drum surface potential Primary current Ip Laser Power Lp PASCAL Main Controller PCB2 Reader PASCAL LUT Laser Power Lp F 2 98 ...

Page 127: ...r processing 1 500 sheets or more following the last potential control execution Last rotation after the first job following 90 minutes or more elapsed from the last potential control executio APC Correction at Paper Interval 0 2 5 5 At every 20 sheet interval APC Control at Warm up Rotation 2 6 6 Operation Criteria Initial rotation after the first job following 60 minutes or more elapsed from the...

Page 128: ...ASCAL Full correction PASCAL Quick correction Idle Rotation at First in the Day H H environment 15 30 12 12 Only when the environment is in high temperature humidity Contrast Potential Correction at Startup 1 Disengagement of Transfer Unit 1 At jam recovery after patch generation at job completion Weak Bias Control at Leading Edge Black Band Control 10 13 14 13 At last rotation after the predefine...

Page 129: ...rent Ip_Target_Pre which has been determined in the last potential control 1 is applied and the Potential Sensor measures drum surface potential VD_Pre 1 At the time of installation the primary current adjusted in the factory is applied 2 The drum surface potential VD_Pre and the target potential VD_Target are compared to apply the primary current α x Ip_Target_Pre which makes the target potential...

Page 130: ...rface potential VLm is within the range of the target potential 10V Potential measurement is executed up to 8 times and correction is executed up to 8 times VLm VL_Target 10V EPC_LP_Target VL_Target β EPC_LP_Target_Pre VLβ_Pre LP_Target_Pre VL_Pre VI V 1 2 4 3 EPC_LP_Target 5 Laser power relative value F 2 100 When the drum surface potential is not as follows 10V target potential 10V When the drum...

Page 131: ...l up to 20 times Abend of potential control F061 Error Normal end of potential control F 2 101 3 Determination of developing bias Vdc Developing bias is determined by adding the Vback value based on the environment table to VL bright area potential determined in the foregoing control Developing bias Vdc VL Vback VL measured bright area potential determined by the potential control Vback the potent...

Page 132: ...DC Controller PCB Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 2 Potential control Send data of test print Main Controller PCB 2 YES NO Generate gradation table PASCALγLUT End 3 sheet output for test print Output test print Reader Read test print Density data output Full adjustment execution of auto gradation adjustment F 2 103 NOTE Since Inbox images are binary gradation adjustment cannot be perform...

Page 133: ...ntrol corrects laser output control value to prevent change of surface potential by laser output Correction type A Between sheet APC control to keep constant bright area potential VL without reducing productivity during continuous jobs B Initial rotation APC to determine VL according to the laser and drum temperature characteristics C Last rotation APC control to determine VL according to the lase...

Page 134: ...d ON EEPROM data is compared to RAM data If there is any difference in the data the EEPROM data is stored in the backup RAM NOTE Whether the control is enabled can be checked with COPIER DISPLAY 2D SHD 2D STS If 0 is displayed check DRM LOT number When 0 is displayed it means that the drum has not been registered thus execute FUNCTION 2D SHADE 2D READ to register the drum 3 Potential data on the D...

Page 135: ...ding pattern output COPIER OPTION IMG LSR 2D SW Read 2D shading ROM F 2 106 White Band Control Oppositely charged toner on the Developing Sleeve is forcibly applied on the Drum and collected by the Cleaning Unit NOTE Large grained toner is less likely to be charged compared to small grained toner and can be positively charged opposite charging in rare cases Such oppositely charged toner fails to b...

Page 136: ...ion of the last black band control When low duty discharge control is executed 1 This value can be changed in service mode Moisture content Interval sheets 12g or more 2 000 T 2 44 Control description 1 Black band described below is created on the Drum 2 Black band is scraped by the Drum Cleaning Blade and toner is properly applied on the Cleaning Blade at that moment 3 This control turns off the ...

Page 137: ... discharge the toner according to the average image duty 1 Threshold is determined by the following environment table The value can be changed in service mode Moisture content Temperature Humidity Threshold 0 86 23deg C 5 1 1 73 23deg C 10 1 5 8 23deg C 30 1 8 9 23deg C 50 1 15 23deg C 70 2 18 28deg C 80 2 5 21 6 30deg C 80 3 Control description 1 Video count on every page is retrieved 2 The obtai...

Page 138: ...n a high temperature humidity environment 30 deg C 80 it is 500000 sheets T 2 46 T 2 47 Periodical Servicing List Parts Area Name Expected life Remarks Toner Receptacle Tray As needed Remove toner on the tray Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 50 Clean with lint free paper moistened with water Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate 50 Clean with lint free paper moistened with water Pre transfer C...

Page 139: ...hen ON the main power switch Primary Charging Assembly Procedure of parts replacement see Removing the Primary Charging Assembly on p 4 97 Procedure of adjustment 1 Output a halftone image using the service mode TEST PG TYPE 5 2 Execute the following procedure according to the density difference on the front and rear sides of the test print image When the front side test print image is dark execut...

Page 140: ... rear side test print image is dark NOTE When the rear side test print image is dark 2 execute step 4 until the density becomes even When the density becomes even execute step 5 and the following When the adjustment screw is turned clockwise the Charging Wire goes down and up gap between grid and Charging Wire becomes narrow and wide As a result the density of output image becomes light CAUTION Be...

Page 141: ...trol COPIER FUNCTION DPC DPC 8 Execute the density correction using the user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Density Pre transfer Charging Assembly Procedure of parts replacement see Removing the Pre transfer Charging Assembly on p 4 108 Procedure of adjustment 1 Clear the parts counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 PO UNIT 2 Clean the Charging Wire COPIER FU...

Page 142: ... to the host machine with the drum ROM included in the drum NOTE If the ROM is not replaced the replaced drum and the drum unique data stored in the ROM data are not matched As a result when the 2D shading function is enabled it is not functioned normally 2 1 Remove the Drum EEROM 1 Screw 1 Connector F 2 110 3 Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover 4 Activate the ...

Page 143: ...p 4 129 Procedure of adjustment 1 Supplying Developing Assembly toner COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL TONER S Potential Control PCB Unit Procedure of parts replacement see Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit on p 4 166 Procedure of adjustment 1 Adjust the Potential Sensor offset COPIER FUNCTION DPC OFST F 2 112 ETB Procedure of parts replacement see Removing the ETB Unit on p 4 137 see Removing the ET...

Page 144: ...R TEST PG PG PICK A3 LDR or larger With shock image go to step 2 Without shock image End 2 Measure a distance from the trailing edge of the shock image 3 Adjust using the following service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ TBLT SPD Adjust the Transfer Belt speed Shock image is located approx 55mm from the trailing edge Adjust the value by 10 gradually Shock image is located approx 63mm from the trailing...

Page 145: ...ttings Common Print Settings Secure Watermark Settings Adjust Background Character Contrast 1 Check that the two dimensional shading is enabled COPIER OPTION IMG LSR 2D SHADE 1 Enabled 2 Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch CAUTION Be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power switch after step 1 Uneven density may be reduced by the two dimensional shading correction at the startup 3 Output...

Page 146: ...el 2 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE1 Level 2 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE2 Level 2 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE3 Level 2 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE4 Level 2 5 2 Adjust the target horizontal scanning direction A to O which uneven density is seen After selecting M LINE1 M LINE2 select the target horizontal scanning window A to O and enter the numerical value using numerical keypad COPIER...

Page 147: ...ical scanning direction 9 to 16 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE3 Level 2 Vertical scanning direction 17 to 24 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE4 Level 2 Vertical scanning direction 25 to 32 CAUTION Be sure to switch the screen after entering the value Unless the screen is switched the numerical value is not reflected Actually the value is not reflected on the screen but it is retained internally Whe...

Page 148: ...of Separation Claw Location Drum Separation Claw Cause When the paper enters to the drum at separation failure the Separation Claw may be deformed When the Separation Claw is deformed the paper is easily caught by the leading edge of the Separation Claw when the paper especially curled paper is fed and a jam Jam Code 0205 is likely to occur Condition Job after a jam which occurs when the paper ent...

Page 149: ... adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire and check the output result When making adjustment execute the work while keeping the wire at dark area apart Feed Direction OR If it is not a straight uneven density change the value of the following service mode in decrement of 10 and check the output result COPIER ADJUST VCONT DE OFST Setting value default 0 10 20 50 CAUTION Executing the above settin...

Page 150: ...Check the image Complete YES YES NO NO Is it fixed Is the density line width fixed within the acceptable range F 2 123 Image Smeared Image Feed Direction Side Line Select the following Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Auto Adjust Gradation and check the output result 1 COPIER ADJUST V CONT VL OFST set the value of VL OFST to 10 2 Select the following COPIER FUNCTION DPC ex...

Page 151: ...il inside the Heater Unit generates a high frequency magnetic field around the coil By this magnetic field an eddy current induction current runs through the Fixing Roller and the Fixing Roller generates electricity by itself High frequency current Coil Magnetic material Ferrite Core Metal Flux Eddy current Exothermic heat 2 Making the Fixing Assembly as a unitt Maintenance performance has been im...

Page 152: ...h 1 pc non contact type Protective function Yes detection by the Thermistor and the Thermal Switch Separation mechanism Upper Separation Claw contact type Reciprocating width 3mm Static Eliminator Fixing Roller Pressure Roller Shutter Cleaning mechanism Fixing Cleaning Web Inlet guide height control No Bias application No Control to prevent temperature rise at the edge control of heating area by f...

Page 153: ...hermistor 2 Contact type failure detection Shutter operation temperature detection TP1 Thermal Switch1 Non Contact type 200 5 deg C To prevent abnormal temperature rise PS53 Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor to detect shutter position F 2 128 T 2 51 Drive configuration M3 SL9 M15 Fixing Shutter Motor Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor PS53 Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid Fixing Motor Fixing ...

Page 154: ...control drive of the Shutter SL9 Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid To control drive of the Cleaning Web PS4 Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor To prevent scratches on Fixing Roller due to jam PS45 Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor To detect length of the Cleaning Web PS51 Fixing Inlet Sensor To detect paper wrapping and stationary PS52 Fixing Outlet Sensor PS53 Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor to detect...

Page 155: ...on Claw reciprocating control To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller by the Upper Separation Claw this control moves the Upper Separation Claw back and forth 7 Cleaning Web drive control To prevent fixing offset this control removes residual toner on the surface of the Fixing Roller 8 Cleaning Web level detection To detect level of the Cleaning Web 9 Protective function To detect error by Thermistor...

Page 156: ...emperature environment startup mode After it reaches the target temperature the target temperature is maintained until completion of the potential control and then the machine enters ready state Conditions Target temperature Target temperature reaching time Environment temperature Environment humidity Fixing Roller temperature Less than 17 deg C 70 deg C or less 195 deg C 75 sec reference value Hi...

Page 157: ...on the control temperature are shown below Normal environment 17 degC or higher Destination Model Time minute 0 to 1 1 to 5 5 to 10 10 and longer Japanese imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 185 180 175 170 mageRUNNER ADVANCE 6065 185 180 175 170 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6055 180 175 170 170 Non Japanese imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 6065 6055 190 185 180 175 Low temperature environment Lower than 17 degC Destination ...

Page 158: ... to 10 10 and longer Japanese imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 6065 Plain paper 190 185 180 175 Heavy paper 195 195 195 195 Bond paper 205 205 205 205 Thin paper 160 160 160 160 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6055 Plain paper 185 180 175 175 Heavy paper 190 190 190 190 Bond paper 205 205 205 205 Thin paper 160 160 160 160 Non Japanese imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 Plain paper 198 193 188 183 Heavy paper 198 198 198 193 B...

Page 159: ...xing Unit is turned OFF in Low Energy Mode NOTE To be recovered to the normal mode according to the temperature control at warm up NOTE The time to change to the low power mode can be changed from Settings Registration Preferences Timer Energy Settings Auto Sleep Time Default 1 min Related Error Code E000 Fixing Assembly low temperature error E001 Fixing Assembly high temperature error E002 Fixing...

Page 160: ... productivity is dropped or the job is stopped to prevent fixing failure Plain Paper When the environment temperature is 17 deg C or higher the fixing temperature of 100 productivity remains so the down sequence does not start When the environment temperature is lower than 17 deg C it may start down sequence NOTE When the print temperature is reduced by the service mode although the environment te...

Page 161: ... paper Heavy paper Switching the temperature control is conducted but print operation continues so downtime does not occur Bond paper Plain paper Bond paper Thin paper 60 sec Thin paper Bond paper 80 sec Plain paper Bond paper 30 sec Heavy paper Bond paper 10 sec T 2 64 Related Service Mode To change temperature threshold of down sequence with special paper COPIER OPTION IMG FX FIX TEMP 0 Fixing p...

Page 162: ...ied position There are cut offs on the circumference of the Shutter Drive Gear front which is engaged with the Shutter Detection of this cut offs by the Shutter HP Sensor PS53 determines whether the Shutter is set in the specified position Shutter drive gear front Shutter drive gear rear Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor PS53 Shutter Fixing Shutter Motor M15 Drive axis Shutter drive gear front C...

Page 163: ...01 When the Shutter failed to be moved to the specified position failed to be at normal state despite 3 times retry operation Paper Anti wrapping Control Overview With this control failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by paper wrapping around the Fixing Roller and the Pressure Roller is prevented Fixing Outlet Sensor PS52 Fixing Inlet Sensor PS51 Fixing Roller Paper F 2 140 ...

Page 164: ...1 Cleaning of the Fixing Roller is executed 5 times of web cleaning NOTE Paper presence in the Fixing Assembly is determined by the paper detection log with the Fixing Inlet Sensor to see whether the paper passes through the Sensor Thermistor reciprocating control To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Main Thermistor THM01 and Fixing Sub Thermistror2 THM3 the Fixing Main Ther...

Page 165: ...er Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid Fixing Cleaning Web roller Fixing Cleaning Web takeup roller Cleaning Web The take up length of the Cleaning Web is determined by the paper size and the number of sheets in 1 job Paper size 1st sheet 2nd sheet 3rd sheet 4th sheet or later Small The size with less than 220mm length in feeding direction LTR or less 1 time 1 time 0 time Repeat wrapping amount of ...

Page 166: ...times after the detection by this sensor a fixing web length warning message is displayed on the Control Panel Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor PS45 Fixing Cleaning Web takeup roller Web length detecting arm After the display of the fixing web length warning message the number of turning ON the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid is to be counted The Error Code E005 0000 is displayed once the count...

Page 167: ...stopping the AC power to the fixing heater the main thermistor THM1 sub thermistor2 THM3 has detected overheating the difference between temperature of each thermistors has deviated from a specific value Detecting an Error Using the Thermal Switch In response to a deviation in temperature 200 5 deg C bimetal contact of the thermal switch TP1 non contact type will open to cut the power supply line ...

Page 168: ...000 sheets 6 Fixing Roller Thurust Retainer FC6 3501 000 2 500 000 sheets When the fixing roller thrust retainer replaced the fixing roller must be replaced as well 7 Upper separation claw FB5 3625 000 6 500 000 sheets T 2 66 T 2 67 Periodical Servicing List Parts Area Name Piece Operation Interval Remarks Fixing inlet guide 1 500 000 sheets Clean with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Fixing...

Page 169: ...86 Procedure of adjustment 1 Grease Application Apply approx 20mg of grease MOLYKOTE HP 300 CK 8012 to inner circumference and outer circumference of the Bushing so that all circumferences are covered with white film otherwise abnormal noise can occur squeaking 2 Clear the counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX UP RL Main Thermistor Sub Thermistor2 Clear the counter COPIER COUNTER PRDC 1 FIX TH1 Sub The...

Page 170: ...When paper is A3 LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity high humidity environment idle rotation is performed for up to 10 seconds 3 When paper is A3 LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity high humidity environment idle rotation is performed for up to 20 seconds 4 When paper is B4 or larger size paper in all environments idle rotation is performed for up to 10 seconds 5 When paper is ...

Page 171: ...uplex Assembly as one unit as well as making the Delivery Unit and the Door of the Fixing Assembly as one unit This feature is enabled by using forcible paper feed control that feeds paper to the position where the jammed paper is easily removed in the case of paper jam Increased pickup capacity of the Multi purpose Tray 50 sheets 100 sheets Simple retard method is used for pickup Stacking capacit...

Page 172: ... B5 B5R A5R 8K 270 0 x 390 0mm 16K 270 0 x 195 0mm LDR 279 4 x 431 8mm LGL 215 9 x 355 6mm LTR 279 4 x 215 9mm LTRR 215 9 x 279 4mm STMTR 139 7 x 215 9mm EXE 267 0 x 184 0mm Multi purpose Tray Size that can be loaded to cassette Postcard Reply Postcard 4 On 1 Postcard Envelope Irregular size 100 x 148 mm to 330 2 x 431 8 mm Paper Grammage Left Right Deck 52g m2 220g m2 Cassette 3 4 52g m2 220g m2 ...

Page 173: ...eck Pickup Sensor 2 PS21 Vertical Path Sensor3 PS22 Vertical Path Sensor4 PS23 Multi purpose Tray Paper Sensor PS24 PS25 Vertical Path Sensor1 Vertical Path Sensor2 PS26 Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor PS27 Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor PS28 Writing Gudging Sensor PS29 Registration Sensor PS31 Side Registration Sensor PS32 PS33 Right Deck Pickup Sensor Left Deck Pull Out Sensor PS35 Inner Delivery Sensor PS36...

Page 174: ...ion Front Roller Vertical Path Roller1 Left Deck Feed Roller Left Deck Pickup Roller Left Deck Separation Roller Right Deck Feed Roller Right Deck Pickup Roller Right Deck Separation Roller Cassette 3 Feed Roller Cassette 3 Pickup Roller Cassette 3 Separation Roller Cassette 4 Feed Roller Cassette 4 Pickup Roller Cassette 4 Separation Roller Vertical Path Roller2 Vertical Path Roller4 Vertical Pat...

Page 175: ...Pickup Motor M13 Delivery Motor M14 Reverse Motor M18 Duplex Feed Right Motor M19 Duplex Feed Left Motor M20 Cassette3 Lifter Motor M21 Cassette4 Lifter Motor M24 Left Deck Pickup Motor M26 Vertical Path Upper Motor M27 Vertical Path Lower Motor M31 Vertical Path Middle Motor M32 Duplex Feed Merging Motor M33 Multi purpose Registration Front Motor M34 Registration Motor M43 ETB Motor SL3 Cassette ...

Page 176: ...path Multi Tray Feeding path Option Pickup Cassette 4 Pickup Cassette 3 Pickup Right Deck Pigkup Left Deck Pigkup Duplex Flapper Reverse Flapper Delivery Flapper 1 2 3 4 3 4 1 1 side face up delivery duplex face down delivery 2 1 side face down delivery duplex printing 3 Duplex printing 4 1 side face down delivery F 2 150 ...

Page 177: ...peed Delivery speed Delivery reverse speed F 2 151 Model ImageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 6065 6055 mm s ppm 75 65 55 Pickup speed 500 Vertical path duplex speed 500 Pre registration speed 350 290 Post registration speed 500 Process speed 350 290 Delivery speed 350 750 ACC 290 750 ACC Delivery Reverse speed 350 750 ACC The delivery speed is slowed down to prevent the paper from being fallen out of the Del...

Page 178: ...e pickup unit Basic Movement Deck Cassette detection Paper Size Detection Paper Level Detection Paper Detection Pickup Retry Control Pickup Retry Control Multi purpose pickup tray unit Basic Movement Paper Detection Pre registration Registration Unit Pre registration Control Basic Movement Registration Deceleration Control Registration Acceleration Control Delivery unit Duplex unit Face up Deliver...

Page 179: ... Separation Roller and fed to Vertical Path Roller Deck Deck Separation Roller Deck Pickup Roller Deck Feed Roller SL6 SL7 PS19 PS20 M11 M24 M4 M5 Deck Lifter F 2 153 Cassette M12 SL3 SL4 Cassette Pickup Roller Cassette Feed Roller Cassette Separation Roller Cassette Liter PS21 PS22 M20 M21 NOTE The same single motor is used as a pickup motor for both Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 The drive is transmi...

Page 180: ...Level detection lever 1 Deck detection lever Deck Projection Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 PS47 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 PS49 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 PS48 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 PS45 F 2 155 Cassette Cassette is detected by Paper Size Detection Switch When all actuators of the Paper Size Detection Switch SW14 SW16 are not pressed it is detected as no cassette installed Cass...

Page 181: ...te Paper size in cassette 3 4 is each detected by 2 paper size detection switches ON OFF of 4 actuator in the Host Machine changes according to the Paper Size Detection Circular Plate Lever Position linked to Trailing Edge Side Slide Guide Paper size is detected by two 4 actuator ON OFF combinations And if all 4 actuator are OFF is detected it means no cassette Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1 S...

Page 182: ...N ON ON ON ON G_LGL 203 2 330 2 ON ON ON ON ON OFI 216 0 317 0 ON ON ON ON ON E_OFI 220 0 320 0 ON ON ON ON ON M_OFI 216 0 341 0 ON ON ON ON ON ON B_OFI 216 0 355 0 ON ON ON ON ON A_OFI 220 0 340 0 ON ON ON ON ON FOLIO 216 0 330 0 ON ON ON ON ON FLSP 216 0 330 0 ON ON ON ON ON A_FLSP 206 0 337 0 ON ON ON ON ON A_LTR 280 0 220 0 ON ON ON ON ON A_LTR R 220 0 280 0 ON ON ON ON ON A_LGL 220 0 340 0 ON...

Page 183: ... Sensor 1 PS49 ight Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 PS48 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 PS50 Control Panel Screen Display Full 100 50 ON OFF Half 50 25 ON ON Few 25 or less OFF ON T 2 75 Paper Level Detection Lever 1 Paper Level Detection Lever 2 Deck Detection Lever Deck Lifter Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 PS47 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 PS49 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 PS48 Left Deck Paper ...

Page 184: ... Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 PS69 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 PS72 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 PS70 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2 PS73 Control Panel Screen Display Full 100 50 OFF OFF Half 50 25 OFF ON Few 25 or less ON ON F 2 163 T 2 76 Full 100 50 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 PS69 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 PS72 Paper Level Detection Lever Holding Plate Cassette Lifter Cass...

Page 185: ... Detection Lever is pushed upward when lifter ascends and Paper Sensor is turned OFF If paper finishes the Detection Lever enters lifter hole and Paper Sensor is turned ON Deck Right Deck Paper Sensor PS7 Left Deck Paper Sensor PS11 Paper Detection Lever Deck Lifter F 2 167 Cassette Cassette Lifter Holding Plate Paper Detection Lever Cassette 3 Paper Sensor PS13 Cassette 4 Paper Sensor PS14 F 2 16...

Page 186: ...osition The Lifter is also raised when the Paper Level Sensor went OFF during the pickup operation Deck Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor PS8 Left Deck Paper Height Sensor PS12 Right Deck Pickup Motor M11 Left Deck Pickup Motor M24 Lifter Wire Deck Lifter Right Deck Paper Height Sensor PS6 Left Deck Paper Height Sensor PS10 Lifter Wire F 2 169 Cassette Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor PS68 Cassette 4 Upp...

Page 187: ... starts ascending but not detected by the Paper Surface Sensor and the Upper Limit Sensor within 3 minutes the alarm corresponds to the concerned Pickup Cassette will be triggered The alarm will release if the corresponding deck cassette is open or closed or the power is turned OFF ON Pickup Retry Control If paper leading edge is not detected by Pickup sensor within the specified time after pickup...

Page 188: ...ased and the holding plate will ascend SL2 Multi purpose Tray holding plate Multi purpose Tray feed roller Multi purpose Tray pull out roller Multi purpose Tray separation roller Spring Semi toothed gear F 2 171 3 When the Pre registration Multi purpose Tray Drive Motor drives the Multi purpose Pull Out Roller and the Multi purpose Feed Roller Multi purpose Separation Roller will rotate and only 1...

Page 189: ... by the outputted value from the Variable Resistor Assembly Multi purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB UN13 which is linked to movement of the Side Guide Plate Setting of the Side Guide Plate on the Multi purpose Pickup Tray is executed by users after paper is set Side Guide Side Guide Multi purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB UN13 F 2 173 Paper Detection When paper is set Paper Presence Dete...

Page 190: ...t Sensor Pre registration stop position8 Duplex Left Sensor F 2 175 Stop position name Pickup Assembly Paper size Reference sensor Stop position Pre registration stop position 1 Right Deck Size LTR 215 9mm Vertical Path Sensor1 PS24 Vertical Path Roller 1 Downstream 10mm Cassette3 Cassette4 Pre registration stop position 2 Cassette3 LTRR Size A4R Vertical Path Sensor2 PS25 Vertical Path Roller 2 D...

Page 191: ...stration Deceleration Control This control reduces speed of Multi purpose Tray Registration Front Motor M33 Registration feed speed by using Registration Sensor PS29 as a reference and pushes the paper against the Registration Roller to reduce hitting noise M33 Registration Roller Registration Sensor Registration Front Roller 5mm Stop point Registration Sensor Vertical path speed Pre registration ...

Page 192: ...et the process speed 10mm Speed of Registration Roller Post registration speed Process speed Registration Roller point Transfer point Start point of deceleration Model ImageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 6065 6055 PPM 75 65 55 Post registration speed 500 mm s Process speed 350 mm s 290 mm s start point of deceleration 48 6 mm 46 4 mm F 2 179 T 2 79 Transfer Post transfer Guide Attraction Control With this ma...

Page 193: ...ding to the paper size Delivery speed remains the same if no delivery option is connected SL5 M13 Inner Delivery Roller Outer Delivery Roller Outer Delivery Sensor PS36 Inner Delivery Sensor PS35 Outer Delivery Front Roller Reverse Upper Flapper F 2 181 Delivery Motor M13 Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid SL5 60 mm before Fixing Roller Based on Registration Sensor 20 mm after Fixing Roller Based on I...

Page 194: ...ion rotating speed of the Delivery Motor M13 is reduced NOTE Delivery speed is changed according to the paper size Delivery speed remains the same if no delivery option is connected SL5 M13 M14 Reverse Lower Roller Outer Delivery Roller Outer Delivery Roller Reverse Upper Roller Reverse Vertical Path Sensor PS65 F 2 183 50ms Delivery Motor M13 Reverse Motor M14 Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid SL5 R...

Page 195: ...leading edge and the paper is fed for a specified distance to stop at the position of Duplex Left Roller SL5 M14 M19 Reverse Lower Roller Duplex reverse standby point Duplex Left Sensor PS66 Duplex reverse point Duplex Flapper Reverse Upper Flapper Reverse Upper Roller Reverse Vertical Path Sensor PS65 F 2 185 50ms Reverse Motor M14 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor PS65 Duplex Left Sensor PS66 Reverse...

Page 196: ...ension of A4 size Timing When the main power is turned ON when the Front Cover is closed at the recovery from JAM process at job completion 2 Standby position operation The unit is moved to the side registration standby position 10 mm front corresponding the paper size 3 Detection operation The Side Registration Motor M16 is driven until Side Registration Sensor PS31 is turned OFF to detect side r...

Page 197: ...n B5 to A4R Pre registration stop position 4 Pre registration stop position 4 Pre registration stop position 4 Pre registration stop position 4 Pre registration stop position 4 Pre registration stop position 4 Pre registration stop position 1 Pre registration stop position 1 Registration stop position Registration stop position Registration stop position Registration stop position Pre registration...

Page 198: ...4 Technology Pickup Feed System Duplex Unit Circulation quantity and limit Technology Pickup Feed System Duplex Unit Circulation quantity and limit Pre registration stop position7 Duplex reverse stop position F 2 189 ...

Page 199: ...heets in circulation B4 to LDR inch 431 8 Registration stop position Registration stop position Registration stop position Registration stop position Registration stop position Pre registration stop position 4 Pre registration stop position 4 Pre registration stop position 4 Pre registration stop position 4 Pre registration stop position7 Duplex stop position Duplex stop position F 2 190 ...

Page 200: ...2 2 2 146 2 146 Technology Pickup Feed System Duplex Unit Circulation quantity and limit Technology Pickup Feed System Duplex Unit Circulation quantity and limit Registration stop position F 2 191 ...

Page 201: ... System Jam Detection Jam Code List Technology Pickup Feed System Jam Detection Jam Code List Jam Detection Jam Code List PS24 PS19 PS32 PS21 PS22 PS66 PS65 PS4 PS36 PS35 PS52 PS20 PS67 PS29 PS28 PS33 PS25 PS26 PS27 PS3 PS2 SW2 PS64 F 2 192 ...

Page 202: ...ertical Path Sensor4 Yes Yes Yes xx11 PS52 Fixing Outlet Sensor Yes Yes Yes xx12 PS35 Inner Delivery Sensor Yes Yes Yes xx13 PS36 Outer Delivery Sensor Yes Yes Yes xx14 PS65 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor Yes Yes Yes xx15 PS66 Duplex Left Sensor Yes Yes Yes xx17 PS1 Deck Pickup Roller Paer Deck POD Deck Yes xx18 PS6 Deck Pull Out Sensor Paer Deck POD Deck Yes Yes Yes 0305 PS29 Registration Sensor ea...

Page 203: ...gy Pickup Feed System Jam Detection Forced Paper Feed Control Forced Paper Feed Control If there is paper in the following place after jam is detected the paper will be forcedly fed to downstream direction This control suppresses paper damage during jam handling Forced Paper Feed Control F 2 193 ...

Page 204: ...me Expected life Remarks Feed Guide 50 Remove paper lint with lint free paper and cleaning tool Pre registration Guide 50 Clean with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Rollers wheels 50 Clean with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Separation Static Eliminator 50 Remove paper lint toner with Blower Duplex Unit Cleaning Brush 50 Using Blower remove paper lint which was collected by Cleaning...

Page 205: ... PCB AC Driver PCB DC Controller PCB Feed Driver PCB High Voltage PCB Relay PCB Main Driver PCB Option Finisher Paper Deck IH Coil Fixing Motor Transfer High Voltage PCB All night Power Supply PCB Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 DC Power Supply PCB 12V DC Power Supply PCB 24V DC Power Supply PCB B 24V Drum Heater Driver PCB Drum Motor Developing Motor Reader Duplex Driver PCB Cassette ...

Page 206: ...nnection from the Host Machine to the Options Staple Finisher E1 Booklet Finisher E1 ADF Unit Paper Deck Unit A1 Paper Deck Unit D1 F 2 195 F 2 196 Controls Power supply control Electric Power Management Over View Electric power shortage is prevented by equating the electric power in the machine Capacitor for preventing the electric power shortage which is applied to the conventional models iR5075...

Page 207: ...lectric power value others Electric Power Signal IH Coil Current Sensor Converts the flux occurred by current to the voltage F 2 198 Energy saver function Press power save switch Press power save switch Press power save switch Shifting time specified in User Mode has passed PDL job occurs PDL job occurs PDL job is complete PDL job is complete Deep Sleep STANDBY Power saving SLEEP STNDBY Sleep stan...

Page 208: ...er Drum OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Environment control 1 Environment control 1 ON ON Cassette OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Reader OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Environment Switch ON Mode Main Power OFF sleep mode low energy consumption 3 sleep mode high energy consumption 3 WarmUp Recovery Standby Energy Saver Copy Print Switch Main SW OFF ON Cassette SW O...

Page 209: ... energy consumption 3 sleep mode high energy consumption 3 WarmUp Recovery Standby Energy Saver Copy Print Switch Main SW OFF ON Cassette SW OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Heater Drum ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 OFF OFF ON 1 ON 1 ON ON Cassette OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Reader ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 It can be switched by COPIR OPTION IMG MCON...

Page 210: ...ing on the moisture contents when the duration time of standby mode energy saving mode is long 4 hours at minimum Related service modes COPIER OPTION IMG MCON DRM H SW To set ON OFF of the Drum Heater 0 Normal mode ON OFF of the Drum Heater is determined when moving to sleep 1 Default 1 Drum Heater ON mode The Drum Heater must be turned ON when moving to sleep 1 while the 2 dimensional shading rel...

Page 211: ...0002 FM14 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 To cool the power supply E804 0000 FM15 Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 To cool the power supply FM16 Laser Scanner Cooling Fan To cool the Laser Scanner E121 0001 FM17 Primary Charging Exhaust Fan To exhaust air around the Primary Charging Assembly 33 0027 FM30 Developer Lower Cooling Fan To cool the Developing Unit E820 0000 FM31 Developer Upper Cooling Fan To coo...

Page 212: ...ery position Print mode 1 sided print 2nd side of 2 sided print 1st side of the 2 sided print Count up timing 1 In the case of the Host Machine only Reference Sensor External Delivery Sensor PS36 Reference Sensor Small when the length is up to LTR Duplex Left Sensor PS66 R configuration when the length exceeds LTR up to A4R Duplex Merger Sensor PPS67 Large when the length is A4R or more Reverse Ve...

Page 213: ...del Type 1 Conventional method Total Black Large Total Black Small Scan Total 1 Print Total 1 1 1 ES SE PT NO DK FI PL HU CZ SI GR EE RU NL SK RO HR BG TR 112 113 501 301 0 0 Target Display number of each counter in service mode item Country code Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 230V AMS model Type 2 New method Total 1 1 1 1 1 1 ES SE PT NO DK FI PL HU CZ SI GR EE RU NL ...

Page 214: ...e Parts None Periodical Servicing None T 2 95 When Replacing Parts DC Controller PCB Get in service mode to enter all the latest service mode values written on the label at the back of the Front Cover Procedure of parts replacement see Removing the DC Controller PCB on p 4 231 Procedure of adjustment 1 Before Replacing 1 Backup of the Service Mode data COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP 2 After Repla...

Page 215: ...he Shaft Support Cover Left and the Shaft Support Cover Right 2 Open the DADF and retighten the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring NOTE If rotation of the arm is still loose after retightening the Fixation Screws according to Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm change the phase difference between the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring and the Fixation Screws acco...

Page 216: ...oubleshooting 3 Pull out the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft and rotate the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring to change the phase so that the Fixation Screws do not contact with the dents formed by tightening the screws 4 Insert the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft and retighten the 2 screws loosened in step 3 F 2 207 ...

Page 217: ... built in applications in iR ADV models 3 functions services were added These functions support the platform which was reinforced in terms of management In detail information which the MEAP applications manage respectively setting information user setting information a bunch of keys and log can be managed effectively and collectively These 3 functions are shown below 1 MEAP User Preference Service...

Page 218: ... Log data App1 format App1 format App2 format App2 format App2 format Setting and reference Setting and reference Setting and reference Devices and MEAP applications which support new functions App1 App2 Setting and reference Log logging only Configuration Config data common format Device Preference data Log data Platform General purpose management tool Configuration management service common form...

Page 219: ... Credential which the registered information is not discarded even at logout Volatile Credential Volatile Credential is used when sharing the authentication information between applications which log in authenticate to the same security domain Credential is registered using a login application so the application which accesses to the security domain used for authentication by login application can...

Page 220: ...p sleep mode so the application needs to perform reconnection processing This function can be used with the device which MEAP Specifications Ver 54 is supported F 2 214 Checking the Operating Environment Outline This section lists the requirements on the operating environment for the maintenance Note Cookies must be enabled for each session Java Script must be enabled in all environments The requi...

Page 221: ...er for name resolution Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 2000 2003 Domain Name System DNS access privileges Domain controller access privileges System environments for administrator and ordinary user Operating System Supported browser Java Runtime Enviro...

Page 222: ...th KDC Key Distribution Center 389 Communication with directory service using LDAP default is 389 may be changed to any port on LDAP service side T 2 100 Local Device Authentication Management For user registration edit in Local Authentication following system requirements must be satisfied System environments for administrator and ordinary user Operating System Supported browser Java Runtime Envi...

Page 223: ...that follow are grayed out and cannot be selected Return to the top screen press Login button at the lower left of the screen login as the system manager and configure the settings The default setting for the System Manager ID is 7654321 and the password is 7654321 F 2 216 Note When using SSL press Settings Registration button select Management Settings License Other MEAP Settings SSL Settings and...

Page 224: ... is necessary to set the key and the certificate necessary for the SSL communication Set the key and the certificate by SSL with SSL Settings that exists in Preferences Network TCP IP Settings SSL Settings on the iR device Login to SMS Outline SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication or by authentication via the Remote Login Service RLS login window RLS authentication Settin...

Page 225: ...lect Key and Certificate 3 After selecting Default Key pre installed key pair and server certificate select Set as the Default Key 4 Select Yes OK Note For detailed procedures of the Default Key setting refer to e Manual Security As for SMS by setting a Default Key encrypted SSL communication is always executed regardless of the following setting Management Settings Settings Registration MEAP Sett...

Page 226: ...PC browser on the same network as the MEAP device URL https IP address of MEAP device 8443 sms rls Ex https 172 16 188 240 8443 sms rls Note To encrypt the password information input when logging in SSL of the login screen was made effective However it is redirected to new URL effective SSL even when accessing with URL non SSL before Note When the device authentication method used is domain authen...

Page 227: ...authentication is enabled the password authentication screen is shown When only the RLS authentication is enabled no further authentication is needed to access SMS This is because users have already authorized upon accessing to Remote UI F 2 222 CAUTION In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO H if you log in SMS with RLS authentication no selection is displayed although it is the s...

Page 228: ...language setting value of portalLang storing in Cookie selected by the remote UI screen When the setting is other than English or Japanese Selection of display language is performed in a similar way with the SMS Installer Service Password Authentication mentioned above F 2 224 Setting the method to login to SMS Outline The SMS login method settings are done by setting the login Start Stop via the ...

Page 229: ...3 sms rls Login screen In case authentication method is SSO H 2 Select System Application Management F 2 225 F 2 226 3 Click Start or Stop button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service Password Authentication to check if the status is changed 4 Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly When clicking Stop to change the status to Start another password ...

Page 230: ...https 172 16 188 240 8443 sms rls Login screen by Password Authentication 2 Select System Application Management on System Management menu F 2 229 F 2 230 3 Click on Start or Stop button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service Remote Login Service Authentication to check if the status is changed 4 Log out and then log in again and access via the RLS authentication login window When RLS auth...

Page 231: ...evice resources including Amount Used Remaining and Percent Used This function enables users to judge the remaining resources before installing the additional application Such resource information is shown based on the manifest header stated at the top of each application which declares the resources required in the application Therefore the information does not necessarily show the resources actu...

Page 232: ...checking the resource information of each application in this model click on the application name in MEAP Application Management page F 2 235 F 2 234 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application 1 Log in to the SMS Refer to Login to SMS in this manual 2 Click Application List If the Application List is already being displayed this operation is not necessa...

Page 233: ...tions hereafter in this document Mechanism MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2 information below Device Specification ID MEAP Specifications Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP including print scan and copy and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number thus each model has a different ID It is ea...

Page 234: ...35 36 37 38 39 40 41 44 45 46 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks iR ADV C2030 iR ADV C2025 iR ADV C2020 5 6 7 9 10 11 13 14 15 17 18 19 25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 44 45 46 47 48 49 Ver 10 xx or later 5 6 7 9 10 11 13 14 15 17 18 19 25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 44 45 46 47 48 49 53 MEAP Specifications List Ver Des...

Page 235: ...Function to notify an event to the application at recovery from the sleep mode 55 System account release function 56 MEAP User Preference Service 57 MEAP Application Configuration Service 58 MEAP Application Log Service 59 Reserved T 2 106 MEAP Application System Information Outline Information about an application installed in the device is called MEAP application system information This informat...

Page 236: ...et Gateway for MEAP Application ID System Application Name 03a46668 63e4 4636 9cbb 492b6cef05d5 Application Version 1 0 0 Status Resolved Installed on Tue Oct 21 14 00 11 GMT 09 00 2003 Vendor Canon Inc License Status Installed Maximum Memory Usage 1024 Registered Service Application Name It is the name bundle name declared in a statement within the application program It may not necessarily be id...

Page 237: ...e when installing the MEAP applications it needs to check the available resource of SMS Since the indication of SMS resource volume fluctuates by the login service authentication function and configuration future model which the user selected it may show a bigger value than the following values List of Available Resources Product Name Storage Memory Thread Socket File Description iR ADV C5051 seri...

Page 238: ... lic F 2 241 F 2 242 CAUTION You cannot install only the license You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license Be sure to select its license file If you are adding a license to an existing application see Chapter 0 Adding a License File in this manual If you are updating an existing application stop the application then install the new application or its lic...

Page 239: ...provided in text file format enabling to view in a text editor The application ID and device serial number shown in the file allow users to confirm which device to install with the license file Note that any changes added to the license file may disable installation Cares should be taken when confirming the contents of the license file Sample file License File ID Application ID Serial Number Valid...

Page 240: ...nse File Procedure adding a license file 3 In Application License Information page shown on the screen click License Management button F 2 248 4 Click Browse button and select the license file you want to install 5 Click Install button 6 Check the content of the confirmation page and click OK button F 2 249 F 2 250 ...

Page 241: ...he status of the license will be Not Installed and its application will no longer be available for use You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the same iR the device with the same device serial number When replacing the device due to lease up or trouble use the license for forwarding see Chapter 0 License for forwarding 1 Stop the application you want to unins...

Page 242: ...dated license file before uninstalling an application If reinstallation is a possibility you may download the license file to a PC for storage To download or delete a license file first disable it WARNING Once you have removed an invalidated license file you will no longer be able to download it form the MEAP device Procedure downloading removing an invalidated license file The downloaded license ...

Page 243: ...ick License Management button 5 License Management page appears To download click Download button 6 When you have selected Download button specify where you want to store the file by following the instructions on the screen F 2 257 F 2 258 7 To delete click Delete button 8 When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown click Yes button WARNING Without the license file an application cannot be reinst...

Page 244: ...nd application counter e g Portal Service SDL SSO has been made to be able to install as many times as needed by the same license file This kind of license is called Reusable license License for forwarding Outline When the device is replaced due to lease up or trouble it is possible to continue using the current license information of MEAP application by forwarding it to a new device Service engin...

Page 245: ... to create license for forwarding 3 Specify the application to be forwarded 4 Click Create at Create Transfer License File F 2 263 F 2 264 5 The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed Click OK 6 Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading Click Download F 2 265 F 2 266 ...

Page 246: ...ted after all steps have been completed 10 Log out of SMS F 2 267 F 2 268 F 2 269 11 Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is Send the transfer license to the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new license for installation in the new device ...

Page 247: ...ated License File of this manual to delete the license file Dimmed Uninstall button shows that the selected application cannot be removed If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application a message will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no loner be available Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications...

Page 248: ...bject initialization To use the SEND function when the setting is for SSO H when sending email mail addresses need to be programmed against each user If they are not email cannot be sent Note however that when sending i Fax the mail addresses set in the device are used This device does not support SDL conventional SSO and Security Agent In addition these are not packaged in Administrator s CD Defa...

Page 249: ...sers themselves upon login The function makes use of options iW EMC Accounting Management Plig in to enable analysis and management of the iR device usage status The protocol used is as follows Kerberos LLS RLS ILS NTLMV2 WLS Web Service Login Service User information acquisition is done by LDAP so the Active Directory LDAP port needs to be made accessible If LDAP connection fails the authenticati...

Page 250: ...led even in domain authentication but with SSO H this is now unsupported System Manager Linkage automatic ID allocation to System Managers SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent hereinafter SA to authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group However SSO H does not support this...

Page 251: ...AP may access the Active Di rectory of a different site Therefore in such cases it is sometimes necessary to access across sites or subnets which means that LDAP protocol needs to have continuity across sites subnets normally LDAP is port No 389 Further if connection with Active Directory fails when acquiring site information another Active Directory will be accessed Site information once it has b...

Page 252: ...ories in DNS Note however that this is an optional operation Logging into other domains at multi domain At multi domain if another domain is logged into based on the site subnet information retrieved in the home domain the Active Directories of the login destination domain KDC address list are computed In the event that the domain controller IP addresses of other domains are outside of the site ac...

Page 253: ...o be used F 2 277 F 2 278 3 When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart restart the device CAUTION In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO H if you log in SMS with RLS authentication no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login method This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS ...

Page 254: ...ackup Data Using SST Outline When replacing or formatting the hard disk drive the data in the MEAP application area needs to be temporarily saved to your PC This chapter describes information on backing up the data in the MEAP application area and recovering the backup data In the case of MEAP installed devices the application is license managed so the application needs to be reinstalled and recon...

Page 255: ...in menu Copy Scan and Send Fax Scan and Store Access Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Favorite settings Default settings Settings of option shortcuts Previous settings Settings of quick menu Button size information Wallpaper settings Quick menu button information Restrict quick menu use Requirements for Backup Using the SST The following conditions must be met for use of the function 1 Device Firmware...

Page 256: ...sage The login service must be set again with SMS appears and the system cannot start up when you attempt to restart the system after formatting If this problem occurs change the login service to SSO H with SMS If you cannot access to SMS since you do not have the IP address of the device start the system with FIXIP mode hold down the numeric keys 1 and 7 and turn the power switch on The IP addres...

Page 257: ...the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 2 Restoring backup file Click Upload Data button and select the data backed up in the previous step Meapback bin to click Start Restoring Data Note that the data backed up in a different version cannot be restored 3 Transferring Data When the data is successfully transferred click...

Page 258: ... as a service tool and cannot be obtained by a general user In order to obtain a special license file a service technician needs to contact a person in charge of support of a sales company When contacting the person in charge of support the service technician also needs to provide the serial number of the device and the name of the MEAP application installed In the support departments of regional ...

Page 259: ...is the same as normal installation 5 Importing user information As necessary make login service selections and import user information Note When you replace the HDD without uninstalling MEAP applications make sure to reinstall the previously installed applications Unless reinstalling them MEAP counter will not be released and the message The number of applications that can be installed has exceede...

Page 260: ...g the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a conflict or wrong sequence of registration use You can access to SMS in this condition so that you can take necessary measures for example you can stop application that may cause the trouble If default authentication has been selected the mode of authentication remains valid otherwise the message The login...

Page 261: ... is 8000 for the port on HTTP server and 8443 for the port on HTTPS server In the case that these ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application the MEAP application cannot use the HTTP or HTTPS server s By changing the following ports to use however the MEAP application can be used as well as the existing system HTTP server Setting value is 0 through 65535 the value ...

Page 262: ...ure of HTTP Server 1 Start SERVICE MODE in Level 2 2 Press COPIER Option NETWORK buttons 3 Press or button until MEAP PN is shown on the screen Press MEAP PN button F 2 293 F 2 294 4 Press the port number to specify on the control panel the numerical value input in the field is displayed and press OK button 5 Check to see that it is reflected in setting field and turn off the main power and then r...

Page 263: ...cedure of HTTPS Server 1 Start SERVICE MODE in Level 2 2 Press COPIER Option NETWORK buttons 3 Press or button until MEAP SSL is shown on the screen Press MEAP SSL button 4 Press the port number to specify on the control panel the numerical value input in the field is displayed and press OK button F 2 297 F 2 298 5 Check to see that it is reflected in setting field and turn off the main power and ...

Page 264: ...k only on the conventional applications that support the MEAP application driver Cannot use USB keyboards Device cannot be detected Cannot use USB keyboards OFF default Native driver Cannot use USB keyboards Device cannot be detected Can use USB keyboards Can use USB keyboards Via software keyboards only Note When any settings changes are made the device must be restarted Setting the USB driver fo...

Page 265: ...ed keyboard When the software keyboard window is displayed characters can be entered from the USB keyboard in line entry not possible When the software keyboard window is not displayed entered characters will not be remembered The characters which can be entered from a USB keyboard is only a character which can be entered from the software keyboard Even if characters are entered from the USB keybo...

Page 266: ...ference use registration 1 Start SERVICE MODE in Level 1 2 Press COPIER Function CLEAR button 3 Press or button for several times until USBM CLR is shown on the screen Press USBM CLR button F 2 301 F 2 302 4 Press OK button to restart this device USB Device report print To check the vendor IDs idVendor and the product IDs idProduct registered in this device by means of declaration in Manifest file...

Page 267: ...g 1 Atr 80 MxPwr 200mA I If 0 Alt 0 EPs 2 Cls 08 stor Sub 06 Prot 50 Driver sub storage E Ad 81 I Atr 02 Bulk MxPS 512 Ivl 0ms E Ad 02 O Atr 02 Bulk MxPS 512 Ivl 31875us MEAP oreferred device information AppID 8c72686b 29c2 46c5 a07a a6c4177a6le3 VID 04A9 PID 2680 AppID 8c72686b 29c2 46c5 a07a a6c4177a6le3 VID 1234 PID 5678 AppID 8c72686b 29c2 46c5 a07a a6c4177a6le3 VID 4321 PID 8765 Application I...

Page 268: ...ed when the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned to the input device connected gpusbex It is displayed when a USB device which specific vendor ID Product ID are preferentially registered using a manifest and MEAP API is connected and the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned E Endpoint The Endpoint information of a USB device is shown T 2 113 Right or wrong of report output ...

Page 269: ...latform Micro Edition Java 2 Platform Micro Edition One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun Microsystems Inc It is applied for MEAP Other devices such as cellular phones and PDA J2RE Java 2 Runtime Environment A set of basic programs to run applications developed in the programming language of Java2 This set includes Java virtual machine providing runtime environment for Java applications among othe...

Page 270: ...nt for efficient access services When a proxy server receives a URL from a PC it searches the file in the cache and sends it to the PC if the requested file is found If the requested file is not stored in the cache it accesses the remote server of the URL to acquire the file and at the same time stores the acquired file in the cache so that the proxy server can quickly send the file at the next re...

Page 271: ...p the MEAP application Setting to hide JAM screen level 2 In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application hide the warning screen of error JAM such as JAM screen door opening no toner In the case that these errors occur there will be a display indicating call the service personnel etc Note Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen As for the screens for...

Page 272: ...tenance imageWARE Remote system using E RDS Device F 2 309 Features and benefits E RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front end processing of e Maintenance imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware equipment Major Functions Service Call Button If a user touches Service call button when corrupt image paper jam or and other problems has occurred E RDS gene...

Page 273: ...UST are made transmission is performed even when no change is made in the target data to be transmitted Transmission of service mode data is also performed when changes are made in the service mode setting value not subject to transmission items other than Level 1 2 or when settlement of a value is performed without changing the setting value 5 When a communication test is performed for the first ...

Page 274: ...If there is a proxy server in use find out the following Proxy server address Port No for proxy server Information item 4 Is proxy server authentication required If proxy server authentication is required find out the following User name and password required for proxy authentication 3 Network settings Based on the results of the information obtained in 2 Advance preparations make the iR device ne...

Page 275: ...rom breadcrumbs of the left columns and then Touch it 2 Touch the TCP IP Settings DNS Settings DNS Server Address Settings buttons F 2 312 F 2 313 3 Set the DNS server address based on the result obtained in Information item 2 under 2 Advance preparations and touch the OK button Select Primary DNS Server and make settings When the secondary DNS server is installed select Secondary DNS Server and m...

Page 276: ...oxy server based on the result obtained in Information item 3 under 2 Advance preparations a Use Proxy to On b Enter the server address c Enter port Number Validation 1 to 65 535 a b c d d If proxy server authentication is required Touch Set Authentication see figure above F 2 316 F 2 317 e Set the following items based on the result obtained in Information item 4 under 2 Advance preparations Set ...

Page 277: ...a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif01 RGW PORT Lv 1 COPIER Function INSTALL Set port number of UGW Validation 1 to 65535 Default 443 COM TEST Lv 1 COPIER Function INSTALL Execution of a communication test with UGW Display of the result Perform Communication test with UGW and set OK or NG as the result COM LOG Lv 1 COPIER Function INSTALL Display of detailed information about a communication error with U...

Page 278: ...ctivation inactivation of service browsing Browsing info is sent to UGW when OFF BRWS ACT 0 is changed to ACTIVE Setting result is displayed as OK or NG BRWS STS Lv 1 COPIER Display USER Display of Service Browser use status 0 OFF 1 Active 2 Suspend Default 0 OFF NOTE Generally once service browsing is enabled it cannot be disabled again To disable service browsing clear SRAM T 2 117 T 2 118 Steps...

Page 279: ...on of the CA certificate When the following operation is performed the CA certificate in the factory setting is automatically installed 1 Start Service Mode at Level 2 1 Press Settings Registration User Mode button on the control panel 2 Press 2 and 8 buttons at a time on the control panel 3 Press Settings Registration User Mode button on the control panel 4 Touch the Mode List button on the Servi...

Page 280: ...here are specific instructions to do so Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW F 2 327 F 2 326 7 Select COM TEST and then touch OK This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW If the communication is successful OK is displayed If NG failed appears refer to the Troubleshooting and repeat until OK is displayed NOTE The communication results with UGW ...

Page 281: ...OPIER Option USER SCALL SW 3 Touch the numeric button 1 on the control panel the setting value is changed to 1 and touch the OK button The data is reflected to the setting value field F 2 330 F 2 331 NOTE When the function is enabled the Service Call button is displayed on the bottom of the counter check screen displayed by touching the counter check button F 2 332 Steps for settings of service ca...

Page 282: ...g the OK button completes the service call regardless of whether 0 or 1 is set Steps for service call settings 1 Touch the Counter Check button on the control panel to display the counter check screen and touch the Service Call button F 2 334 F 2 335 2 Touch the Select Request button CAUTION When a service call has been already requested another service call cannot be sent The previous service cal...

Page 283: ...tton in the check screen NOTE E RDS generates an alarm of service call cancellation at this timing and sends the alarm to UGW F 2 338 F 2 339 Steps to Service Browser settings 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 For the procedures see Steps to E RDS settings step 1 2 Select COPIER Function INSTALL BRWS ACT and then touch OK NOTE E RDS sends browser information to UGW at this timing If the connection i...

Page 284: ...s step 1 2 Select COPIER Function CLEAR ERDS DAT and then touch OK Setting values and data to be initialized The following E RDS settings internal data and Alarm filtering information are initialized COPIER Function INSTALL E RDS COPIER Function INSTALL RGW ADR COPIER Function INSTALL RGW PORT COPIER Function INSTALL COM LOG CAUTION In case of replacing the CA certificate file even if initializati...

Page 285: ...g these retries depend on the CPCA data which saved internally Therefore if the data remains these retries will be done When a SOAP transmission error occurs to postServiceModeMenu only when settings are changed service mode menu data is obtained and transmitted for every retry When a SOAP transmission error occurs to postBrowserInfo only when the license status is changed in the Web browser optio...

Page 286: ... SENSOR MISC HT C HV TR P PASCAL When the following service call error is detected Error codes for transmission E000 E00F Fixing E020 Development ATR E060 E06F High voltage COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG No HV STS CCD DPOT DENS FIXING SENSOR MISC HT C HV TR P PASCAL Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry When a value is set to COPIER ADJUST subordinate s Service mode menu Transmission will be do...

Page 287: ...s repeated until it finishes successfully For detailed procedures see Steps to Service Browser settings T 2 120 Troubleshooting No 1 Symptom A communication test COM TEST results NG Cause Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete Remedy1 Check and take actions mentioned below 1 Check network connections Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which the main unit is connected ON ...

Page 288: ...ettings write down the primary and secondary addresses of the DNS server and touch the Cancel button F 2 346 F 2 347 b Select TCP IP Settings from breadcrumbs of the left columns and then Touch it c Select TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings PING Command enter the primary DNS server noted down in step a as the IP address and touch the Start button Is the response from the host displayed YES Proceed to R...

Page 289: ...EST error logs F 2 349 3 When each line is selected the communication log detailed screen is displayed as shown in the figure below Example No 05 NOTE A detailed description of the error appears below Information Max 128 characters Touch the OK button to return to the log screen 4 When a message is displayed take an appropriate action referring to Error code and strings No 2 Symptom A communicatio...

Page 290: ...s of errors are displayed as error information The error information except above these are displayed in the following form Error strings Method name Error details provided by UGW Error strings head is added to the error generated by the communication test No Code Error strings Cause Remedy 1 0500 0003 SUSPEND Communication test is not performed The communication test had not been performed though...

Page 291: ... UGW does not come within the specified time HTTPS level time out If this error occurs when the communication test is being run or Service Browser is being set try again after a period of time 19 8xxx 2048 Service not found There is a mistake in the UGW URL and UGW cannot be accessed Path is wrong Check that the value of URL of UGW RGW ADR is https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 20 0xxx 0003 E R...

Page 292: ... not right Perform a communication test COM TEST 33 8xxx 0004 Operation is not supported Method which E RDS is not supporting attempted Contact help desk 34 8xxx 0709 Tracking ID is not match When upgrading firmware the TrackingID notified by Updater differs from the thing of UGW designates Contact help desk 1 Hexadecimal indicates an error code returned from UGW Error details in UGW indicates err...

Page 293: ...Yes 1 You can select the version allowed Remote Update T 2 122 a UGW linked Download and Update Full Remote Update If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule and update setting are registered on UGW in advance full remote firmware update is available on an imageRUNNER ADVANCE series device Upon downloaded from CDS the firmware is updated on the device UGW 1 Set up customers devic...

Page 294: ...anual No No Yes 1 Manual download upload via Remote UI Remote UI Auto No No Yes 1 Manual No No Yes 1 Special download upload via Remote UI Remote UI Specific version only Obtain it separately Periodical update via Local UI Local UI Auto No No Yes 1 1 Only the latest version of Remote update enabled version is downloadable T 2 123 F 2 353 Installing MEAP Application System Option The following is t...

Page 295: ... File DSN Device Serial Number automatically sent to CDS upon LAN entered 5 Manuals etc LMS LAN 3 Create LF 2 License Authentication Canon Inc Sales Company Manual Upload F 2 355 System Configuration The figure below schematically shows the system configuration Internet CDS CDS CDS CDS MEAP application Manual LMS LMS LMS LMS User UGW UGW UGW UGW Firmware Application License Sales Company Business ...

Page 296: ...update logs Yes Yes Yes Displaying system logs Yes Yes Yes Internal system error notification Notifying internal system error occurrence to distribution server Yes Yes Yes Yes Functioning supports periodical update with a device after firmware version V50 00 T 2 124 Distribution Flow Firmware Installation Flow Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 4 methods a UGW l...

Page 297: ...on the device including change of the setting according to daylight saving time the firmware distribution may not be performed as scheduled But there is not the problem if it is time adjustment of several minutes with NTP servers Change of Setting from Service mode Any settings from Service mode will be enabled after restarting the device Cautions Concurrent use of Updater functions Multiple users...

Page 298: ...aranteed even if cut off in the middle of a job It becomes the recovery object after the device reboot and carry out send reception again Even during transfer Pull SCAN job processing is cancelled soon after scanning is completed Firmware update is cancelled if the jobs are not completed within 10 minutes If this occurs the error code 8x001106 will be returned different numbers will be shown for x...

Page 299: ...ode LMS linked Installation Yes LMA linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes LMS linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes T 2 126 T 2 127 Setting Sales Company s HQ When using devices input in the markets listed below the default setting of Sales Company s HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS Unless the setting is changed properly the desired firmware may not be abl...

Page 300: ...ser mode see the sections below to prepare as required Enabling UGW Link Enabling Update Firmware Button of User Mode Enabling Install Application Options Button of User Mode NOTE External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server 1 Start Ser...

Page 301: ...n 4 Press Settings button F 2 360 F 2 361 5 Ensure to enter https device c cdsknn net cds_soap updaterif in the field beside the Delivery Server URL button If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field click Delivery Server URL button to show the virtual keypad Check the URL and enter the correct one 6 Press OK to set the entered items Now the URL of the distribution server is s...

Page 302: ...servers You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a communication test of the Embedded RDS 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 1 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 2 Press 2 and 8 buttons at a time on the control panel 3 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 4 Service Mode screen is shown 2 Press Updater button F...

Page 303: ...nician Setting of Device Service Mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS UGW 0 1 Setting of UGW WebPortal In Customer Management screen set Do not distribute firmware to Distribute firmware Sales Company s HQ Setting of Authorities on UGW WebPortal See Analysis Firmware Distribution Information to grant the appropriate authorities to each account NOTE See imageWARE Remote Operator s Manual e Mainten...

Page 304: ... FNC SW CDS FIRM 0 1 User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled CDS FIRM 0 User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is enabled CDS FIRM 1 F 2 368 F 2 369 Enabling Install Application Options Button of User Mode To allow users to install applications using Updater the setting of application installation should be set to ON for users in advance Service Technician Setting of De...

Page 305: ...sing the file on Local PCs the setting of firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance Service Technician Setting of Device Service Mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW LOCLFIRM 0 1 Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled LOCLFIRM 0 Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is enabled LOCLFIRM 1 Periodical validation Service Technician Setting of Device Servic...

Page 306: ...1 1 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 2 Press 2 and 8 buttons at a time on the control panel 3 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 4 Service Mode screen is shown 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Software Management Settings button F 2 374 4 Press Settings button 5 Press Delivery Server URL to show the virtual keypad Enter the URL Delivery S...

Page 307: ...describes how to set system log levels 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 1 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 2 Press 2 and 8 buttons at a time on the control panel 3 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 4 Service Mode screen is shown 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Software Management Settings button F 2 377 4 Press Settings button F 2 378 ...

Page 308: ...he system Important Message Update logs output by firmware type Installation logs by MEAP application Logs related to enabled functions by system option Ordinary Error Logs for ordinary errors System Error Logs for internal system errors T 2 130 6 Press OK button to set the selected log level Now the log level is successfully set F 2 379 T 2 129 Displaying Logs Update Logs This section describes h...

Page 309: ... MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown Press OK button to exit this operation System Logs This section describes how to confirm System Logs 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 1 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 2 Press 2 and 8 buttons at a time on the control panel 3 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 4 Servi...

Page 310: ...erations Displaying Logs System Logs 3 Press Software Management Settings button 4 Press Select Log Display button F 2 384 F 2 385 5 Press Display System Logs button 6 Updater internal logs are displayed Press OK button to exit this operation NOTE See Chapter6 Debug Logs for how to obtain System Log F 2 386 F 2 387 ...

Page 311: ... Mode button on the control panel 4 Service Mode screen is shown NOTE CDS and RDS are another servers You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a communication test of the RDS 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Software Management Settings button F 2 388 4 Press Test Communication button 5 Press Yes button Obtain the download file information for communication test fro...

Page 312: ...m Management Operations Communication Test Technology System Management Operations Communication Test 6 Upon the communication test completed the communication test result screen is shown Press OK button to exit this operation F 2 391 ...

Page 313: ...system logs are inherited in the upgraded version Formatting Hard Disk Since Updater is a MEAP application its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP application storage area on PC via SST during formatting or replacing HDD See MEAP Service Manual for further information The settings initialized in format or replacement should be restored See Overview of Preparation in chapter 2 of this man...

Page 314: ... controller boards are to be replaced Main Controller Board PCB 1 No steps follow Main Controller Board PCB 2 including SRAM The network and service mode setting should be set again after initialization See Overview of Preparation in chapter 2 of this manual for details How to Replace Devices All settings should be set again because no data are inherited See Overview of Preparation in chapter 2 of...

Page 315: ...n search the device of your interest on Select Device screen to find the distribution status per device as shown in the search result T 2 131 No 4 Q In the course of UGW linked download what will happen if the user downloads the firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with UGW linked download before A The previously downloaded firmware in the method of UGW linked down...

Page 316: ...E mail address with comma or semicolon when you enter multiple E mail addresses in the field No 11 Q How long does the firmware update take A Approx 30 min However this does not include the download time Download time relies on the network environment F 2 392 FAQ on Installing MEAP Application System Option No 1 Q What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD ...

Page 317: ...s Yes Manual Download and Update via Remote UI Yes Yes Yes Special Download and Update via Remote UI Yes Yes Periodical update Yes Yes Yes For install Application Installation Method Network Settings Enabling Install Application Options Button of User Mode LMS linked Installation Yes LMA linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes LMS linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes T 2 132 T 2 133 No 2 Q H...

Page 318: ...3 3 Periodic Service Periodic Service Periodical Service Operation Item ...

Page 319: ...ade FL3 5187 1 DRBL 1 CLN BLD The blade movement is reversed at every 300 thousand sheets 1 sided 13 Drum Separation Claw FB4 8018 3 DRBL 1 SP CLAW 14 Drum Front Side Seal FC8 7086 1 DRBL 1 BS SL F 15 Drum Rear Side Seal FC8 7086 1 DRBL 1 BS SL R 16 Scraper FC9 9153 2 Δ DRBL 1 EXP SCRP Clean with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 17 Dustproof Glass 1 Δ Clean with lint free paper moistened wit...

Page 320: ...th lint free paper moistened with alcohol 38 Fixing System Fixing Web FY1 1157 1 DRBL 1 FX WEB 39 Fixing Roller FC9 9163 1 DRBL 1 FX UP RL 40 Fixing Roller Insulating Bush FC9 8069 2 DRBL 1 FX IN BS 41 Fixing Roller Thrust retainer FC6 35010 2 DRBL 1 FX RTNR 42 Main Thermistor Unit FK2 7683 1 PRDC 1 FIX TH1 43 Sub Thermistor FK2 76930 1 PRDC 1 FIX TH2 44 Pressure Roller Unit FM4 3160 1 DRBL 1 FX L...

Page 321: ...Deck Feed Roller Left Deck Feed Roller FC5 2526 2 DRBL 1 Right C1 FD RL Left C2 FD RL Actual use in terms of number of prints 1 pc each Left Right 58 Right Deck Separation Roller Left Deck Separation Roller FC5 2528 2 DRBL 1 Right C1 SP RL Left C2 SP RL Actual use in terms of number of prints 1 pc each Left Right 59 Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller FC6 6661 1 DRBL 1 M SP RL Actual use in terms...

Page 322: ...4 4 Parts Replacement and Clearning Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Main Controller Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing Pickup Feed System External Auxiliary System ...

Page 323: ... No Reference 1 Upper Cover FM3 9953 2 Upper Left Cover FC9 0376 3 Operation Panel FM3 8262 4 Upper Right Cover FC8 2366 5 Toner Exchange Cover FL3 3812 6 Front Cover FC8 9562 7 Deck Left Cover FC8 7354 8 Deck Right Cover FC8 7353 9 Cassette Front Cover FC8 2495 10 Cassette Front Cover FC8 2495 11 Left Front Cover FC9 7044 12 Left Lower Cover FC9 0152 13 Left Handle Cover FC8 7033 14 Delivery Cove...

Page 324: ...ver FC9 0080 19 Rear Upper Cover FC8 7016 20 Rear Lower Cover FC8 9566 21 Filter Cover FL3 2142 22 Waste Toner Container Cover FC9 0157 23 Right Lower Cover FC9 0078 24 Right Rear Cover 2 FC9 0081 25 Vertical Path Cover FC8 7347 26 Right Front Cover FC9 0077 27 Right Handle Cover FC8 7033 28 Duplex Delivery Cover FC8 9353 29 Right Cover FC8 7290 30 MP Pickup Tray Sub Cover FL3 5030 31 MP Pickup Tr...

Page 325: ...d Clearning List of Parts List of Main Unit Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Main Unit List of Main Unit Laser Scanner Unit Process Unit Hopper Unit Developing Assembly Fixing Assembly Waste Toner Feed Unit F 4 3 ...

Page 326: ... Unit FM4 0899 Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit page 4 168 2 Laser Scanner Unit FM3 7526 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit page 4 93 3 Hopper Unit FM4 0879 Removing the Hopper Unit page 4 159 4 Fixing Assembly NPN Removing the Fixing Assembly page 4 176 5 Process Uint FM4 5397 Removing the Process Unit page 4 114 6 Developing Assembly FM3 7384 Removing the Developing Assembly page 4 129 T 4 3 ...

Page 327: ...and Clearning List of Parts List of Main Unit Reverse Delivery Unit Outer Delivery Unit Registration Unit Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit Fixing Feed Unit Cassette 3 Pickup Unit Cassette 4 Pickup Unit Right Deck Pickup Unit Left Deck Pickup Unit ETB Unit ETB Cleaning Unit Vertical Path Unit F 4 4 ...

Page 328: ... Unit page 4 215 11 Right Deck Pickup Unit FM4 0941 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit page 4 216 12 Vertical Path Unit FM4 0943 13 Cassette 3 Pickup Unit FM4 0941 Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit page 4 217 14 Cassette 4 Pickup Unit FM4 0941 Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit page 4 217 15 Registration Unit FM4 5156 Removing the Registration Unit page 4 221 16 Reverse Delivery ...

Page 329: ... List of Main Unit Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Main Unit Controller Box Flat Control Panel Unit ETB Drive Unit Main Drive Unit Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit Drum Drive Unit Developing Drive Unit Left Deck Drive Unit F 4 5 ...

Page 330: ... FM4 0904 Removing the Drum Drive Unit page 4 171 22 Developing Drive Unit FM3 7386 Removing the Developing Drive Unit page 4 173 23 Main Drive Unit NPN Removing the Main Drive Unit page 4 225 24 Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit FM3 7374 Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit page 4 218 25 Left Deck Drive Unit Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit page 4 224 26 ETB Drive ...

Page 331: ...ing List of Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Drum Side Seal F Drum Cleaning Blade Drum Separation Claw Pre exposure Scraper Pre exposure Scraper Drum Side Seal R Developing Roller Developing Roller Developing Cylinder F 4 6 ...

Page 332: ...ng the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller page 4 132 2 Developing Cylinder Developing Assembly FM4 5438 Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller page 4 132 3 Drum Side Seal Rear Process Uni FC8 7086 Removing the Side Seal page 4 128 4 Drum Cleaning Blade Process Unit FC8 7086 Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade page 4 118 5 Drum Separation Claw Process Unit FB4 8018 Remov...

Page 333: ...t of Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Primary Charging Assembly Pre transfer Charging Assembly Pre transfer Charging Wire Primary Charging Wire Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder F 4 7 ...

Page 334: ...harging Wire with Spring Primary Charging Wire page 5 7 4 Pre transfer Charging Wire Pre transfer Charging Assembly FB4 3687 FL3 4559 Replacing the Pre transfer Charging Wire page 4 112 Pre transfer Charging Wire with Spring Pre transfer Charging Wire page 5 9 5 Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Primary Charging Assembly FL2 0462 Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Cleaner Holder Right Left pag...

Page 335: ...cing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts ETB ETB Cleaning Blade Brush Roller Transfer Roller F 4 8 ...

Page 336: ...arts Cleaning Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts No Name Main Unit Service Parts No Reference Adjustment during parts replacement 1 ETB ETB Unit FC8 7159 Removing the ETB Unit page 4 137 2 Transfer Roller ETB Unit FC8 7160 Removing the Transfer Roller page 4 141 3 ETB Cleaning Blade ETB Unit FC6 1647 Removing the ETB Cleaning Blade page 4 142 4 Brush Roller ETB Unit FC9 9022 Removing the...

Page 337: ...ing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Fixing cleaning web Fixing Assembly Fixing Roller Fixing Roller Insulating Bush Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer Upper separation claw Pressure Roller Unit Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer Fixing Roller Insulating Bush Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 THM2 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 THM3 Fixing Main Therm...

Page 338: ...r2 page 4 190 4 Fixing Roller Fixing Assembly FC9 9163 Removing the Fixing Roller Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper page 4 186 Fixing Roller page 5 12 5 Fixing Roller Insulating Bushing Fixing Assembly FC9 8069 Removing the Fixing Roller Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper page 4 186 6 Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer Fixing Assembly FC6 3501 Removing the Fixing Roller Insulating Bush and Thrust Stop...

Page 339: ...ts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller Right Deck Separation Roller Right Deck Pickup Roller Right Deck Feed Roller Left Deck Separation Roller Left Deck Pickup Roller Left Deck Feed Roller Cassette 3 Separation Roller Cassette 3 Pickup Roller Cassette 3 Feed Roller Cassette 4 Separation Roller Cassette 4 Pickup Roller Cassette 4 Feed Roller Multi purpose Tray Sep...

Page 340: ...tion Roller Left Deck Pickup Unit FC5 2528 Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller page 4 199 7 Left Deck Pickup Roller Left Deck Pickup Unit FC5 2524 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller page 4 197 8 Left Deck Feed Roller Left Deck Pickup Unit FC5 2526 Removing the Left Deck Feed Roller page 4 198 9 Cassette 3 Separation Roller Cassette 3 Pickup Unit FC5 2528 Removing the Upper Cassette Separati...

Page 341: ...iodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts Lower side of Developing Assembly Process Unit Rear Guide Separation Claw Mounting Base Waste Toner collection area Pre exposure Scraper Cleaning Unit Plate Developing Roller Developing Roller Pre exposure Scraper Drum Sliding Assembly Drum Edge Drum Lower side of Developing Cylinder F 4 11 ...

Page 342: ...m Cleaning Unit Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit page 4 119 4 Separation Claw Mounting Base Process Unit Cleaning the Process Unit page 4 116 5 Process Unit Rear Guide Process Unit Cleaning the Process Unit page 4 116 6 Drum Sliding Assembly Process Unit Cleaning the Process Unit page 4 116 7 Drum Process Unit Cleaning Photosensitive Drum page 4 126 8 Drum Edge Process Unit Cleaning the Drum edges ...

Page 343: ...nt and Clearning List of Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate L Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate R Toner Receptacle Tray Waste Toner Container ETB Idler Roller ETB Drive Roller Pre transfer Charging Assembly Shield Plate F 4 12 ...

Page 344: ...harging Assembly Grid Wire page 4 107 2 Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire page 4 107 3 Pre transfer Charging Assembly Shield Plate Pre transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning the Pre transfer Charging Wire page 4 114 4 ETB Drive Roller ETB Unit Cleaning the ETB page 4 140 5 ETB Idler Roller ETB Unit Cleaning the ETB page 4...

Page 345: ...leaning Parts Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts Fixing cleaning web guide Fixing inlet guide Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Inner Delivery Roller Fixing oil pan Fixing Right Stay Dowel Holder Dowel Upper separation claw Fixing Assembly F 4 13 ...

Page 346: ...g Assembly Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Fixing Right Stay Dowel Dowel Holder page 4 178 4 Dowel Holder Fixing Assembly Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Fixing Right Stay Dowel Dowel Holder page 4 178 5 Fixing Oil Pan Fixing Assembly Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan Fixing Cleaning Web Guide page 4 180 6 Upper Separation Claw Fixing Assembly Cleaning t...

Page 347: ...Cleaning Parts Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts Reverse Delivery Unit Feed Guide Right Lower Door Unit Feed Guide Inner Feed Guide Right Door Unit Feed Guide Fixing Feed Unit Duplex Rear Feed Guide Registration Unit Feed Guide F 4 14 ...

Page 348: ...Feed Assembly page 4 207 2 Reverse Delivery Unit Feed Guide Reverse Delivery Unit Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly page 4 207 3 Fixing Feed Unit Duplex Rear Feed Guide Fixing Feed Unit Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly page 4 207 4 Inner Feed Guide Product Specification Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly page 4 207 5 Right Door Unit Feed Guide Right Door Unit Clean...

Page 349: ...ing List of Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts Roller of Reverse Delivery Unit Roller of Right Lower Door Unit Roller of Right Door Unit Registration Unit Magnet Separation Static Eliminator Roller of Fixing Feed Unit Duplex area Cleaning Brush Duplex area Cleaning Brush Roller of Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit F 4 15 ...

Page 350: ...y page 4 207 3 Roller of Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly page 4 207 4 Roller of Right Door Unit Right Door Unit Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly page 4 207 5 Roller of Right Lower Door Unit Right Lower Door Unit Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly page 4 207 6 Roller of Reverse Delivery Unit Reverse Del...

Page 351: ...Parts Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts PS24 Right Door Unit PS65 PS66 PS67 PS64 Fixing Feed Unit PS28 PS29 Pickup Feed Drive Unit Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit F 4 16 ...

Page 352: ...ing Feed Assembly page 4 207 PS28 Multi purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly page 4 207 PS29 Registration Sensor Pickup Feed Drive Unit Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly page 4 207 PS64 Duplex Outlet Sensor Fixing Feed Unit Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly page 4 207 PS66 Duplex Left Sensor Fixing Feed Uni...

Page 353: ... of Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts Dust Proof Glass Laser Scanner Unit F 4 17 ...

Page 354: ...s Durable Parts Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Periodic Replacing Parts Durable Parts Cleaning Parts List of Cleaning Parts No Name Main Unit Reference 1 Dustproof Glass Main Body Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass page 4 96 T 4 17 ...

Page 355: ...t and Clearning List of Parts List of Fan Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Fan List of Fan IH power supply unit FM7 FM41 FM42 FM31 FM8 FM2 FM5 FM30 FM32 FM16 FM17 FM4 FM33 FM3 Power Supply FM14 FM15 FM40 F 4 18 ...

Page 356: ...K2 3149 FM14 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 Product configuration FK2 0360 FM15 Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 Product configuration FK2 2064 FM16 Laser Scanner Cooling Fan Product configuration FK2 3100 FM17 Primary Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan Product configuration FK2 3100 FM30 Developing Assembly Lower Cooling Fan Product configuration FK2 3149 FM31 Developing Assembly Upper Cooling Fan Product confi...

Page 357: ...and Clearning List of Parts List of Clutch Solenoid Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Clutch Solenoid List of Clutch Solenoid SL2 SL5 SL11 SL9 Fixing Feed Unit Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit Fixing Assembly F 4 19 ...

Page 358: ...enoid No Name Main Unit Service Parts No Adjustment during parts replacement Reference SL2 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid Multi purpose Pickup Unit FK2 0115 SL5 Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid Fixing Feed Unit FM4 5141 SL9 Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid Fixing Assembly FK2 0839 SL11 Left Deck Merging Solenoid Fixing Feed Unit FM4 0889 T 4 19 ...

Page 359: ...4 4 4 38 4 38 Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Clutch Solenoid Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Clutch Solenoid CL1 CL5 SL6 SL7 SL3 SL4 F 4 20 ...

Page 360: ...stment during parts replacement Reference CL1 Developing Clutch Developing Assembly FK2 7684 SL3 Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid Cassette 3 Pickup Unit FL3 4906 SL4 Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid Cassette 4 Pickup Unit FL3 4906 CL5 Magnet Roller Clutch Hopper Unit FK2 7685 SL6 Right Deck Pickup Solenoid Right Deck Pickup Unit FL3 4906 SL7 Left Deck Pickup Solenoid Left Deck Pickup Unit FL3 4906 T 4 20 ...

Page 361: ...placement and Clearning List of Parts List of Motor Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Motor List of Motor M43 M28 M10 M15 M3 M6 M7 ETB Unit Hopper Unit Buffer Assembly Process Unit Fixing Assembly F 4 21 ...

Page 362: ... during parts replacement Reference M3 Fixing Motor Fixing Assembly FK2 7669 M6 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Process Unit FL2 0991 M7 Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Process Unit FL2 0991 M10 Toner Supply Motor Hopper Unit FM4 5309 M15 Fixing Shutter Motor Fixing Assembly FK2 7677 M28 Toner Feed Motor Hopper Unit FM4 0956 M43 ETB Motor ETB Unit FK2 7719 T 4 21 ...

Page 363: ...42 Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Motor Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Motor M44 M16 M14 M19 M32 M18 M13 Fixing Feed Unit Laser Scanner Unit Outer Delivery Unit F 4 22 ...

Page 364: ...acement Reference M13 Delivery Motor Outer Delivery Unit FK2 7675 M14 Reverse Motor Fixing Feed Unit FK2 7675 M16 Side Registration Motor Fixing Feed Unit FK2 2069 M18 Duplex Feed Right Motor Fixing Feed Unit FK2 7674 M19 Duplex Feed Left Motor Fixing Feed Unit FK2 7674 M32 Duplex Feed Merging Motor Fixing Feed Unit FK2 7674 M44 Polygon Motor Laser Scanner Unit Laser Scanner Unit FM3 7531 T 4 22 ...

Page 365: ...Clearning List of Parts List of Motor Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Motor M2 M4 M24 M5 M20 M21 M1 M34 M26 M11 M33 M31 M27 M12 Drum Drive Unit Cassette Pickup Drive Unit Developing Drive Unit Pickup Feed Unit F 4 23 ...

Page 366: ... Drive Unit FM2 4663 M11 Right Deck Pickup Motor Pickup Feed Unit FK2 7674 M12 Cassette 3 4 Pickup Motor Pickup Feed Unit FK2 7675 M20 Cassette 3 Lifter Motor Cassette Pickup Drive Unit FK2 0016 M21 Cassette 4 Lifter Motor Cassette Pickup Drive Unit FK2 0016 M24 Left Deck Pickup Motor Cassette Pickup Drive Unit FK2 7674 M26 Vertical Path Upper Motor Pickup Feed Unit FK2 7675 M27 Vertical Path Lowe...

Page 367: ...ist of Parts List of Sensor Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Sensor List of Sensor TS1 PS24 PS61 PS45 PS51 PS52 PS4 PS53 PS29 PS96 Fixing Assembly Developing Assembly Right Door Unit Drum Drive Unit Pickup Feed Drive Unit F 4 24 ...

Page 368: ...8 5848 PS24 Vertical Path Sensor 1 Vertical Path Unit FK2 6470 PS29 Registration Sensor Pickup Feed Drive Unit FK2 6470 PS45 Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor Fixing Assembly WG8 5848 PS51 Fixing Inlet Sensor Fixing Assembly WG8 5848 PS52 Fixing Outlet Sensor Fixing Assembly WG8 5848 PS61 Drum Home Position Sensor Drum Drive Unit WG8 5848 PS96 Fixed Feed Lever Sensor Fixing Feed Unit WG8 5848 TS1 D...

Page 369: ...Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Sensor PS64 PS65 PS66 PS67 PS35 PS56 PS55 PS31 TS2 TS3 PS54 PS25 PS2 PS36 PS28 PS23 UN13 Fixing Feed Unit Vertical Path Unit Outer Delivery Unit Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit Upper High Voltage Unit Hopper Unit Buffer Assembly F 4 25 ...

Page 370: ...nsor Fixing Feed Unit WG8 5848 PS35 Inner Delivery Sensor Fixing Feed Unit WG8 5848 PS36 Outer Delivery Sensor Outer Delivery Unit WG8 5848 PS54 Toner Exchange Cover Open Close Sensor Hopper Unit WG8 5848 PS55 Transfer Belt Engage Sensor Fixing Feed Unit WG8 5848 PS56 Transfer Belt Disengage Sensor Fixing Feed Unit WG8 5848 PS64 Duplex Outlet Sensor Fixing Feed Unit FK2 6470 PS65 Reverse Vertical ...

Page 371: ... PS8 PS6 PS19 PS32 PS68 PS17 PS21 PS26 PS26 PS11 PS12 PS10 PS33 PS20 PS13 PS71 PS18 PS22 PS27 PS14 PS47 PS48 PS49 PS69 PS70 PS72 PS73 PS50 PS95 PS3 PS94 THU1 Cassette1 Pickup Unit Cassette3 Pickup Unit Cassette4 Pickup Unit Cassette2 Pickup Unit Cassette1 Pickup Unit Cassette3 Pickup Unit Cassette4 Pickup Unit Cassette2 Pickup Unit F 4 26 ...

Page 372: ...Pickup Sensor 2 Cassette 3 Pickup Unit WG8 5848 PS22 Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor 1 Cassette 4 Pickup Unit WG8 5848 PS26 Vertical Path Sensor 3 Vertical Path Unit WG8 5848 PS27 Vertical Path Sensor 4 Vertical Path Unit WG8 5848 PS32 Right Deck Pull Out Sensor Right Deck Unit WG8 5848 PS33 Left Deck Pull Out Sensor Left Deck Unit WG8 5848 PS47 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 Right Deck Unit WG8 5848 PS...

Page 373: ...rts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Switch Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of Switch List of Switch SW7 SW8 SW10 SW9 SW3 SW4 SW2 SW6 SW1 SW5 Power Supply Unit Waste Toner Unit F 4 27 ...

Page 374: ...Environment Switch Product configuration WC1 5179 SW4 Cassette Heater Switch Product configuration WC1 5179 SW5 Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch Waste Toner Unit FM4 1029 SW6 Multi Door Switch Product configuration FL3 1271 SW7 Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch Cassette 3 Pickup Unit WC2 5680 SW8 Cassette 4 Paper Width Detection Switch Cassette 4 Pickup Unit WC2 5680 SW9 Cassette 3 Paper Le...

Page 375: ...CB Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of PCB List of PCB PCB30 PCB31 PCB33 PCB5 PCB29 PCB6 100V PCB7 200V PCB17 100V PCB18 200V PCB25 PCB50 PCB51 PCB1 PCB52 PCB2 HDD PCB3 PCB4 PCB13 PCB9 PCB34 PCB8 Fixing Feed Unit Power Supply Unit Controller Unit F 4 28 ...

Page 376: ...ration FM4 1089 PCB13 Transfer High Voltage PCB Product configuration FM4 1095 PCB17 Noise Filter 100V Product configuration FM4 1098 PCB18 Noise Filter 200V Product configuration FM4 1100 PCB25 Choke Coil PCB Product configuration FM4 1103 PCB29 DC Power Supply 12V Product configuration FM4 5131 PCB30 DC Power Supply 24V Product configuration FM4 5129 PCB31 DC Power Supply 24V Product configurati...

Page 377: ...f Parts List of PCB Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts List of PCB PCB54 PCB24 PCB23 PCB19 PCB20 PCB27 200V PCB28 100V PCB35 PCB15 PCB26 PCB11 PCB12 PCB10 PCB36 PCB32 Process Unit Process Unit Laser Scanner Unit Upper High Voltage Unit F 4 29 ...

Page 378: ...ge 5 11 PCB19 Primary Charging Contact A PCB Product configuration FM4 5148 PCB20 Primary Charging Contact B PCB Product configuration FM4 1102 PCB23 Pre transfer Charging Contact A PCB Product configuration FM4 5148 PCB24 Pre transfer Charging Contact A PCB Product configuration FM4 1102 PCB26 Pre transfer Charging PCB Product configuration FM4 1106 PCB27 Drum Heater Driver PCB 200V Product confi...

Page 379: ...arning List of Parts Heater others Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Heater others Heater others THM3 THM1 H3 THM2 TP1 VA VA VA CB1001 CB1002 CB1003 CB1004 H2 LE1 EPC1 H1 UN75 Process Unit Power Supply Unit Fixing Assembly F 4 30 ...

Page 380: ... Unit FM3 7292 H2 Multi Cassette Heater Product configuration FM3 8915 H3 Fixing Heater Fixing Assembly FM3 7359 TP1 Fixing Thermal Switch 1 Fixing Assembly FK2 7698 THM1 Fixing Main Thermistor Fixing Assembly FK2 7683 THM2 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 Fixing Assembly FK2 7693 THM3 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 Fixing Assembly FK2 7683 EPC1 Potential Sensor Process Unit FM4 1096 CB1002 Leakage Breaker Produc...

Page 381: ...eplacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List Connector List 28 18 11 1 31 24 25 26 27 23 29 32 30 21 9 5 19 20 22 15 14 12 13 10 17 4 2 3 16 6 7 8 F 4 31 ...

Page 382: ... PCB J3002 24 J300 PCB4 Duplex Driver PCB 8 J432 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J3002 25 J301 PCB4 Duplex Driver PCB 9 J441 PCB1 DC Controller PCB 26 J21 PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 10 J442 PCB1 DC Controller PCB 27 J22 PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 11 J451 PCB1 DC Controller PCB 28 J514 PCB5 Relay PCB 12 J461 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J3123 J9040 DECK LATTICE 12 J461 PCB1 DC Controller PCB J3130 J9040 DECK LA...

Page 383: ...nd Clearning List of Parts Connector List Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List 19 25 20 24 21 23 22 11 36 4 5 15 13 8 3 7 6 9 38 40 39 41 2 42 43 17 18 34 14 16 29 31 32 33 30 44 10 26 27 28 1 12 45 35 37 F 4 32 ...

Page 384: ...2018 PS52 Fixing Outlet Sensor 5 J105 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J3001 J3094 28 J2019 PS4 Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor 6 J106 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J3235 J3121 29 J2001 SL2 Multi purpose Pickup Solenoid 6 J106 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J3235 J3121 30 J2002 PS23 Multi purpose Tray Paper Sensor 6 J106 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J3235 J3121 J3122 31 J2003 UN13 Multi purpose Tray Paper Width Sensor 6 J106 PCB2 Main Driver...

Page 385: ...nt and Clearning List of Parts Connector List Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List 35 8 9 6 7 11 10 34 21 32 31 33 42 15 20 41 19 17 18 16 23 14 13 24 22 36 29 30 25 26 40 28 38 39 37 3 2 1 5 4 12 27 F 4 33 ...

Page 386: ...et Roller Clutch 4 J115 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J3091 J3090 J3124 28 J2038 TS2 Toner Excess Supply Sensor 4 J115 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J3091 J3090 J3124 29 J2039 TS3 Buffer Toner Sensor 5 J117 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J3063 J3080 30 J2037 M10 Toner Supply Motor 6 J118 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J3172 31 J104 PCB10 Fixing Power Supply PCB 7 J119 PCB2 Main Driver PCB J3111 32 J103 PCB10 Fixing Power Supply PCB 7 ...

Page 387: ...s Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List 10 1 15 14 13 17 16 11 26 12 18 4 3 9 2 5 6 7 8 25 24 21 20 22 19 23 29 28 31 32 33 30 34 35 27 F 4 34 ...

Page 388: ...aper Height Sensor 8 J221 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3634 21 J2044 PS11 Left Deck Paper Sensor 8 J221 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3634 22 J2045 PS10 Left Deck Paper Height Sensor 8 J221 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3634 23 J2046 PS33 Left Deck Pull Out Sensor 8 J221 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3132 24 J2048 PS49 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 8 J221 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3132 25 J2049 PS50 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 ...

Page 389: ...Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List 6 8 2 3 32 1 4 24 5 20 21 22 7 11 9 15 23 30 31 25 17 12 10 13 14 18 16 19 27 26 28 29 F 4 35 ...

Page 390: ...up Sensor 1 2 J224 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3636 17 J2090 PS14 Cassette 4 Paper Sensor 2 J224 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3636 18 J2091 PS18 Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor 2 J224 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB J3636 19 J2092 PS27 Vertical Path Sensor4 3 J225 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB 20 J2069 M4 Right Deck Lifter Motor 3 J225 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB 21 J2072 M20 Cassette3 Lifter Motor 3 J225 PCB3 Feed Driver PCB 22 J2074 M2...

Page 391: ...Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List 1 21 26 14 19 3 4 2 7 6 9 8 5 35 11 17 28 13 36 10 12 16 15 32 31 34 25 23 27 24 20 22 33 29 30 18 F 4 36 ...

Page 392: ...Driver PCB J3236 22 J2117 PS65 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 7 J340 PCB4 Duplex Driver PCB 23 J2118 FM5 Paper Cooling Fan 7 J340 PCB4 Duplex Driver PCB 24 J2120 PS66 Duplex Left Sensor 7 J340 PCB4 Duplex Driver PCB J2121 J3020 J3021 25 J2121 FM8 Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan 7 J340 PCB4 Duplex Driver PCB J3242 26 J2124 M16 Side Registration Motor 7 J340 PCB4 Duplex Driver PCB J3242 27 J2125 PS31 Sid...

Page 393: ...2 Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List 27 9 2 3 1 13 14 10 22 16 19 17 28 29 15 18 6 12 20 21 23 24 25 37 30 4 8 7 5 26 11 F 4 37 ...

Page 394: ... J611 PCB6 7 AC Driver PCB 7 J508 PCB5 Relay PCB 19 J4 PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 8 J509 PCB5 Relay PCB J3224 20 J2134 FM14 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 8 J509 PCB5 Relay PCB 21 J2154 FM15 Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 9 J510 PCB5 Relay PCB 22 J691 PCB33 All night Power Supply PCB 10 J511 PCB5 Relay PCB 23 J201 PCB29 DC Power Supply PCB 11 J512 PCB5 Relay PCB 24 J202 PCB30 DC Power Supply PCB 12 J513 ...

Page 395: ...ts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List 13 12 1 4 19 29 30 18 25 26 17 31 32 16 15 14 28 23 22 21 20 24 11 8 2 9 7 5 3 6 10 33 27 34 F 4 38 ...

Page 396: ...3173 J3119 J9024 READER LATTICE 8 J608 PCB6 7 AC Driver PCB J3173 J3115 J3116 J4060 25 J2001 PCB27 28 Drum Heater Driver PCB 8 J608 PCB6 7 AC Driver PCB J3173 J3115 J3116 J4060 26 J2002 PCB27 28 Drum Heater Driver PCB 9 J609 PCB6 7 AC Driver PCB J3549 27 J3273 SW1 Power ON Switch 10 J610 PCB6 7 AC Driver PCB J9019 28 J220 H2 Multi Cassette Heater 11 J613 PCB6 7 AC Driver PCB J3174 J3638 J9043 FINI...

Page 397: ...ment and Clearning List of Parts Connector List Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List 25 26 6 7 10 9 12 13 11 8 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 27 31 32 28 34 33 30 29 36 37 41 40 39 38 35 2 3 1 5 4 F 4 39 ...

Page 398: ...03 UN111 CPU PCB 28 J4001 UN112 Sub Key PCB 7 J1003 UN111 CPU PCB 29 J6001 UN114 Inverter PCB 8 J1005 UN111 CPU PCB Transparent touch panel 9 J1006 UN111 CPU PCB 30 J2002 UN109 Hub PCB 10 J1007 UN111 CPU PCB 31 J1 LCD 11 J1008 UN111 CPU PCB 32 J3002 UN110 Ten Key PCB 12 J1009 UN111 CPU PCB 33 J3001 UN110 Ten Key PCB 13 J4002 UN112 Sub Key PCB 34 J5001 UN113 Volume PCB 14 J1 UN117 CPU PCB J3225 27 ...

Page 399: ...Parts Connector List Parts Replacement and Clearning List of Parts Connector List 34 35 47 48 54 37 55 33 28 50 36 57 52 38 53 56 30 29 31 51 49 59 24 44 45 46 19 27 26 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 41 42 43 25 22 23 21 58 40 39 F 4 40 ...

Page 400: ...52 Channel Link PCB 17 J11 PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 DDR2 SDRAM 18 J13 PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 DDR2 SDRAM 19 J14 PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 Memory PCB 20 J2017 PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 Image Data Analyzer Board A1 21 J12 PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 44 J1 HDD Mirroring Kit E1 or HDD Data Encryption MirroringKit C2 22 J2024 PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 44 J1 HDD Mirroring Kit E1 or HDD Data...

Page 401: ...oard AF1 34 J3 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AF1 57 J1 Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board AF1 35 J4 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AF1 58 J4 Modular PCB 2 to 4 lines 36 J2 Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board AF1 58 J4 Modular PCB 2 to 4 lines 37 J1 Modular PCB 1 line 38 J7 Modular PCB 1 line J3012 59 J803 PCB17 18 Noise Filter 39 J1 Modular PCB 2 to 4 lines 40 J2 Modular PCB 2 to 4 lines J3012 59 J803 PCB17 1...

Page 402: ... 1 Remove the Box Cover Right 1 1 Push A part to open the HDD Cover A 1 2 Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit 1 Screw F 4 41 F 4 42 Procedure 1 Disconnect the Connector USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable to remove the Main Controller PCB 1 Unit in the direction of the arrow USB Cable Main Controller PCB 1 x2 Handle Control Panel Cable 2 Remove the Flash PCB the TPM PCB and the 2 Memory ...

Page 403: ...g connection of the Main Controller PCB 1 CAUTION If the Main Controller PCB 1 cannot be inserted in the slot or cannot be inserted properly or Error occurs after starting the machine follow the following steps to check the connection between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 If they are not connected properly perform Adjusting the positions of the PCBs Criterion If the width...

Page 404: ...he PCBs adjust the positions of the PCBs 10 20 30 10 20 30 10 20 30 40 50 Gap between the connectors of the PCBs Metallic ruler F 4 47 4 Observe the gap between the connectors of the PCBs from the front and visually check that the width of the gap is uniform CAUTION If the width of the gap is not uniform adjust the positions of the PCBs The width of the gap is uniform the width of the gap is not u...

Page 405: ... Main Controller PCB 1 Unit 2 Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow 3 Loosen the 6 screws securing the Main Controller PCB 2 and the 4 screws securing the Channel Link PCB Loosen Loosen CAUTION If an Image Analysis Board is installed remove it and loosen the 4 Spacers F 4 49 F 4 50 4 Remove the Controller Box Inner Cover 4 Screws x4 5 Loosen the 8 screws securing the DC Controller ...

Page 406: ...ll the Main Controller Right Cover Unit 1 Screw F 4 53 F 4 54 8 Fully tighten the loosened screws to secure the Main Controller PCB 2 Channel Link PCB and DC Controller PCB in that order Check that the connectors of the PCBs are properly connected 9 Install the covers removed in this procedure in reverse order Controller Box Inner Cover Rear Cover Controller Box Close it Left Rear Inner Cover Conn...

Page 407: ... Target Data Address Book Forwarding Settings Settings Registration Web Access Favorites Printer Settings Paper Information 2 Print out the Settings Registration data Use service mode Lv 1 COPIER FUNCTION MISC P USER PRT The Settings Registration data value that cannot be backed up is printed out as a list Processing when replacing the parts 1 Replace the part from the old PCB to the new PCB 1 boa...

Page 408: ...move the Box Cover Right Refer to Removing Main Controller PCB 1 2 Remove the Main Controller PCB 1 Refer to page 4 81 3 Remove the Box Cover Left 3 1 Remove the Harness 2 Wire Saddles 3 2 Remove the Box Cover Left 1 Claw 1 Protrusion Projection Claw F 4 56 F 4 57 4 Remove the Box Left Inner Cover 4 1 Disconnect the Connectors 2 Connectors x2 4 2 Remove the Connector Cover F 4 58 F 4 59 ...

Page 409: ...in Controller Removing Main Controller PCB 2 4 3 Remove the Box Left Inner Cover 2 Screws x2 5 Remove the Rear Cover Procedure 1 Remove the Plate 1 Screw F 4 60 F 4 61 2 Remove the Channel Link PCB in the direction of the arrow 4 Screws 1 Connector x4 3 Remove the Main Controller PCB 2 7 Connectors 6 Screws x6 x7 F 4 62 F 4 63 ...

Page 410: ...the slot or cannot be inserted properly or Error occurs after starting the machine follow the following steps to check the connection between the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 If they are not connected properly perform Adjusting the positions of the PCBs Criterion If the width of the gap between the connectors of the PCBs is less than 0 5mm and uniform the PCBs are connected ...

Page 411: ...he PCBs adjust the positions of the PCBs 10 20 30 10 20 30 10 20 30 40 50 Gap between the connectors of the PCBs Metallic ruler F 4 66 4 Observe the gap between the connectors of the PCBs from the front and visually check that the width of the gap is uniform CAUTION If the width of the gap is not uniform adjust the positions of the PCBs The width of the gap is uniform the width of the gap is not u...

Page 412: ... Main Controller PCB 1 Unit 2 Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow 3 Loosen the 6 screws securing the Main Controller PCB 2 and the 4 screws securing the Channel Link PCB Loosen Loosen CAUTION If an Image Analysis Board is installed remove it and loosen the 4 Spacers F 4 68 F 4 69 4 Remove the Controller Box Inner Cover 4 Screws x4 5 Loosen the 8 screws securing the DC Controller ...

Page 413: ...ocedure in reverse order Controller Box Inner Cover Rear Cover Controller Box Close it Left Rear Inner Cover Connector Cover Remove the Left Rear Cover 3 Specify and register the data again of the Main Controller PCB 2 1 After the parts are assembled turn ON the power 2 Restore the backup data Restoring the backup data by SST When there is HDD Encryption Board Use remote UI Management Settings Dat...

Page 414: ...e Toner Exchange Cover 1 2 Open the Right Cover 1 3 Open the Right Rear Cover1 1 4 Remove the Right Upper Cover 2 Screws 1 Boss 3 Protrusions x2 F 4 74 2 Removing the Right Cover NOTE Laser Scanner Unit can be removed without removing the Right Cover Howerver removing the Right Cover is recommended here for better operability 2 1 Remove the Right Rear Cover2 2 Screws x2 2 2 Disconnect the Connecto...

Page 415: ...System Removing the Laser Scanner Unit 2 4 Remove the E ring to remove the Door Link 2 5 Remove the 2 Hinge Pins to remove the Right Cover F 4 77 F 4 78 CAUTION To prevent falling of Right Cover hold the Right Cover to remove the Hinge Pins Procedure 1 Lift the Plate to remove 2 Screws x2 2 Remove the 2 Retainer Fixtures 2 Screws x2 F 4 79 F 4 80 ...

Page 416: ...er Scanner Unit 3 Free the Harness from the Harness Guide and Disconnect the Connector 4 Pull out the Laser Scanner Unit halfway 2 Bosses F 4 81 F 4 82 5 Hook the wire of the Laser Scanner Unit to the hook of the main body CAUTION Do not use the wire when the Right Cover is not removed 6 Free the Harness from the Harness Guide and Disconnect the Connector F 4 83 F 4 84 ...

Page 417: ...r Scanner Unit check that the hooking wire of the unit is not hooked to the frame of the main body CAUTION When installing the Laser Scanner Unit be sure to check that the bosses are fitted into the holes F 4 86 F 4 85 Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 97 Procedure Removing the Dustproof Glass 1 Pull out the...

Page 418: ...wer Switch on the Control Panel check that the machine is in standby condition turn OFF the Main Power and then perform removing In the case that the condition of the Charging Shutter open close is unknown while the power of the host machine is OFF turn ON the power check that the machine is in standby condition turn OFF the Main Power and then perform removing If the above operations are not perf...

Page 419: ...Wire Height Adjustment Spring 5 Execute cleaning of the Charging Wire COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING WIRE CLN 6 Init of Primary Charging Wire current VL COPIER ADJUST HV PRI PRI GRID 7 Execute the potential control COPIER FUNCTION DPC DPC Turn OFF and then ON the main power The potential control is executed at startup Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Cleaner Holder Right Left Preparation NOTE ...

Page 420: ...Charging Wire Shutter is moved by chance be sure to move the Shutter until it is invisible Charging Wire Shutter Primary Charging Wire Cleaner F 4 91 CAUTION Do not remove both Shield Plates Right and Left of the Primary Charging Assembly at the same time Be sure to work on one Shield Plate at a time otherwise the Frame of the Primary Charging Assembly can be deformed 1 Remove the Shield Plate Rig...

Page 421: ...til it is secured with the Claw F 4 94 3 Bring up the Primary Charging Assembly and pinch the Hook to remove the Primary Charging Assembly Cleaner Holder Right in the direction of the arrow F 4 95 4 Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Right in the direction of the arrow CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Primary Charging Wire and the Grid Wire when removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner...

Page 422: ...mbly Refer to page 4 97 4 Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit Refer to page 4 147 Procedure 1 Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire 1 Screw Screw Grid Wire 2 Shift the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners Left and Right 2 Screws to loosen Primary Charging Wire Cleaners Right Primary Charging Wire Cleaners Left Screws F 4 98 F 4 99 3 Loosen the 4 screws fixing the Motor Unit in the front ...

Page 423: ...be easily made by the following procedure Wrap the Charging Wire around the Hex Key to make a full round and then turn the Hex Key for 3 to 4 times to twist the Charging Wire 7 Cut the twisted Charging Wire extra length with nippers 8 Hook the ring to the Stud A as shown in the figure 9 After setting the wire 35 times around pass through B part After turning over the Primary Charging Assembly pass...

Page 424: ... loosened 4 screws Screws Be sure to check the following items No bend or twist is found with the Grid Wire The wire is set evenly spaced apart The Grid Wire is fitted into the groove of the Block F 4 103 F 4 104 13 Remove the Shield Plate Left and pinch the Grid Wire from the left side to clean it on the left side with lint free paper moistened with water CAUTION The frame of the Primary Charging...

Page 425: ...e Left and the Primary Charging Wire Right The following explains the procedure of the Primary Charging Wire Right NOTE The Primary Charging Wire with spring is set as a service part CAUTION In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis be sure to use the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring 97 5527 A Do not use the Spring B attached to the Charging Wire Spring A Spring B F...

Page 426: ...Block Groove Charging Electrode F 4 109 F 4 110 3 Remove the Charging Wire from the protrusion and the groove of the Positioning Block at the front side Protrusion Groove Charging Wire Installing the Charging Wire NOTE When installing the Charging Wire set as a service part steps 4 5 7 and 8 are not required 4 Untie approx 5cm of the Charging Wire from the 0 06mm wire diameter Charging Wire Reel t...

Page 427: ...on Spring with tweezers to hook it to the charging electrode Charging Electrode Groove CAUTION Be sure to keep the following in mind after installation No bend or twist is found with the Charging Wire The Charging Wire is fitted into the groove of the Charging Wire Positioning Block 10 Clean the Charging Wire with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 11 Install the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner ...

Page 428: ...emove the discharge products efficiently clean with lint free paper moistened with water If there is toner stain clean with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Procedure 1 Clean the inside of Shield Plate Right and Inner Shield Plate Left removed from the Primary Charging Assembly with lint free paper moistened with water 2 Clean both sides of the Inner Shield Plate Middle of the Primary Chargi...

Page 429: ... Control Panel check that the machine is in standby condition turn OFF the Main Power and then perform removing In the case that the condition of the Charging Shutter open close is unknown while the power of the host machine is OFF turn ON the power check that the machine is in standby condition turn OFF the Main Power and then perform removing If the above operations are not performed it may be p...

Page 430: ...n the host machine and install it horizontally F 4 120 Processing when replacing the parts 1 Clear the parts counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 PO UNIT 2 Clean the Charging Wire COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING WIRE EX Removing the Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Cleaner Holder Preparation 1 Open the Inner Cover Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 2 Remove the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Refe...

Page 431: ...ield Plate Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block fully to the inside to secure with the screw Check that the rear Pin is fitted into the Frame hole and then move the Shield Plate back and forth to check that the Shield Plate is secured F 4 122 2 Turn the Gear by hand to move the Cleaning Pad Arm to the front CAUTION Points to Caution when Installing the Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder Pus...

Page 432: ...ction of the arrow to remove the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Cleaner Holder 4 Remove the Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaner in the direction of the arrow CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Pre transfer Charging Wire when removing the Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaner F 4 125 F 4 126 CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to push the Charging Wire against the 2 pads of the Pre tran...

Page 433: ...emoving the Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Cleaner Holder 5 Remove the Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Refer to page 4 109 Procedure CAUTION In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis be sure to use the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring 97 5527 A Do not use the Spring B attached to the Charging Wire Spring A Spring B F 4 128 1 Remove the Pre transfer Charging A...

Page 434: ...g Wire Tension Spring to the Charging Wire to twist with it 7 Cut extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers F 4 131 F 4 132 8 Hold the tip of the Spring with tweezers and hook the Charging Wire to the groove to hook the Spring to the Hook Hook 9 Clean the Charging Wire with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 10 Install the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Covers Front and Rear 11 Install th...

Page 435: ...r to page 4 109 6 Remove the Pre transfer Charging Wire Refer to page 4 112 Procedure 1 Clean the Shield Plate with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 4 134 Removing the Process Unit Preparation 1 Open the Inner Cover Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 2 Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 97 3 Remove the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 108 Proced...

Page 436: ...s to Caution at Installation When installing the Process Unit fit the 3 grooves at the edge of the Drum Shaft with the 3 protrusions of the Drum Fixation Cylinder to install the Drum Shaft Fixing Screw Protrusion Protrusion Groove Groove F 4 136 CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to fit the Drum Cleaning Unit to the rail on the host machine and install it horizontally F 4 137 ...

Page 437: ...e the Primary Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 97 3 Remove the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 108 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 114 5 Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit Refer to Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade 6 Remove the Drum Unit Refer to page 4 121 Procedure 1 Clean the Separation Claw Mounting Base and Separation Claw with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 4 13...

Page 438: ...nsfer Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 108 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 114 Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface of the Photosensitive Drum After removing the Drum Cleaning Unit place paper over the Photosensitive Drum to block light 1 Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit Edge Saddle 1 Connector 4 Screws x4 F 4 140 CAUTION When installing the Drum Cleaning Unit clean the area shown wi...

Page 439: ...the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 108 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 114 5 Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit Refer to page 4 118 Procedure 1 Turn over the Drum Cleaning Unit to remove the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit 1 E ring 1 Plate Drum Cleaning Blade Unit Plate F 4 142 2 Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade 5 Screws to loosen Loosen CAUTION Points to Caution when Installing the Dr...

Page 440: ...ews following the numeric order from 1 to 4 and also securely tighten the screws from 5 to 9 x5 F 4 144 Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit Preparation 1 Open the Inner Cover Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 2 Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 97 3 Remove the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 108 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 114 5 Remove the ...

Page 441: ...Drum Cleaning Unit Parts Replacement and Clearning Image Formation System Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit 2 Clean the 2 Pre exposure Plastic Films of the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit with lint free paper F 4 146 3 Crumb toner clusters in the toner collection area and then clean it F 4 147 ...

Page 442: ...e Process Unit Refer to page 4 114 5 Put paper on the Photosensitive Drum so that it is not exposed to direct sunlight 6 Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade Refer to page 4 118 Procedure CAUTION When handling the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum be sure to follow the following points to note 1 When removing the Process Unit be sure to block light to the Photosensitive Drum Cover with the Photosensi...

Page 443: ...the Drum Retainer Plate 8 Remove the Drum Unit Refer to page 4 121 Procedure CAUTION When handling the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum be sure to follow the following points to note 1 When removing the Process Unit be sure to block light to the Photosensitive Drum Cover with the Photosensitive Drum Protection Sheet or wrap 5 or more papers around the drum to block light 2 Do not place the Pro...

Page 444: ...Photosensitive Drum Parts Replacement and Clearning Image Formation System Removing the Photosensitive Drum 1 Wrap paper around the Drum Unit to block light 2 Remove the 2 screws and the Flange x2 F 4 151 F 4 152 3 Disconnect the connector and remove the Drum Heater Drum Heater F 4 153 ...

Page 445: ...sensitive Drum 4 Remove the Heater Control PCB Unit NOTE Serial ID of the drum is written on the seal inside the drum F 4 155 F 4 154 CAUTION Align the yellow marker of the drum with the hole position of the unit when installing the Heater Control PCB Unit to the drum When securing the Flange align the protrusion of the Flange with the yellow marker to install F 4 156 F 4 157 ...

Page 446: ...dure of adjustment 1 Clear the parts counter COPIER COUNTER LF K DRM LF 2 Replace with the ROM packaged with the Drum 2 1 Remove the Drum EEPROM 1 Screw 1 Connector NOTE If the ROM is not replaced the replaced drum and the drum unique data stored in the ROM data are not matched As a result when the 2D shading function is enabled it is not functioned normally F 4 158 3 Affix the ID Label included i...

Page 447: ...he drum from the front to the rear and from the rear to the front CK 0429 Lint Free Paper Alcohol Solutions Drum Cleaning Powder CAUTION Keep the widths of cleaning to 5 to 10 cm in the peripheral direction of the drum Move the lint free paper back and forth 15 to 20 times over a single area Forcing the lint free paper will not affect the life of the drum 3 After the alcohol has evaporated dry wip...

Page 448: ...the Drum Cleaning Blade Refer to page 4 118 7 Remove the Drum Retainer Plate 8 Remove the Drum Unit Refer to page 4 121 Procedure 1 Rotate the Drum and dry wipe the soiling on the surface of the Drum edges with lint free paper F 4 162 Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw Preparation 1 Open the Inner Cover Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 2 Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Refer ...

Page 449: ...bly Refer to page 4 108 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 114 5 Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade Refer to page 4 118 6 Remove the Drum Unit Refer to page 4 121 Procedure 1 Remove the Side Seals Front and Rear F 4 164 2 Apply Tospearl on the surfaces of the new Drum Side Seals Front and Rear and adhere it uniformly with lint free paper NOTE In order to reduce adhesion of toner at both ends of...

Page 450: ...loping Assembly 2 Open the Right Cover 3 Turn the Tab to open the Plate Cover 1 Screw 4 Remove the Developing Assembly by following the Rail 1 Connector F 4 167 F 4 168 CAUTION How to Hold the Developing Assembly When holding the Developing Assembly be sure to hold the handle of the Developing Assembly as shown in the figure Do not touch the shutter area of the Developing Assembly The shutter area...

Page 451: ...Buffer Shutter is not open If the Developing Assembly is forcibly installed while the Buffer Shutter is open the shutter may get damage When the Buffer Shutter is open pull out the shutter to the front and then close it Whether the shutter is open or not can be checked with the Shutter Arm F 4 170 F 4 171 As shown in the figure hold the Developing Assembly and fit the protrusions at right and left...

Page 452: ... the rail F 4 173 Processing when replacing the parts 1 Supplying Developing Assembly toner COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL TONER S Cleaning the Developing Assembly Preparation 1 Remove the Developing Assembly Refer to page 4 129 Procedure 1 Clean the 2 Developing Rollers with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating them 2 Clean the lower side of Cylinder in the Developing Assembly with lint...

Page 453: ...he main body F 4 176 Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller Preparation 1 Remove the Developing Assembly Refer to page 4 129 2 Remove the Developing Cylinder Blade NOTE When the Developing Assembly is put on the floor or the desk be sure to place paper underneath to work on the Developing Assembly 2 1 Remove the Developing Assembly Cover 4 Screws 5 Claws 2 Protrusions x4 x5 2 2...

Page 454: ...UTION Be sure to hold the Developing Assembly Front Cover to remove the screw Otherwise the Developing Assembly Front Cover may fall which can cause damage on the Developing Cylinder 2 4 Remove the Sleeve Bias Plate 1 Screw F 4 178 F 4 179 Points to Caution at Installation Since white lines may occur on the image go through the following steps to match the phase of the Sleeve Bias Plate and Develo...

Page 455: ...g Cylinder rotation F 4 181 Points to Caution at Installation Find the position in which either scale of Sleeve Bias Plate is most matched with one of the Developing Cylinder Blade scales If the Developing Cylinder Blade is not marked with scales put a mark on the Developing Cylinder Blade at a point that matches one of the scales on the Sleeve Bias Plate and use the point as a reference point See...

Page 456: ...Grip Ring the Gear the Parallel Pin the C Ring the Spacer the Developing Roller and the O Ring in the rear CAUTION Point to Caution at Installation Be sure to install the C Ring and the Spacer correctly Be sure to use a dedicated tool when installing removing the Grip Ring and C Ring F 4 183 Grip Ring Parallel Pin Gear Spacer Developing Roller O Ring C Ring Spacer O Ring Black 2 Remove the C Ring ...

Page 457: ... Fit the C Ring into the groove of the Developing Cylinder Shaft using a dedicated tool 2 Locate the side of the Gear where the Parallel Pin removed in step 2 was set inside and install the Gear to the Developing Cylinder Shaft temporarily 3 Insert the Gear while pushing it against the C Ring and check that click sound which occurs when the C Ring fits into the groove of the Developing Cylinder Sh...

Page 458: ...paration 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit 1 1 Open the Front Cover 1 2 Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Fixing Feed Unit F 4 189 1 3 Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail and then further pull out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops CAUTION Do not touch the surface of the ETB when handling the ETB Unit F 4 190 ...

Page 459: ...Removing the ETB Unit Procedure 1 Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover 1 Screw F 4 191 2 Hold the 2 Handles to remove the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow Processing when replacing the parts 1 Clear the ETB control counter COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR TR BLT Parts counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR BLT is also cleared coincidentally F 4 192 ...

Page 460: ...TB Unit 2 Remove the ETB Unit Refer to page 4 137 CAUTION Do not touch the surface of the ETB when handling the ETB Unit Procedure 1 Fold the ETB Drive Roller Unit 2 Screws x2 F 4 193 2 Set up the ETB Unit to remove the Roller Unit from the ETB CAUTION Be sure to hold within 10mm from both edges of the ETB when handling the ETB Do not touch the surface of the ETB Drive Roller and the Transfer Roll...

Page 461: ...tally CAUTION Points to Caution when Installing the ETB Set the ETB to make the ETB located inside the Guides at both edges F 4 195 Cleaning the ETB Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the ETB 2 Remove the ETB Unit Refer to page 4 137 3 Remove the Roller Unit from the ETB Unit Procedure 1 Clean the Transfer Roller and Drive Roller with lint free paper moistened with alcoh...

Page 462: ...emove the ETB Refer to page 4 139 CAUTION Do not touch the surface of the ETB Drive Roller and the Transfer Roller otherwise it can cause image faults Procedure 1 Turn over the Roller Unit to remove the Claw of the Transfer Roller Shaft Support with needlenose pliers x2 F 4 197 2 Remove the Transfer Roller Shaft Support from the Transfer Roller NOTE When installing the Transfer Roller Shaft Suppor...

Page 463: ...TB Cleaning Blade Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the ETB Unit 2 Remove the ETB Unit Refer to page 4 137 Procedure 1 Remove the ETB Cleaning Blade 4 Screws x4 F 4 200 Removing the ETB Brush Roller Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the ETB Unit 2 Remove the ETB Unit Refer to page 4 137 Procedure 1 Remove the Post transfer Guide 1 Screw F 4 2...

Page 464: ...System Removing the ETB Brush Roller CAUTION Be sure to keep in contact with the Grounding Plate when installing the Post transfer Guide Do not deform the Grounding Plate when installing the Post transfer Guide F 4 202 2 Remove the Connection Gear and the N ring from the ETB Brush Roller 3 Remove the ETB Brush Roller Unit 2 Screws x2 F 4 203 F 4 204 ...

Page 465: ...mage Formation System Removing the ETB Brush Roller Parts Replacement and Clearning Image Formation System Removing the ETB Brush Roller 4 Remove the Shaft Support from the ETB Brush Roller 1 N ring Shaft Support Shaft Support ETB Brush Roller F 4 205 ...

Page 466: ...ner NOTE In the case of toner spill when removing the Waste Toner Container be sure to wipe out the spilled toner After the Waste Toner Container is removed be sure to cover the Waste Toner Container with the Cap attached in the side When the Waste Toner Container is removed outside the machine be sure to promptly cover with the Cap to prevent toner scattering F 4 206 F 4 207 Processing when repla...

Page 467: ...llowing points to note 1 When removing the Process Unit be sure to block light to the Photosensitive Drum Cover with the Photosensitive Drum Protection Sheet or wrap 5 or more papers around the drum to block light 2 Do not place the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum in a location where is exposed to direct rays of the sun e g near the window 3 Do not store in a location with high low temperatur...

Page 468: ... Charging Shutter Unit Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Open the Inner Cover Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 3 Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 97 Procedure 1 Move the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners Left and Right 2 Screws to loosen Loosen CAUTION Do not remove both Shield Plates Right and Left of the Primary Charging Assembly at the same time Be sure to wor...

Page 469: ...the Primary Charging Shutter Unit 2 Move down the Primary Charging Assembly to remove the Shield Plate Right 2 Screws x2 3 Remove the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter from the claw F 4 212 F 4 213 4 Install the Shield Plate Right 2 Screws 5 Remove the Shield Plate Left 2 Screws x2 6 Remove the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter from the claw F 4 214 F 4 215 ...

Page 470: ...arging Shutter Unit 8 Remove the Primary Charging Shutter Unit 2 Screws F 4 216 Installation Method CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be careful not to get the Leaf Spring caught by the Charging Wire to install it to the Cleaner Claw NOTE The Shield Plate does not need to be removed when installing the Shutter Unit 1 Set the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter to the Cleaner Claw x...

Page 471: ... 3 Remove the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 108 Procedure 1 Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block to open the Shield Plate in the direction of the arrow 1 Screw to loosen Loosen 2 Remove the claw at the edge of the Shutter F 4 218 F 4 219 CAUTION Be careful not to remove the screw and the Screw Gear when removing the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit 3 Hold the screw to r...

Page 472: ... the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit Installation Method 1 Install the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit 3 Screws x3 2 Pull the Shutter with your fingers to hook it to the Cleaner Unit F 4 222 F 4 223 CAUTION When installing the Motor Unit fit the PCB into the slot F 4 224 NOTE Be sure to check that the rear shaft is secured 3 Install the Motor Unit 3 Claws x3 F 4 225 ...

Page 473: ...Drum Brush Roller CAUTION Do not touch the Photosensitive Drum Cover the Photosensitive Drum with paper to avoid direct exposure to light Preparation 1 Open the Inner Cover Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 2 Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 97 3 Remove the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 108 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 114 5 Remove th...

Page 474: ...he ETB Drive Unit 2 Remove the 2 Gears and the 2 Bearings 3 E rings 3 Remove the Drum Brush Roller by following the procedure as shown in the figure F 4 228 F 4 229 Removing the ETB Drive Unit Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the ETB Unit 2 Remove the ETB Unit Refer to page 4 137 Procedure 1 Remove the Fixing Feed Lever 1 Screw F 4 230 ...

Page 475: ...ove the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 CAUTION When installing the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws x2 F 4 232 F 4 231 3 Remove the Fixing Feed Left Cover 3 Screws x3 CAUTION When installing the Fixing Feed Left Cover be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws x3 F 4 234 F 4 233 ...

Page 476: ...B Drive Unit Parts Replacement and Clearning Image Formation System Removing the ETB Drive Unit 4 Remove the Duct 2 Screws 1 Connector Harness x2 F 4 235 5 Remove the ETB Drive Unit 3 Screws 1 Connector x3 CAUTION When installing turn the gear so that the gear is engaged F 4 237 F 4 236 ...

Page 477: ...ed Unit Refer to Removing the ETB Unit 2 Remove the ETB Unit Refer to page 4 137 3 Remove the ETB Drive Unit Refer to page 4 153 Procedure 1 Disconnect the connectors 2 Remove the Transfer Cleaning Unit 1 Stepped Screw F 4 238 F 4 239 Removing the Post transfer Static Eliminator Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the ETB Unit Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface of...

Page 478: ...earning Image Formation System Removing the Post transfer Static Eliminator 2 Remove the Post transfer Guide 2 Protrusions 2 Springs CAUTION Be careful not to lose the springs when removing the Post transfer Guide F 4 241 3 Remove the Separation Guide Reinforcing Plate 3 Screws x3 4 Remove the Post transfer Static Eliminator F 4 242 F 4 243 ...

Page 479: ...Receptacle Tray Preparation 1 Open the Front Upper Cover 2 Remove the Toner Bottle Procedure 1 Remove the Toner Receptacle Tray 1 Screw 1 Protrusion F 4 244 CAUTION 1 Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install 2 Toner can be accumulated in the Toner Receptacle Tray therefore be careful not to spill toner when removing F 4 245 2 Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint f...

Page 480: ...r Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit 1 Screws to loosen 3 Remove the Inner Cover Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit 1 Connector 2 Protrusions 4 Move the lever in the direction of the arrow to close the Shutter CLOSE OPEN F 4 247 F 4 248 CAUTION When starting the host machine be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN 5 Remove the Front Upper Cover 2 Hinge Pins 2 Springs 6 Release the Lock L...

Page 481: ...oner can be accumulated in the Toner Receptacle Tray therefore be careful not to spill toner when removing 2 Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install NOTE Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint free paper F 4 252 F 4 251 8 Remove the Connecting Drive Unit 1 Screw 9 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit CAUTION When pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit be sure to place paper ove...

Page 482: ...the Hopper Unit 10 Remove the Left Upper Cover 2 1 Screw 1 Protrusion 11 Set the Fixing Feed Unit back 12 Remove the Right Upper Inner Cover 4 Screws 1 Connector Harness x4 F 4 255 F 4 256 13 Set the Lock Lever back 14 Remove the Hopper Unit 4 Screws 2 Connectors 1 Hook CAUTION Put the removed Hopper Unit on paper placed on the work space x4 x2 F 4 257 F 4 258 ...

Page 483: ... the 4 Tapping Screws x4 CAUTION Points to Note when Installing the Tapping Screws When tightening the Tapping Screws turn them in the reverse direction to check the screw thread on the Hopper Unit side before tightening them Otherwise the screw thread on the Hopper Unit side may be broken which makes it impossible to tighten the screw F 4 260 16 Remove the Bottle Cam 1 E ring 1 Roller 1 Bearing B...

Page 484: ...mbly Refer to page 4 129 Procedure 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Open the Inner Cover Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit 1 Screws to loosen 3 Remove the Inner Cover Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit 1 Connector 2 Protrusions F 4 263 4 Move the lever in the direction of the arrow to close the Shutter CLOSE OPEN CAUTION When starting the host machine be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN 5 R...

Page 485: ...o remove the Toner Bottle 7 Remove the Toner Receptacle Tray 1 Screw 1 Protrusion CAUTION 1 Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install 2 Toner can be accumulated in the Toner Receptacle Tray therefore be careful not to spill toner when removing F 4 266 F 4 267 NOTE Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint free paper F 4 268 8 Remove the Connecting Drive Unit 1 Screw F 4...

Page 486: ...ssembly 10 Remove the Buffer Unit 2 Screws 1 Connector x2 CAUTION When removing the Buffer Unit be sure not to tilt the unit to prevent toner scattering F 4 270 F 4 271 CAUTION Points to Caution When Installing the Buffer Unit Be sure to securely set the Buffer Unit on the Rail Do not get the harness caught Fit the emboss into the proper position otherwise toner can be scattered Be sure to set the...

Page 487: ... Unit 2 Remove the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 108 3 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 114 4 Remove the Hopper Unit Refer to page 4 159 5 Open the Right Door 6 Remove the Right Upper Cover 6 1 Open the Front Upper Cover 6 2 Open the Right Door 6 3 Open the Box Cover Right 6 4 Remove the Right Upper Cover 2 Screws 1 Boss 3 Protrusions x2 F 4 273 Procedure 1 Remove the Right...

Page 488: ... Image Formation System Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit 3 Remove the Potential Control Tray 3 Screws 2 Connectors Wire Saddle x2 x3 4 Remove the Potential Sensor Control PCB 1 Screw 4 Claws 2 Connectors x2 x4 F 4 276 F 4 277 5 Remove the harness 1 Connector Edge Saddle Wire Saddle 6 Remove the Potential Sensor 1 Screw F 4 278 F 4 279 ...

Page 489: ... Waste Toner Feed Unit Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Box Cover Left 1 1 Remove the Harness 2 Wire Saddles 1 2 Remove the Box Cover Left 1 Claw 1 Protrusion Projection Claw F 4 280 F 4 281 2 Open the Controller Box 2 1 Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable 2 2 Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow 4 Screws x4 F 4 282 F 4 283 ...

Page 490: ...aste Toner Feed Unit 3 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 3 1 Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow 3 Screws x3 F 4 284 Procedure 1 Open the Motor Driver Support Plate 2 Screws 5 Connectors Wire Saddle Reuse Band NOTE When opening the Motor Driver Support Plate be sure to free from the protrusion x2 x5 Projection 2 Remove the Flywheel 2 Screws x2 F 4 285 F 4 286 ...

Page 491: ... 3 Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow and then again tighten the screw 4 Remove the belt from the pully F 4 287 F 4 288 5 Remove the Duct 2 Screws x2 6 Open the Front Cover to move the Fixing Feed Lever down To move the cam at the rear of the Fixing Feed Lever Shaft to the position where it does not interfere with the Waste Toner Feed Unit F 4 289 F 4 290 ...

Page 492: ...Drum Drive Unit Preparation 1 Open the Inner Cover Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 2 Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 97 3 Remove the Pre transfer Charging Assembly Refer to page 4 108 4 Remove the Process Unit Refer to page 4 114 5 Remove the Box Cover Left Refer to Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit 6 Open the Controller Box Refer to Removing the Waste Toner F...

Page 493: ...ation System Removing the Drum Drive Unit 2 Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow and then again tighten the screw 3 Remove the belt from the pully F 4 293 F 4 294 4 Remove the transformer 2 Screws 3 Connectors x2 x3 5 Free the harness and remove the Transformer Support Base 1 Screw Harness F 4 295 F 4 296 ...

Page 494: ... Screws 1 Connector Harness x3 7 Remove the Drum Drive Unit 5 Connectors 1 Wire Saddle 3 Screws x5 x3 F 4 297 F 4 298 Removing the Developing Drive Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Developing Assembly Refer to page 4 129 2 Remove the Box Cover Left Refer to Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit 3 Open the Controller Box Refer to Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit Procedure 1 Remove the Flywheel 2 Screws...

Page 495: ...ation System Removing the Developing Drive Unit 2 Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow and then again tighten the screw 3 Remove the belt from the pully F 4 300 F 4 301 4 Remove the transformer 2 Screws 3 Connectors x2 x3 5 Free the harness and remove the Transformer Support Base 1 Screw Harness F 4 302 F 4 303 ...

Page 496: ...ts Replacement and Clearning Image Formation System Removing the Developing Drive Unit 6 Remove the Duct Unit 3 Screws 1 Connector Harness x3 7 Disconnect the Pre transfer Charging High Voltage Connector 1 Screw F 4 304 F 4 305 8 Remove the Developing Drive Unit 3 Connectors 1 Reuse Band 3 Screws x3 x3 F 4 306 ...

Page 497: ...g Removing the Fixing Assembly Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit 1 1 Open the Front Cover 1 2 Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Fixing Feed Unit F 4 307 1 3 Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail and then further pull out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops F 4 308 ...

Page 498: ...e Lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit 2 Remove the Fixing Assembly 2 Screws x2 Stepped Screw Flat Head Screw F 4 309 CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be careful not to damage the Inner Delivery Sensor Flag When installing the Fixing Assembly be sure that the Inner Delivery Sensor Flag passes through the cut off of the Fixing Outlet Guide F 4 310 F 4 311 ...

Page 499: ...ight Stay Dowel Dowel Holder Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the Fixing Assembly 2 Remove the Fixing Assembly Refer to page 4 176 Procedure 1 Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 2 Clean the Fixing Right Stay Dowel Dowel Holder with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 4 312 3 Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit 1 Connector 2 Wir...

Page 500: ... and insert lint free paper into the clearance rear side between the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft and the Shaft Support Plate to remove the accumulated paper lint by dry wipe CAUTION Checking after Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft Be sure to check that the sensor flag rotates and moves back and forth smoothly by moving it manually F 4 315 F 4 316 Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller Pre...

Page 501: ...ove the Fixing Upper Cover Refer to Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web Procedure 1 Clean the surface of the Fixing Oil Pan with lint free paper 2 Clean the surface of the Fixing Cleaning Web Guide with lint free paper F 4 318 F 4 319 Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the Fixing Assembly 2 Remove the Fixing Assembly Refer to page 4 176 3 Re...

Page 502: ...cement and Clearning Fixing Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web 4 2 Remove the Fixing Upper Cover 1 Screw Procedure 1 Open the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover 2 Screws NOTE Because it is engaged hold the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover to remove the screws x2 F 4 322 F 4 323 2 Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web F 4 324 ...

Page 503: ...Fixing Cleaning Web be sure to wind the web around the Web Take up Roller until the green line on the web disappears from view F 4 325 F 4 326 Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the Fixing Assembly 2 Remove the Fixing Assembly Refer to page 4 176 3 Remove the Fixing Front Cover Refer to Removing the Fixing Clean...

Page 504: ...ng Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 5 Secure the Shutter Drive Gear 5 1 Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear Rear 1 Screw F 4 328 5 2 Rotate the Shutter Drive Gear Rear with fingers Then align the cut off of the Shutter Gear with the hole position and secure with the Fixing Pin removed in step 5 1 1 Screw F 4 329 ...

Page 505: ...lacement and Clearning Fixing Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 5 3 Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear Front 1 Screw F 4 330 5 4 Align the cut off of the Shutter Drive Gear Front with the hole position of the Plate and then secure with the Fixing Pin removed previously 1 Screw F 4 331 ...

Page 506: ...e the Fixing Drive Unit 2 Wire Saddle Reuse Band 2 Connectors 2 Screws x2 x2 2 Remove the Fixing Pin 1 Screw F 4 332 F 4 333 3 Disconnect the 5 Connectors on the other side of the Fixing Assembly Wire Saddle 4 Remove the Fixing Pin 1 Screw NOTE Because it is engaged hold the Fixing Upper Unit to remove the Fixing Pin x5 5 Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit Fixing Lower Unit ...

Page 507: ...er Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the Fixing Assembly 2 Remove the Fixing Assembly Refer to page 4 176 3 Remove the Fixing Front Cover Refer to Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web 4 Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1 Refer to Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 5 Secure the Shutter Drive Gear Refer to Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing ...

Page 508: ...t F 4 338 3 Remove the Thrust Stopper from the Fixing Roller Unit to remove the Fixing Roller Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer Bushing Spacer Bearing Insulating Bush Gear Bearing Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer Insulating Bush Fixing Roller CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to locate the groove of the Fixing Roller Bearing inside the Fixing Upper Unit to install F 4 340 CATION Points to...

Page 509: ...NTER DRBL 1 FX UP RL F 4 341 Removing the Pressure Roller Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the Fixing Assembly 2 Remove the Fixing Assembly Refer to page 4 176 3 Remove the Fixing Front Cover Refer to Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web 4 Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1 Refer to Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 5 Secure the Shutter Drive Gear Ref...

Page 510: ... Fixing Assembly 2 Remove the Fixing Assembly Refer to page 4 176 3 Remove the Fixing Front Cover Refer to Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web 4 Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1 Refer to Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 5 Secure the Shutter Drive Gear Refer to Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 6 Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Un...

Page 511: ...Cleaning Web 4 Remove the Fixing Upper Cover Refer to Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web 5 Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web Refer to page 4 180 6 Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1 Refer to Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 7 Secure the Shutter Drive Gear Refer to Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 8 Remove the Heater Unit Refer to Separating the Fixing U...

Page 512: ...ess Guide and remove the Harness Band 1 Screw 3 Place the Fixing Upper Unit as shown in the figure and remove the Fixing Oil Pan 1 Screw F 4 347 F 4 348 4 Remove the Thermistor Unit Support Plate to remove the Thermistor Reciprocating Shaft from the Fixing Upper Unit 2 Screws x2 5 Remove the Leaf Spring and remove the Main Thermistor and the SubThermistor 2 from the Thermistor Holder F 4 349 F 4 3...

Page 513: ...Reciprocating Cam check that there is no gap between the Sub Thermistor 2 and the Fixing Roller If a gap is found perform the following procedure 3 Remove the Fixing Roller 4 Arrange the harness of the Sub Thermistor 2 so as to give the harness some slack on the Thermistor side 5 Perform steps 1 and 2 for double check Fixing Roller Harness of Sub Thermistor 2 Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor 2 Sub The...

Page 514: ...r 1 Screw 4 Remove the Sub Thermistor 1 1 Screw F 4 354 F 4 355 Removing the Upper Separation Claw Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the Fixing Assembly Procedure 1 Hold the Lever of the Left Guide to open the Left Guide 2 While holding the Upper Separation Claw Retaining Spring remove the Upper Separation Claw Upper Separation Claw Upper Separation Claw Spring F 4 356 ...

Page 515: ...w Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit Refer to Removing the Fixing Assembly Procedure 1 Hold the Lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit 2 Clean the Upper Separation Claw with lint free paper moistened F 4 357 F 4 358 3 Wipe toner off the 4 Inner Delivery Rollers with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 4 359 ...

Page 516: ...Refer to Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 6 Secure the Shutter Drive Gear Refer to Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit 7 Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit Refer to page 4 182 8 Remove the Heater Unit Refer to Removing the Fixing Roller Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper 9 Remove the Fixing Roller Refer to page 4 186 Procedu...

Page 517: ...and Clearning Fixing Removing the Thermoswitch Parts Replacement and Clearning Fixing Removing the Thermoswitch 4 Remove the Thermoswitch Unit 1 Screw 5 Remove the Retainer Plate and Thermoswitch Leaf Spring Thermoswitch F 4 363 F 4 364 ...

Page 518: ...eck 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Pull out the Left Pickup Deck to remove 2 Screws x2 NOTE When installing the Left Pickup Deck be sure to fit the 4 protrusions on the Rail into the 4 grooves of the Left Pickup Deck to install Protrusion Groove F 4 366 F 4 365 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Remove the Left Pickup Deck Refer to page 4 197 Procedure 1 Remove the...

Page 519: ...Open the Front Cover 2 Remove the Left Pickup Deck Refer to page 4 197 Procedure 1 Remove the Stopper to remove the Left Deck Feed Roller F 4 368 Removing the Right Pickup Deck 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Pull out the Right Pickup Deck to remove 2 Screws x2 NOTE When installing the Right Pickup Deck be sure to fit the 4 protrusions on the Rail into the 4 grooves of the Right Pickup Deck to install Pr...

Page 520: ...ft Deck Separation Roller Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Remove the Right Pickup Deck Refer to page 4 198 Procedure 1 Pull out the Left Pickup Deck 2 Remove the Stopper to remove the Left Deck Separation Roller F 4 371 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Remove the Right Pickup Deck Refer to page 4 198 Procedure 1 Remove the Right Deck Pickup Roller 1 C...

Page 521: ...ving the Right Deck Feed Roller Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Remove the Right Pickup Deck Refer to page 4 198 Procedure 1 Remove the Stopper to remove the Right Deck Feed Roller F 4 373 Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller 1 Open the Right Upper Cover 2 Pull out the Right Pickup Deck 3 Remove the Feed Guide 1 Boss 4 Remove the Stopper to remove the Right Deck Separation Roller F 4 374...

Page 522: ...nd Clearning Pickup Feed System Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller Removing the Upper Cassette 1 Pull out the Upper Cassette to remove 4 Screws x4 F 4 376 Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller Preparation 1 Remove the Upper Cassette Refer to page 4 201 Procedure 1 Remove the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller 1 Claw F 4 377 ...

Page 523: ...Roller Removing the Upper Cassette Feed Roller Preparation 1 Remove the Upper Cassette Refer to page 4 201 Procedure 1 Remove the Stopper to remove the Upper Cassette Feed Roller F 4 378 Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 2 Remove the Upper Cassette 3 Remove the Feed Guide 1 Boss 4 Remove the Stopper to remove the Upper Cassette Separation Roller F 4 379 F 4...

Page 524: ...nd Clearning Pickup Feed System Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller Removing the Lower Cassette 1 Pull out the Lower Cassette to remove 4 Screws x4 F 4 381 Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller Preparation 1 Remove the Lower Cassette Refer to page 4 203 Procedure 1 Remove the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller 1 Claw F 4 382 ...

Page 525: ...Roller Removing the Lower Cassette Feed Roller Preparation 1 Remove the Lower Cassette Refer to page 4 203 Procedure 1 Remove the Stopper to remove the Lower Cassette Feed Roller F 4 383 Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 2 Remove the Lower Cassette 3 Remove the Feed Guide 1 Boss 4 Remove the Stopper to remove the Lower Cassette Separation Roller F 4 384 F 4...

Page 526: ...Feed System Removing the Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller Removing the Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller Preparation 1 Open the Inner Cover 1 1 Open the Front Cover 1 2 Open the Inner Cover 1 Screw to loosen Loosen Procedure 1 Remove the gear 1 Claw F 4 386 F 4 387 2 Remove the bushing 1 E ring 3 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Guide F 4 388 F 4 389 ...

Page 527: ...rpose Tray Separation Roller 4 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller 1 E ring F 4 390 Removing the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Preparation 1 Open the Inner Cover Refer to Removing the Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller 2 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller Refer to page 4 205 Procedure 1 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Lower Guide 2 Screws 6 Claws 6 Protrusions x2 x6 F 4 391 ...

Page 528: ...emove the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller 1 Claw F 4 393 Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly Cleaning the Vertical Path Assembly 1 Open the Right Cover 2 Open the Right Lower Cover 3 Open the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Guide Unit and clean the 2 areas of the Feed Guide A Remove paper lint 4 Clean a whole circumference of 2 Rollers B and the 3 Rollers C by manually rotating them with l...

Page 529: ...er Sensor PS28 with a blower PS28 PS24 6 Clean paper dust on the Feed Guide A with lint free paper A F 4 395 F 4 396 7 Clean a whole circumference of 10 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint free paper moistened with alcohol CAUTION When rotating the Roller by hand do not touch the surface of the Roller Be sure to hold the side of the Roller to rotate manually 8 Clean a whole circumference o...

Page 530: ...Guide and clean paper dust on the Feed Guide A with lint free paper A F 4 399 Cleaning the Fixing Feed Assembly 1 Open the Fixing Feed Unit fully 2 Open the Registration Upper Guide insert the paper lint cleaning tool into the clearance between the Registration Upper Guide and the Registration Lower Guide and clean the feed area A CAUTION Be careful not to damage the sheet on the edge of the Regis...

Page 531: ...ide and the Registration Lower Guide and clean the feed area B and the sheet on the edge of the Registration Upper Guide CAUTION Be careful not to damage the sheet on the edge of the Registration Upper Guide Sheet B 4 Open the Registration Upper Guide and clean paper dust on the Registration Sensor PS29 with a blower PS29 F 4 401 F 4 402 5 Point the leading edge of Blower to the Static Eliminator ...

Page 532: ...t the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow 8 Clean the soiling adhered on the Magnet and the Sheet with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Sheet Magnet F 4 405 F 4 406 9 I return an ETB unit to the original position 10 Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide A with lint free paper moistened with alcohol A 11 Hold the lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit 12 Clean paper dust on the Feed Guide A w...

Page 533: ...h alcohol CAUTION When rotating the Roller by hand do not touch the surface of the Roller Be sure to hold the side of the Roller to rotate manually 14 Clean paper dust on the Reverse Vertical Path Sensor PS65 with a blower PS65 F 4 409 F 4 410 15 Clean a whole circumference of 4 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 16 Hold the lever of the Feed Unit to clos...

Page 534: ... clean the feed area A inside main body removing the Fixing Assembly can improve the operability A F 4 414 F 4 413 19 Open the Duplex Path 20 Clean paper dust on the feed area A of the Duplex Path Upper Lower with lint free paper A 21 Clean a whole circumference of 10 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint free paper moistened with alcohol CAUTION When rotating the Roller by hand do not touch...

Page 535: ...erence of 5 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 4 417 F 4 418 24 Place a paper on the Duplex Path Then point the leading edge of Blower to the Roller frame to remove paper lint NOTE The Cleaning Brush is engaged with 4 Rollers causing accumulation of paper lint By blowing air with the Blower paper lint can be fallen down 25 Insert the paper lint cleaning...

Page 536: ... 197 Procedure 1 Disconnect the Connectors 2 Remove the Pickup Unit Fixation Plate Upper Right 3 Screws x3 Pickup Unit Fixation Plate Upper Pickup Unit Fixation Plate Right F 4 421 F 4 422 3 Remove the Left Deck Pickup Unit CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation When installing the Left Deck Pickup Unit pull out the Fixing Feed Unit for approx 10cm to install and then return the unit to its ori...

Page 537: ...t Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Right Cover Refer to page 4 93 2 Pull out the Right Deck Refer to page 4 198 Procedure 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 2 Remove the Connector Cover 1 Screw 3 Disconnect the Connectors F 4 425 F 4 426 4 Remove the Right Deck Pickup Unit 1 Screw NOTE Be sure to check that the parts number of Pickup Unit is correct F 4 428 F 4 427 ...

Page 538: ...es 3 and 4 Pickup Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Right Lower Cover 1 1 Open the Right Lower Cover 1 2 Remove the Right Lower Cover 2 Hinge Pins 2 Pull out the Cassettes 3 and 4 F 4 429 F 4 430 Procedure NOTE This procedure explains the case for Cassette 3 Pickup Unit Be sure to perform the same procedure when the Cassette 4 Pickup Unit is used 1 Remove the Connector Cover 1 Screw 2 Disconnect the C...

Page 539: ...ng the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 3 Remove the Pickup Unit 1 Screw NOTE Be sure to check that the parts number of Pickup Unit is correct F 4 434 F 4 433 Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Box Cover Left 1 1 Remove the Harness 2 Wire Saddles 1 2 Remove the Box Cover Left 1 Claw 1 Protrusion Projection Claw F 4 435 F 4 436 ...

Page 540: ...Controller Box in the direction of the arrow 4 Screws x4 F 4 437 F 4 438 3 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 3 1 Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow 3 Screws x3 4 Remove the Waste Toner Container Refer to page 4 145 5 Remove the Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 Pickup Units Refer to page 4 217 Procedure 1 Remove the 2 E rings and move the bushings to remove the Vertical Path Rollers 3 and...

Page 541: ...p Feed System Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 2 Remove the Shield Plate 1 Screw 2 Protrusions x2 3 Remove the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit 3 Screws 1 Hook x3 F 4 441 F 4 442 4 Remove the Feed Driver PCB Unit 4 Screws 13 Connectors 9 Wire Saddles 1 Reuse Band Harness x4 x13 5 Remove the Right Rear Handle 4 Screws x4 F 4 443 F 4 444 ...

Page 542: ...e sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws x4 F 4 445 6 Free the harness and remove the Vertical Path Cassette Drive Unit 1 Connector 3 Wire Saddles 6 Screws x6 F 4 446 Removing the Registration Unit Preparation 1 Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit 1 1 Open the Front Cover 1 2 Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Fixing ...

Page 543: ...arning Pickup Feed System Removing the Registration Unit 1 3 Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail and then further pull out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops F 4 448 Procedure 1 Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover 1 Screw 2 Lift the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow F 4 449 F 4 450 ...

Page 544: ...t Parts Replacement and Clearning Pickup Feed System Removing the Registration Unit 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors x2 4 Set the ETB Unit back F 4 451 F 4 452 5 Remove the Registration Unit 4 Screws x4 CAUTION When installing be sure to check that the 2 Positioning Pins are secured A F 4 454 F 4 453 ...

Page 545: ...eck Pickup Drive Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Box Cover Left Refer to Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 2 Open the Controller Box Refer to Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 3 Remove the Rear Lower Cover Refer to Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 4 Remove the Power Supply Assembly Refer to page 4 234 5 Remove the Left Deck Pickup Unit Ref...

Page 546: ...e Rear Lower Cover Refer to Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit 4 Remove the Waste Toner Container Refer to page 4 145 5 Remove the Right Lower Cover Refer to Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit 6 Remove the Right Deck Pickup Unit Refer to page 4 216 Procedure 1 Remove the Pre registration Guide Unit 2 Screws x2 F 4 457 2 Remove the Middle Vertical Path Guide 1 Screw 3 Rem...

Page 547: ...ons x2 5 Remove the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit 3 Screws x3 CAUTION When removing the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit be careful of toner scattering F 4 460 F 4 461 NOTE When installing the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws x3 F 4 462 6 Remove the Feed Driver PCB Unit 4 Screws 13 Connectors 9 Wire Saddles 1 Reuse Band ...

Page 548: ...he Main Drive Unit CAUTION When installing the Feed Driver PCB Unit be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws x4 F 4 464 7 Remove the Flywheel 2 Screws 2 Washers x2 F 4 465 8 Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow and then again tighten the screw 9 Remove the belt from the pully F 4 466 F 4 467 ...

Page 549: ...kup Feed System Removing the Main Drive Unit 10 Remove the transformer 2 Screws 3 Connectors x2 x3 11 Free the harness and remove the Transformer Support Base 1 Screw Harness F 4 468 F 4 469 12 Remove the Duct Unit 3 Screws 1 Connector Harness x3 13 Disconnect the Pre transfer Charging High Voltage Connector 1 Screw F 4 470 F 4 471 ...

Page 550: ...cement and Clearning Pickup Feed System Removing the Main Drive Unit 14 Remove the Right Rear Handle 4 Screws x4 CAUTION When installing the Right Rear Handle be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten screws x4 F 4 473 F 4 472 15 Remove the Main Drive Unit 6 Screws 1 Connector x6 F 4 474 ...

Page 551: ...ng the Ozone Filter External Auxiliary System Removing the Filter for primary charging 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Remove the Filter for primary charging 1 Screw F 4 475 Removing the Ozone Filter 1 Remove the Filter Cover 1 Screw NOTE To prevent falling of the Filter Cover be sure to hold the Filter Cover to remove the screw 2 Remove the Ozone Filter F 4 476 F 4 477 ...

Page 552: ...g the DC Controller PCB Removing the DC Controller PCB Preparation 1 Remove the Box Cover Left 1 1 Remove the Harness 2 Wire Saddles 1 2 Remove the Box Cover Left 1 Claw 1 Protrusion Projection Claw F 4 478 F 4 479 2 Open the Controller Box 2 1 Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable 2 2 Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow 4 Screws x4 F 4 480 F 4 481 ...

Page 553: ...tem Removing the DC Controller PCB Procedure 1 Remove the Controller Box Inner Cover 4 Screws TP x4 2 Disconnect the 17 Connectors x17 F 4 482 F 4 483 3 Remove the DC Controller PCB in the direction of the arrow 8 Screws x8 CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to securely connect the Connector at the back of the DC Controller PCB F 4 485 F 4 484 ...

Page 554: ...moving the DC Controller PCB Parts Replacement and Clearning External Auxiliary System Removing the DC Controller PCB Processing after replacing the parts Get in service mode to enter all the latest service mode values written on the label at the back of the Front Cover F 4 486 ...

Page 555: ...r Left Refer to Removing the DC Controller PCB 2 Open the Controller Box Refer to Removing the DC Controller PCB 3 Remove the Rear Lower Cover 3 1 Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow 3 Screws x3 Procedure 1 Free the Harness from the Wire Saddle F 4 487 F 4 488 2 Disconnect the 23 Connectors and free the Harness to the top of the Power Supply Assembly x23 3 Remove the Power Su...

Page 556: ...e Fixing Power Unit CAUTION Points to Caution before Operation When executing this procedure be sure to turn OFF the breaker beforehand Leakage Breaker F 4 491 Preparation 1 Remove the Box Cover Left Refer to Removing the DC Controller PCB Procedure 1 Open the 2 Finisher Connector Covers 2 Claws x2 F 4 492 2 Remove the Left Upper Cover 3 Screws x3 3 Remove the Left Upper Frame 5 Screws x5 F 4 493 ...

Page 557: ...s x2 x4 5 Remove the Fixing Power Unit Plate 5 Screws x5 F 4 495 F 4 496 Removing the Feed Driver PCB Preparation 1 Remove the Waste Toner Container Refer to page 4 145 2 Remove the Box Cover Left Refer to Removing the DC Controller PCB 3 Open the Controller Box Refer to Removing the DC Controller PCB 4 Remove the Rear Lower Cover Refer to Removing the Power Supply Assembly Procedure 1 Remove the ...

Page 558: ... Auxiliary System Removing the ARCNET PCB 2 Remove the Feed Driver PCB 6 Screws 15 Connectors x6 F 4 498 Removing the ARCNET PCB Preparation 1 Remove the Left Rear Cover Refer to Removing Main Controller PCB 2 2 Remove the Rear Cover 7 Screws x7 Procedure 1 Disconnect the ARCNET Cable or the Terminal Connector ARCNET Cable F 4 499 F 4 500 ...

Page 559: ...ent and Clearning External Auxiliary System Removing the ARCNET PCB 2 Disconnect the cable 2 Wire Saddles 1 Connector Wire Saddles Connector x2 3 Remove the ARCNET PCB Fixation Plate 5 Screws ARCNET PCB Fixation Plate x5 F 4 501 F 4 502 4 Remove the ARCNET PCB 4 Screws Washer Nut ARCNET PCB Washer Nut x4 F 4 503 ...

Page 560: ...Cover Left Refer to Removing the DC Controller PCB 2 Open the Controller Box Refer to Removing the DC Controller PCB Procedure 1 Open the Motor Driver PCB Unit NOTE When opening the Motor Driver PCB Unit free the top side from the protrusion 5 Connectors Wire Saddle Reuse Band x2 x5 Projection F 4 504 2 Disconnect the connector and Grounding Wire 1 Screw x10 3 While avoiding the harness and Motor ...

Page 561: ...ontrol Panel NOTE The same procedure is applied to both copier model and printer model 1 Open the Toner Replacement Cover 2 Open the Right Cover 3 Remove the Right Upper Cover 2 Screws 3 Protrusions 1 Boss x2 Boss Protrusion F 4 507 4 Close the Right Cover 5 Remove the Right Rear Cover 2 The removed cover and screws are no longer used 1 Screw Protrusion 6 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw 2 Hooks Hook...

Page 562: ...arning External Auxiliary System Removing the Flat Control Panel 7 Open the Upper Right Cover 8 Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 Screw 9 Remove the Upper Left Cover 1 Screw F 4 510 F 4 511 10 Remove the 4 screws which secure the Flat Control Panel The removed screws will be used when installing the Front Upper Cover Middle x4 F 4 512 ...

Page 563: ...ply Cable 1 Edge Saddle 1 Wire Saddle x2 Power Supply Cable Edge Saddle Control Panel Cable Wire Saddle F 4 513 12 Lift up the Flat Control Panel in the direction of the arrow and pull out the Control Panel Cable 13 Disconnect the Control Panel Connector and Power Supply Connector and then remove the Flat Control Panel from the machine Control Panel Cable Power Supply Connector Control Panel Conne...

Page 564: ... External Auxiliary System Removing the Flat Control Panel 15 Disconnect the Control Panel Cable 6 Wire Saddles 1 Connector Control Panel Cable Wire Saddle Wire Saddle A x6 CAUTION Do not disconnect the Power Supply Cable Be sure to close the Wire Saddles except for the open one A 16 Disconnect the Power Supply Connector F 4 515 F 4 516 ...

Page 565: ...5 5 Adjustment Adjustment Overview When replacing parts ...

Page 566: ...ls Front and Rear p 5 11 Developing Assembly p 5 11 Potential Sensor Potential Control PCB p 5 11 ETB p 5 11 Waste Toner Container p 5 11 Fixing System Fixing Roller p 5 12 External Auxiliary System DC Controller PCB p 5 12 T 5 1 When replacing parts Controller System HDD Procedure of parts replacement Refer to Removing HDD Procedure of adjustment 1 Before Replacing Perform the following operation...

Page 567: ...umerical value of the leading card which is used for Department ID Then press OK button e g If No 1 to No 1000 cards are used for Department ID enter 1 of the leading card 2 After turning OFF and ON the main power switch perform the following operations from Settings Registration mode In Management Settings User Management Department ID Management Page Totals be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 ...

Page 568: ...troller PCB 1 Controller Box Frame Cooling Fan Parts number differs on a model basis speed basis Main Controller PCB 1 Cooling Fan Controller BOX Frame In order to secure the accuracy of connector connection when slotting in this service part is provided with the PCB being installed to the frame 1 Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB DDR2 SDRAM 2 pc Flash PCB TPM PCB DDR2 SDRAM Flash PCB...

Page 569: ...ler Box Frame Main Controller PCB 2 F 5 3 1 Before Replacing Perform the following operations Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand 1 Backup of the set registered data Use the Remote UI Management Settings Data Management Import Export Target data Address List Forwarding Settings Settings Registration Web Access Favorites Printer Settings Paper Information 2 Printing the set register...

Page 570: ...l to do so the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause to fail the restoration Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 with Memory PCB installed Memory PCB F 5 4 3 After Replacing 1 After installing the parts turn ON the main power switch 2 Restoring the backup data Use the Remote UI Management Settings Data Management Import Export 3 Resetting registering the data While refe...

Page 571: ...R FUNCTION CLEANING WIRE CLN 3 Init of Primary Charging Wire current VL COPIER ADJUST HV PRI PRI GRID 4 Execute the potential control COPIER FUNCTION DPC DPC Turn OFF and then ON the main power The potential control is executed at startup 5 Execute the potential control COPIER FUNCTION DPC DPC Primary Charging Assembly Procedure of parts replacement see Removing the Primary Charging Assembly on p ...

Page 572: ...F 5 5 When the rear side test print image is dark NOTE When the rear side test print image is dark 2 execute step 4 until the density becomes even When the density becomes even execute step 5 and the following When the adjustment screw is turned clockwise the Charging Wire goes down and up gap between grid and Charging Wire becomes narrow and wide As a result the density of output image becomes li...

Page 573: ...e potential control COPIER FUNCTION DPC DPC 8 Execute the density correction using the user mode Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Density Pre transfer Charging Assembly Procedure of parts replacement see Removing the Pre transfer Charging Assembly on p 4 108 Procedure of adjustment 1 Clear the parts counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 PO UNIT 2 Clean the Charging...

Page 574: ...ce the ROM connected to the host machine with the drum ROM included in the drum NOTE If the ROM is not replaced the replaced drum and the drum unique data stored in the ROM data are not matched As a result when the 2D shading function is enabled it is not functioned normally 2 1 Remove the Drum EEROM 1 Screw 1 Connector F 5 7 3 Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cov...

Page 575: ...ping Assembly on p 4 129 Procedure of adjustment 1 Supplying Developing Assembly toner COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL TONER S Potential Sensor Potential Control PCB Procedure of parts replacement see Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit on p 4 166 Procedure of adjustment 1 Adjust the Potential Sensor offset COPIER FUNCTION DPC OFST F 5 9 ETB Unit ETB Procedure of parts replacement see Removing the ETB...

Page 576: ...nner circumference and outer circumference of the Bushing so that all circumferences are covered with white film otherwise abnormal noise can occur squeaking 2 Clear the counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX UP RL External Auxiliary System DC Controller PCB Procedure of parts replacement see Removing the DC Controller PCB on p 4 231 Procedure of adjustment 1 Before Replacing 1 Backup of the Service Mod...

Page 577: ...6 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Test Print Image Faults Feed Faults Other Version upgrade Making Initial Checks Error Messages Error Codes ...

Page 578: ...roller PCB 2 8 Horizontal line 4 dots 27 spaces Yes Yes Yes Yes Main Controller PCB 2 9 Horizontal line 6 dots 50 spaces Yes Yes Yes Yes Main Controller PCB 2 10 Horizontal line 2 dots 3 spaces Yes Yes Yes Yes Main Controller PCB 2 11 Halftone density 60H Tbic rank 2 without image correction Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main Controller PCB 2 12 Halftone density 60H 134 line screen or 141 line scree...

Page 579: ...re is considered Magnification ratio Check whether the grid is printed at 9 99mm intervals Check the image on the second side at duplex printing ETB and rollers feed system failure or laser exposure system failure drum Laser Scanner is considered F 6 1 T 6 2 17 gradations TYPE 2 3 Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check whether gradation in density is made appropriately Drum failure ...

Page 580: ...one density Check whether uneven image or foggy image appears Transfer system failure or Pre transfer Charging Assembly failure is considered Black line Check whether black lines appear on the image Laser light path failure grid failure developing system failure cleaning drum ETB failure or Pre transfer Charging Assembly failure is considered White line Check whether white lines appear on the imag...

Page 581: ...ar sides Primary Charging Assembly failure drum failure or developing system failure is considered F 6 5 T 6 6 Horizontal line TYPE 8 9 10 Check item Check method Assumed cause Black line Check whether black lines appear on the image Laser light path failure grid failure developing system failure cleaning drum ETB failure or Pre transfer Charging Assembly failure is considered White line Check whe...

Page 582: ... PG PG PICK A3 LDR or larger With shock image go to step 2 Without shock image End 2 Measure a distance from the trailing edge of the shock image 3 Adjust using the following service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ TBLT SPD Adjust the Transfer Belt speed Shock image is located approx 55mm from the trailing edge Adjust the value by 10 gradually Shock image is located approx 63mm from the trailing edge ...

Page 583: ...adjustment is executed when the preferred image is not output even if the Primary Charging Wire height adjustment and secure watermark adjustment are performed Secure watermark adjustment Function Settings Common Print Settings Secure Watermark Settings Adjust Background Character Contrast 1 Check that the two dimensional shading is enabled COPIER OPTION IMG LSR 2D SHADE 1 Enabled 2 Turn OFF and t...

Page 584: ... performed appropriately these values are required to return to the initial values COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE M LINE1 Level 2 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE M LINE2 Level 2 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE1 Level 2 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE2 Level 2 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE3 Level 2 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE4 Level 2 5 2 Adjust the target horizontal scanning direction A to O which uneven...

Page 585: ... numerical value using numerical keypad COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE1 Level 2 Vertical scanning direction 1 to 8 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE2 Level 2 Vertical scanning direction 9 to 16 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE3 Level 2 Vertical scanning direction 17 to 24 COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE S LINE4 Level 2 Vertical scanning direction 25 to 32 NOTE Be sure to switch the screen after entering th...

Page 586: ...ge processing however highlights imperceptible dusts at the original scanning position which may appear as a line on the image Stream reading glass Platen roller 1 Scanning position Before Reading After Reading Result Platen roller 1 Original It sticks on the original during scanning Location ADF Cause At stream reading with the ADF imperceptible dusts paper dust toner dust etc adhere and remain a...

Page 587: ...ield remedy remind that the scan result changes as follows Scanning of light halftone base is skipped to be scanned as white color Blur text outline due to reduced edge emphasis level with the text Photo part appears coarsely Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Separation Claw Location Drum Separation Claw Cause When the paper enters to the drum at separation failure the Separation Claw m...

Page 588: ...uplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller paper is fed with minor soil paper dust and toner attached to it and the soil is gradually attached to the Registration Front Roller When the paper stops at the time of registration the rotating Registration Front Roller contacts the paper which causes two trails of soil of the roller width at 143mm from the paper edge 143 mm Paper Cleaning Brush Dup...

Page 589: ...ge error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller Procedure 1 Open the Duplex Path 2 Remove the Fixed Feed Cover 1 2 Screws 1 Claw x2 3 Remove the right side Duct 1 Connector 1 Wire Saddle 2 Screws 1 Protrusion x2 Protrusion F 6 17 F 6 18 4 Remove the left side Duct 1 Connector 2 Harness Guide 1 Wire Saddle 2 Screws x2 x3 F 6 19 ...

Page 590: ...lex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 5 Remove the Duplex Driver PCB and the Mounting Base 4 Wire Saddles 1 Edge Saddle 11 Connectors 3 Screws 2 Claws x3 x2 x11 x5 F 6 20 6 Remove the following parts 2 E rings 1 Timing Belt 2 Pulleys 2 Parallel Pin 7 Lift the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow 8 Free the 2 claws and remove the Transfer High Voltage PCB Unit Upper Cover in the direction...

Page 591: ...Remove the following parts 3 Connectors 1 Wire Saddle 2 Screws x2 x3 10 Remove the Transfer High Voltage PCB Unit in the direction of the arrow 2 Hooks Hook Hook F 6 23 F 6 24 11 Place a sheet of paper on the Duplex Path and remove a N ring each from the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller CAUTION Be sure to place a sheet of paper on the Duplex Path because paper dust drops during the...

Page 592: ...r procedure CAUTION Points to Caution at Work Be careful not to damage the surfaces of the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller The bearing at the front and the bushing at the rear of the Duplex Right Duplex Outlet Roller are not fixed so be careful not to drop them Bushing Bearing F 6 27 Bushing F 6 28 14 Move the Duplex Right Roller toward the rear and remove the shaft from the Fixin...

Page 593: ...aning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller 17 Clean the four areas where the Cleaning Brushes are attached with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 6 31 18 Remove the paper on the Duplex Path and clean the entire perimeter of each of the 4 rollers with lint free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the roller by hand 19 Attach new 4 Cleaning Brushes w...

Page 594: ...g the roller by hand CAUTION When rotating the roller by hand be sure not to touch the surface of the roller but to hold a side face Registration Front Roller Roller F 6 34 F 6 35 Uneven density Cause Uneven density occurs on the image because of uneven developing performance or change in drum characteristics due to wear Field Remedy Start the field remedy Adjust height of the Primary Charging Wir...

Page 595: ...r to page 6 7 COPIER OPTION IMG LSR 2D SHADE Setting value 1 ON Output the test pattern for 2D shading and adjust the uneven density area individually For detailed procedure see Troubleshooting Uneven density correction by 2D shading Step 4 to 5 Refer to page 6 7 F 6 37 F 6 38 Smeared image Cause Excess toner is transferred on the paper that causes toner collapse at the time of fixing which can ge...

Page 596: ...ust Image Auto Adjust Gradation and check the output result 1 In COPIER ADJUST HV TR P TR OF1 set the values to 4 7 and 10 in that order from the left and check the output result CAUTION Executing the above setting may cause occurrence of vertical lines on the rear side of the image 1 COPIER ADJUST V CONT VL OFST set the value of VL OFST to 10 2 Select the following COPIER FUNCTION DPC execute DPC...

Page 597: ...e value when the default is 100 User mode Sharpness 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 Service mode SHARP 1 25 40 50 60 100 140 175 2 45 65 85 115 145 3 50 75 100 125 150 4 55 85 115 135 155 5 65 100 140 150 160 Images become smoother as values in the table become smaller while they become sharper as values become larger Note that when Sharpness is the upper limit or lower limit the relative value stays constant regar...

Page 598: ...ding imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075 PRO 9070 PRO 9065 PRO 9060 PRO C7065 7055 Series Reverse duplex reading Simultaneous duplex reading imageRUNNER ADVANCE 8105 8095 8085 Series Simultaneous duplex reading imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075 6065 6055 Series Reverse duplex reading Simultaneous duplex reading 1 Respond by another adjustment Refer to the Service Manual 2 In the case of using a simultaneous duplex r...

Page 599: ...he Reader Controller PCB or the Scanner Unit check the initial value of the MTF value If the value is 1 it will be necessary to execute the adjustment 6 Print the image with moiré and check that moiré is not appeared on the image If moiré appears make a fine adjustment T 6 12 T 6 13 When Making Fine Adjustment After Sampling the MTF Value 1 Set the MTF value for fine adjustment to 1 Color B W Lv 1...

Page 600: ... increments of 1 until paper wrinkle is alleviated COPIER OPTION BODY FX WNKL Setting values 0 OFF 1 OFF Default 2 When paper is A3 LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity high humidity environment idle rotation is performed for up to 10 seconds 3 When paper is A3 LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity high humidity environment idle rotation is performed for up to 20 seconds 4 When pa...

Page 601: ...g the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring 2 Remove the 3 Stepped Screws securing the Arm Shaft x3 F 6 43 F 6 44 3 Pull out the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft and rotate the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring to change the phase so that the Fixation Screws do not contact with the dents formed by tightening the screws 4 Insert the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft and retighten the 2 screws loosen...

Page 602: ...is error occurs the ETB Disengage Member Transfer Frame Stopper is caught between the ETB Unit and the plate of the machine and cannot be removed Moreover one side of the Photosensitive Drum is in contact with the ETB Unit so pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit by sheer force may result in damage to the ETB Unit When the ETB Disengage Member Transfer Frame Stopper is left unremoved follow the followi...

Page 603: ...hen the ETB Disengage Member Transfer Frame Stopper is left unremoved 5 Remove the Fan Duct 2 Screws Duct 6 Rotate the Disengage Gear about 90 degrees counterclockwise by hand and lower the ITB Unit CAUTION The load of rotating the gear is heavy so be careful not to get injured Disengage Gear ITB Unit F 6 49 F 6 50 7 Remove the Transfer Frame Stopper Transfer Frame Stopper F 6 51 ...

Page 604: ...led paper on the Multi purpose Tray 3 COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK A sheet is stopped once in a state held by the Fixing Nip area and is delivered approx 20 seconds later 4 Measure the nip width of delivered sheet If the nip widths are as follow it is judged as normal 5 0 to 6 0 mm at the center b and difference between front a and rear b is within 0 5 mm In the case of failure check if there ar...

Page 605: ...oller System Error Diagnosis Tool Main Controller PCB 1 side Main Controller PCB 1 SDRAM TPM PCB PCI Expansion PCB option Main Controller PCB 2 side Main Controller PCB 2 SDRAM J11 J13 SDRAM P Memory PCB Open I F PCB option HDD SDRAM M0 is an option Overview Two types of error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine and stored in the locations shown below Start system failure diagnosis tool ...

Page 606: ... PCB 1 2 and HDD and display the result on the Control Panel This tool is installed in HDD Therefore this tool cannot be used when an error occurred in HDD or HDD cannot be accessed Layout Drawing Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 1 TPM PCB HDD Option Flash PCB HDD Standard F 6 54 Main Controller PCB 1 Wireless LAN PCB Expansion Bus PCB IPSec PCB...

Page 607: ...Basic Flowchart Basic Check Items Check all of the items shown below Does the Pow er Supply LED on the Control Panel light up Yes No Execute basic check Is the Control Panel displayed No Execute Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool Yes No Yes Take an action appropriate for the error Does the main body boot correctly Execute Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool Turn ON the m ain power switch F 6 57 ...

Page 608: ...onnection An All night Power Supply Change Non all night Power Supply if not recovered Operation Operations of the two diagnosis tools are explained below Use each tool according to the following purposes When the main body does not boot the Control Panel is not displayed Execute Boot System Error Diagnosis When an error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1 2 or child PCBs mo...

Page 609: ...Lamp repeats high speed blinking after completion of a check in which an error is detected See 1 For example when an error is detected in Check 2 the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out twice and repeats high speed blinking ON OFF in 0 3 seconds interval When an error is detected be sure to count the number of times the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out For detailed results see Error Diagnosis 1 Whe...

Page 610: ...t System Error Diagnosis Table The error locations are identified according to the following table F 6 62 Controller System Error Diagnosis Boot Method 1 Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys 2 and 4 simultaneously Processing Date Error Clear Reset Stop Start Main Menu Quick Menu Status Monitor Cancel Settings Registration Energy Saver Log In Out Main Power Switch F ...

Page 611: ...ve If this tool still does not boot it means that BCT is deleted So install BCT If BCT is not installed correctly is displayed in Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BCT in the main body F 6 65 F 6 66 Diagnosis Time Diagnosis is completed in approx 3 minutes The result is displayed on the Control Panel When the diagnosis result is normal When an error is detected by diagnosis Detailed information ...

Page 612: ...n Main Controller PCB 2 1 Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 2 Check the installation of SDRAM M1 on the Main Controller PCB 2 3 Replace SDRAM M1 on the Main Controller PCB 2 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 5 Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 Test Name Description Assumed Error Location Remedy Error Code SN 6 SM BUS SOC DIMM2 Check an SM bus error i...

Page 613: ...heck an HDD I F error Main Controller PCB 2 PCI Expansion PCB HDD Cable HDD 1 Check the cable connection of the HDD 2 Check the connection between the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Main Controller PCB 1 3 Replace the HDD 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 5 Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 E602 SN 21 BOARD CONNECT IA SOC Check failure between the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Main Controller PCB...

Page 614: ...ad the system software using SST installed in the PC 2 Download using the USB memory storage device Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine and download the system software stored in the device 3 Download via Contents Delivery System hereinafter CDS Access to CDS via Internet to download the system software directly to the machine System CD System Software CD...

Page 615: ...ttached to the machine If so turn OFF ON the machine to recover the error see Troubleshooting for details F 6 71 F 6 72 Download Mode When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB memory storage device storage device start the machine in Download mode This machine has the following 2 Download modes similarly with other iR series models Normal mode recommend Start from Copier FUNCTION SYSTEM...

Page 616: ...d Single Pass RCOND Duplex Color Image Reader Unit C1 Reader Controller 2 sided Double Pass RCONS Color Image Reader Unit C1 FAX Board Boot Program G3CCB Super G3 FAX Board AF1 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AF1 Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board AE1 Fax Board Main Program G3CCM Super G3 FAX Board AF1 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board AF1 Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board AE1 Key Certificatefor Encrypted Commun...

Page 617: ...e mode by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad When the machine is successfully started in Safe mode execute formatting of BOOTDEV partition retry downloading the system software CAUTION Be sure to use normal mode when using download mode except in a case where it is not possible to start this machine and enter service mode In safe mode version information of SYSTEM MEAPCONT ...

Page 618: ...de only when any of the following conditions is met When downloading some the system software components i e DCON RCON or options When reloading the system software after HDD is formatted Downloading the System Software System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area and the fla...

Page 619: ...memory capacity If the above is the case decompress the file before copying it to SST Preparation Requirements PC with SST Ver 4 41 or later installed The system CD for this machine Steps to copy the system software 1 Start the PC 2 Set the system CD in the PC 3 Start SST 4 Click Register Firmware button F 6 74 5 Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button 6 The system soft...

Page 620: ...the PC has the connection to the network the settings changed to the above mentioned may cause network failures due to redundant IP addresses etc Ensure that the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings Alternatively use the cross cable to connect the PC to this machine Preparation Requirements PC with SST Ver 4 41 or later installed and the system software for t...

Page 621: ... installed 2 Turn on the main power switch of this machine 3 Enter Service mode to start the machine in Download mode Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD and press OK F 6 78 4 Check the IP address of the PC Go to Start menu to select Program Accessory Command Prompt Type IPCONFIG and press Return to see the network settings of the PC If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below...

Page 622: ... software is stored in SST the new set is automatically selected NOTE If no upgrade is stored the existing system software set is unchanged At any rate any versions of the system software can be downloaded by manual selection F 6 80 NOTE When You was connected to the main body of Safe mode in Assist mode A system software of LANGUAGE RUI MEAPCONT SDICT can acquire version information F 6 81 4 Clic...

Page 623: ...o download and overwrite the existing versions Confirm whether to download downgraded versions Overwrite all versions Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade all versions of the system software are downloaded without message By default Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions is selected 5 Click Next button 6 Disconnect the cross cable from the machine 7 En...

Page 624: ...ssage modes Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions Upgraded versions are downloaded without message Skip download of the existing versions Confirm whether to download downgraded versions Confirm whether to download the existing versions downgraded versions Upgraded versions are downloaded without message Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing...

Page 625: ...ware can be deleted not written on HDD or Flash ROM 1 Click Clear button Clear 2 Click Execute Clear button The system software which is stored in the temporary memory space of HDD is deleted 3 Click OK button Return to the previous screen F 6 88 F 6 89 F 6 90 6 Click Shutdown Restart button 7 Click Restart button The machine is restarted The downloaded system software is written on HDD or Flash R...

Page 626: ...y in Single mode After HDD is formatted the machine cannot be started before the system software is downloaded After Format ALL is executed the machine is automatically restarted to reflect formatting to HDD At this time the machine automatically starts in Download mode For BOOTDEV format the machine is ready to download the system software without restarting After formatting enter either Assist m...

Page 627: ...on of the system software Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Automatically restart Writing process Writing process Start in the same version of the system software Automatically restart Start in Download mode of Normal mode restart the machine manually Since there is no system software to be downloaded the shutdown sequence...

Page 628: ... you mount the new HDD or when the machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures etc 2 Connect the PC to the machine to start SST 3 Select the model to be connected and the information file single for individual download Check the network settings and click Start button 4 Click Format HDD button F 6 96 F 6 97 5 Select BOOTDEV or ALL to click Start 6 Click Execute Format button HDD is for...

Page 629: ...tted and the system software is downloaded to write the downloaded software Down time may be approx 5 minutes in maximum to proceed the writing process Never turn OFF the machine while Starting screen is shown F 6 100 Mounting New HDD After HDD set as the service parts is mounted the new HDD should be formatted initially In this case the message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted The fi...

Page 630: ...Backup data Downloaded Uploaded file names Backup data RAM SramImg bin to be uploaded downloaded MEAP applications MeapBack bin to be uploaded downloaded For investigation in Dev Sublog bin Downloadable Service Print The text file of the contents which You output to paper with a service mode Downloadable Backup RAM holds the data from Backup RAM of the Main Controller PCB 2 Before replacing the Ma...

Page 631: ...B Before replacing the Main Controller PCB 2 upload SramImg bin By downloading SramImg bin after replacement the new Main Controller PCB 2 inherits the data including Service mode stored in the old PCB Steps to Upload Data CAUTION When the Canon quality appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of debug log by the R D department we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to det...

Page 632: ...kup 3 Select the model to be connected and the information file for individual download Single Check the network settings and click Start 4 Click Upload Data button F 6 105 F 6 106 5 Select MeapBack bin to click Start button 6 Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary Click Save button 7 Click OK button F 6 107 F 6 108 ...

Page 633: ...ings Restore it even if it cannot log in to SMS Restore Meapbackup bin which backed up after Initialize All Data Setings store it Listed below were the sample steps to download MeapBack 1 Enter Download mode 2 Connect the PC to the machine and start SST 3 Select the model to be connected and Single Check the network setting and click Start button F 6 109 4 Click Download Data button 5 Select the d...

Page 634: ...6 112 Downloading System Software Copy the system software from SST to the USB memory storage device storage device Right after download from the USB memory storage device storage device the system software is stored in the temporary memory space in HDD The system software is written in the system memory area Boot area and Flash ROM upon the machine restarted When the writing process is successful...

Page 635: ...memory capacity If the above is the case decompress the file before copying it to SST Preparation Requirements PC with SST Ver 4 41 or later installed The system CD for this machine Steps to copy the system software 1 Start the PC 2 Set the system CD to the PC 3 Start SST 4 Click Register Firmware button F 6 114 5 Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button 6 The list of th...

Page 636: ...n Requirements PC with SST Ver 4 41 or later installed USB memory storage device Requirements for USB memory storage device Interface USB 1 1 or later USB 2 0 is recommended Memory capacity 1GB or more is recommended the total file size of the system software is approx 500MB Format FAT FAT 16 FAT32 NTFS and HFS are not supported The memory is formatted in a partition multiple partitions are not su...

Page 637: ...con shown in Select the target Screen 5 Select the drive removable disk where the USB memory storage device storage device is inserted F 6 118 F 6 119 6 Select Series and Version the System Version NOTE The signs shown in the field of Firmware registration static indicate the following Y Stored in SST N Not stored in SST 7 Click Start button Start copying the system software to the USB memory stor...

Page 638: ...f this occurred turn OFF ON the power to recover the error 8 Click OK when the system software is successfully copied in the USB memory storage device storage device F 6 122 Connection CAUTION This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB memory storage device therefore SST and a USB memory storage device cannot be used at the same time Preparation Item to prepare a USB memor...

Page 639: ...s machine retries the detection of a USB memory storage device for up to 60 seconds after power ON The above menu is not displayed if the recognition of a USB memory storage device is failed within the time period In such a case use another USB memory storage device F 6 124 Upgrading System Software Menu Function Overview download Menu USB 1 Upgrade Auto 2 Upgrade w Confirmation 3 Upgrade Overwrit...

Page 640: ...ng downloading writing Do not turn OFF the power during downloading or writing of the system software otherwise this machine may not be started even if the power is turned ON If the machine fails to be started even if the power is turned ON start the machine in safe mode pressing 2 8 keys When the machine can be started in safe mode be sure to download the system software once again If the machine...

Page 641: ...are for RCON is not downloaded but other software are downloaded For the system software of the option that is not connected it is handled as follows In the case of startup in normal mode Recommended For the option that is not connected the system software is not to be downloaded In the case of startup in safe mode The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded After...

Page 642: ...em software with newer version in the USB memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older a confirmation message is displayed on the Control Panel so that the user can select whether to overwrite or not In safe mode only the following system software can retrieve the version information the versio...

Page 643: ... system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older than the system software in the HDD a message is displayed in each case to confirm whether to overwrite or not Press the key on the Control Panel 0 To overwrite Any key other than 0 Not to overwrite F 6 131 F 6 130 Once downloading is complete a message is displayed to encourage pressing the Reset key 4 Press the Reset ...

Page 644: ... HDD 5 Backup 7 Clear downloaded files 8 download Menu 2 9 Other Menu 3 has been selected Execute OK 0 CANCEL Any other keys During downloading download status is displayed on the Control Panel F 6 133 CAUTION In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device all the system software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well Therefore be sure to keep the following in...

Page 645: ...stall the system software HDD formatting is not required User data is not erased After formatting this machine cannot be started unless the system software is downloaded When Format ALL is executed initialization process is reflected to the HDD so that this machine is automatically restarted to automatically enter download mode In the case of formatting BOOTDEV the machine is not automatically res...

Page 646: ... menu screen download Menu USB 1 Upgrade Auto 2 Upgrade w Confirmation 3 Upgrade Overwrite all 4 Format HDD 5 Backup 7 Clear downloaded files 8 download Menu 2 9 Other Menu 4 has been selected Execute OK 0 CANCEL Any other keys F 6 136 4 Press the key on the Control Panel 1 0 To execute formatting BOOTDEV Any key other than 0 To return to the menu screen 2 0 To execute formatting the entire HDD An...

Page 647: ...d in the temporary storage area of the HDD F 6 138 This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the system software in menu 2 or 3 Operation procedure 1 After downloading by menu 2 or 3 press the Reset key to execute shutdown sequence and then turn OFF the main power once the screen display disappears 2 Start the machine in safe mode while pressing 2 8 ke...

Page 648: ...ecause the system software of the non connecting option is not to be downloaded in Assist mode In Single mode it is available to download the system software of the option that is not installed In the case of downloading the Finisher s system software make the download mode of the Host Machine in normal mode and connect to SST and then download just the system software of the Finisher with the ver...

Page 649: ... 5 The site is well ventilated and the floor keeps the machine level 6 The machine s power plug remains connected to the power outlet Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type 8 The paper is not moist Try paper fresh out of package Checking the Placement of Paper 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specific level 10 If a transparenc...

Page 650: ...on to external network Without connection to external network 1 Schedules for UGW linked distribution are maintained on CDS NOTE See User Manual of the device for how to connect the device to the external network When needed perform the communication test before actual download to check if the communication with the distribution server is normal F 6 141 Preparation Overview of Preparation The foll...

Page 651: ... settings for CDS CTL Japan JP China CN USA US Hong Kong HK Singapore SG Australia AU Europe NL Canada CA Korea KR Latin America LA T 6 24 Network Settings 1 Connecting to External Network The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection method Refer to user manual of the device for details NOTE See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external net...

Page 652: ...gs button F 6 143 F 6 144 5 Ensure to enter https device c cdsknn net cds_soap updaterif in the field beside the Delivery Server URL button If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field click Delivery Server URL button to show the virtual keypad Check the URL and enter the correct one 6 Press OK to set the entered items Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully set ...

Page 653: ...ce Mode at Level 1 1 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 2 Press 2 and 8 buttons at a time on the control panel 3 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 4 Service Mode screen is shown NOTE CDS and RDS are another servers You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a communication test of the RDS 2 Press Updater b...

Page 654: ...are in the method of UGW linked Download and Update or UGW linked Download the following should be set before actually using UGW link Service Technician Setting of Device Service Mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS UGW 0 1 Setting of UGW WebPortal In Customer Management screen set Do not distribute firmware to Distribute firmware Sales Company s HQ Setting of Authorities on UGW WebPortal See Ana...

Page 655: ...of job Function under Limitations and Cautions Updater of Chapter 2 Technology of this manual for more detailed information NOTE To contacts registered for E mail notification on UGW the E mail is sent from UGW upon completing firmware update F 6 151 b UGW linked Download Remote Distribution Update See the figure below for the operational flow of UGW linked download STEP 2 Update using Updater STE...

Page 656: ...te Distribution Update Troubleshooting Making Initial Checks b UGW linked Download Remote Distribution Update 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Update Firmware button F 6 153 F 6 154 4 Press Apply Firmware button 5 Confirm the downloaded firmware and press Yes button F 6 155 F 6 156 ...

Page 657: ...the queue Print Scan Fax except I FAX this function is enabled for I FAX only during Print Scan operation See the section of Wait for EOJ end of job Function under Limitations and Cautions Updater of Chapter 2 Technology of this manual for more detailed NOTE To contacts registered for E mail notification on UGW the E mail is sent from UGW upon completing firmware update c Manual Download and Updat...

Page 658: ...on 4 Confirm the firmware to be updated in either of the following 2 ways To update to the official edition press Confirm Applicable Firmware button and go to Step 6 To update to the individual response edition press Special Firmware and go to Step 5 F 6 159 F 6 160 5 Special Firmware screen is shown as below Enter the fields and press OK button Retrieval ID Enter numeric up to 8 characters Passwo...

Page 659: ...y release note is published the contents are shown here NOTE To update to the individual response edition the firmware corresponding to the ID and password that you input is displayed in Applicable Firmware F 6 162 7 Delivery Settings screen is shown as below Enter the fields and press OK button Delivery Time Press either Now or Set Time button Now The firmware is downloaded immediately after dist...

Page 660: ...ssion Auto cannot be selected in Timing to Apply Updated Module Only For firmware versions with difference only delivery disabled only OFF can be selected in Updated Module Only E mail To send E mails to multiple destinations each E mail address should be delimited with comma or semi colon For E mail addresses entered in this field a notification E mail is sent at the following timing Distribution...

Page 661: ...istribution schedule and press OK button Now STEP 1 is successfully completed F 6 166 F 6 167 STEP 2 Update using Updater The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions When Timing to Apply is set to Auto in Distribution Setting in STEP 1 the firmware is updated automatically Only when Timing to Apply is set to Manual follow the steps below to update the firmware 1 St...

Page 662: ...ice is restarted confirm the version of the firmware 1 Press Check Counter Key button on the control panel 2 Press Check Device Configuration button 3 Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to Controller Version Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update CAUTION Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in th...

Page 663: ...tting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 2 Press 2 and 8 button at a time on the control panel 3 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 4 Service Mode screen is shown 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Update Firmware button F 6 172 4 Press Delete Scheduled Delivery button 5 Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press Yes button 6 Confirm the r...

Page 664: ... at Level 1 1 Press Setting Registration User mode button on the control panel 2 Press 2 and 8 buttons at a time on the control panel 3 Press Setting Registration User mode button on the control panel 4 Service Mode screen is shown 2 Press Updater button 3 Press Update Firmware button F 6 175 4 Press Apply Firmware button 5 Confirm the downloaded firmware and press Yes button 6 The firmware is app...

Page 665: ...updated firmware version corresponds to Controller Version Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method Deleting Downloaded Firmware This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater 1 Start Service Mode at Level 1 1 Press Setting Registration User Mode button on the control panel 2 Press 2 and 8 button at a time on the control panel 3 Press Setting Registration ...

Page 666: ...ware Installation No 1 Symptom I can t find the firmware to be updated using Updater Cause Preparation has not been properly done Action Confirm the setting of Sales Company s HQ bellow Setting of Device SERVICE MODE Level1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CDS CTL Cause The version currently in use is not available for update Action Download the release note from CDS separately to upgrade to the version av...

Page 667: ...ice parts should be replaced takes up to 1 minute for rewriting If the operation above successfully triggers the download mode go to the next steps below 2 Via SST format the HDD of BOOT Dev only 3 Via SST install the firmware in the device No 4 Symptom Firmware has not been downloaded according to the distribution schedule Cause Other firmware distribution schedule is set Since only 1 distributio...

Page 668: ...rt Symptom occurred Location of the device Date and Time that symptom occurred Steps taken for reproduction Firmware Application you tried to install Occurrence frequency Model dependency if the same symptom occurred in other models Dependency on firmware MEAP application system option Conditions of symptom occurrence Model Firmware version installed on the device List of MEAP applications install...

Page 669: ...N FNC SW CDS MEAP 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS FIRM 1 2 Log in the remote UI URL http device s IP address or host name using the system administrator right 3 From Display Logs Communication Test screen obtain System Logs log level 4 and Update Logs by copy paste Top page Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings License Others Register Update Software Display Logs Communication Test NOTE S...

Page 670: ...eck the network At the time of file download Communication error to the delivery server occurred Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence If the network environment of the device is correct obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company 5...

Page 671: ...ion Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company again 10 Delivery Server Connect OK File Server Retrieve Failed Error Code xxxx Delivery Server Connect OK File Server Retrieve Failed Error Code XXXX Due to no return of data for the communication test time out in HTTP communication no response for 1min occurred After...

Page 672: ...urrence If the network environment of the device is correct obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company No return of notifying version information Network cable was disconnected during notice of version information Re connect the network cable and re execute the job If it recurs o...

Page 673: ...ntact Support Div of the sales company Immediate download error dialogue An internal error occurred at the time of requesting firmware delivery information Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company During the download all space in the storage disk...

Page 674: ... job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company Manual update main screen Automatic update main screen Updated version was different from the ordered version Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of ...

Page 675: ...er to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company 15 Applicable firmware is not registered On site error dialogue At the user site no latest firmware exists This means the current firmware is the latest so this error has no impact But when the latest firmware to be retrieved must exist e g released new firmw...

Page 676: ...how to read them How to read an error code 84014206 Code Value Contents The first digit Error field 8 Error The second digit Operator 0 1 2 3 4 5 Not defined CDS server Updater UGW Service person IT administrator User The 3rd 4th digits Method category xx Method The 5th digit Category code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Category code The 6 8th digits Description code 000 See Error code list F 6 185 ...

Page 677: ...t The settings of a mandatory additional set are invalid 0 0 2 In a notice of delivery allowed information an install set was release to the market but the market release was stopped during the delivery 0 0 3 No mail template file exists 0 0 4 The device serial number in the data entry item differs from that in delivery information 0 0 5 User is selected as Operator in the data entry items and the...

Page 678: ... licenses to be issued will exceed the limit number allowed to register 0 0 6 As for System Option for the same function the license keys were issued more than the defined number of times for the same device serial number 0 0 7 No device product exists applicable to the optional product 0 0 8 No product exists applicable to the device serial number 0 0 9 The product of the entered license access n...

Page 679: ...1 0 4 An invalid SOAP response error 2 0 1 An internal error about application information 2 0 2 config xml is NOT FOUND 2 0 3 type xml is NOT FOUND 2 0 4 An error in binding type xml 2 0 5 An error in creating a service tab 2 0 6 A runtime error in performing the web method 2 0 7 An unknown host error in performing the web method Check the network environment of the device and start the operation...

Page 680: ...otice of start from the eRDS 1 0 4 Error of socket reading 1 0 5 Socket communication time out 7 Other internal codes 0 0 2 One of installation start or authorization failed When installation or authorization failed it is regarded as an error 0 3 x An internal error in processing the installation 1 x x An error by using invalid API 2 x x An internal error in SMS 3 0 1 No existence of delivery ID 3...

Page 681: ...ation to determine the cause Effective Instances of Collecting Debug Log The error occurs only at the customer site and cannot be reproduced by the sales company or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow up When the error frequency is low When the error is suspected of links with firmware rather than a mechanical electrical failure Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reprodu...

Page 682: ...counter 1 2 3 Store log to an HDD SST The data is collected as a set of operation Starting the machine with the 2 and 8 keys and using a USB memory device The data is collected as a set of operation Collecting Debug Log USB memory device NOTE When the data is sent to the USB memory device USB memory where the system software for this machine has been registered using the SST Manual Saving by Holdi...

Page 683: ...ming to store logs in the HDD Logs are used to analyze the cause of a trouble Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display adj set range 0 to 3 0 Save PLOG at detection of Reboot Exception...

Page 684: ...e is at download mode by starting it with the 2 and 8 keys Note Executing a log collection by SST deletes logs in the machine 1 Start SST Ver 4 41 or later and select iRC5051 from Model List Press the Start button 2 Press the Upload Data button F 6 190 3 Select the data to be uploaded then click Start button When there is no log in the machine it results in blank option items for data to upload Wh...

Page 685: ...log Uploading Data by SST Preconditions 4 Press the Save button F 6 192 F 6 193 5 Check that the data storage is completed and click the OK button 6 Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC In the initial setting Windows C ServData iRC5051 EXR02627 Serial number F 6 194 F 6 195 ...

Page 686: ...7 7 Error Code Error Code Overview Error Code Jam Code Alarm Code ...

Page 687: ...ertion Unit L1 02 05 Staple Finisher E1 Booklet Finisher E1 02 05 61 62 External 2 3 Hole Puncher A1 02 05 65 T 7 1 T 7 2 Pickup position code When jam occurs pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code Pickup position Pickup position code At Finisher jam At error avoidance jam At ADF jam without pickup operation at SEND Inbox etc 00 Right Deck 01 Left Deck 02 Cassette 3 0...

Page 688: ...00 0010 05 Title Fixing Assembly low temperature error Remedy Clear the error Description Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the error E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E001 0002 05 Title Fixing Assembly high temperature error software detection Remedy 1 Check if the cable of the Thermistor is caught Replace the Thermistors Replace the Fixing Upper Unit 2 IH control erro...

Page 689: ...ting the Fixing Roller temperature control E003 0010 05 Title Fixing Assembly temperature decrease error Remedy Clear the error Description Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the error E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E004 0010 05 Title Fixing Power Supply error Remedy Clear the error Description Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the error E004 0205 05 ...

Page 690: ...ar 2 Replace the Fixing Motor M3 3 Check the connection drawer between the Fixing Assembly and the host machine 4 Replace the Main Driver PCB PCB2 Description Lock error of the Fixing Motor M3 E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E017 0001 05 Title ETB disengagement error Remedy 1 Check the connection of the ETB Disengage Sensor PS56 Sensor side J2101 J3270 PCB side J343 Duplex Driver PCB ...

Page 691: ...absent error Remedy 1 Check the connection of the Developing Toner Sensor TS1 Sensor side J2133 J3089 relay PCB side J3088 relay J114 Main Driver PCB PCB2 2 Check the connection of the Magnet Roller Clutch CL5 Sensor side J2036 J3124 relay J3090 relay PCB side J3091 relay J115 Main Driver PCB PCB2 3 Check the connection of the Toner Feed Motor M28 Motor side J2035 J3124 relay J3090 relay PCB side ...

Page 692: ...ng Clutch is ON 6 Replace the Main Driver PCB PCB2 7 Replace the DC Controller PCB PCB1 Description Lock error of the Developing Motor M2 E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E023 0002 05 Title Error in Magnet Roller Clutch connection detection Remedy 1 Check the connection of the Magnet Roller Clutch CL5 Sensor side J2006 Main Driver PCB PCB2 side J109 2 Replace the Magnet Roller Clutch C...

Page 693: ...on E060 0001 05 Title Primary Charging Shutter HP open error Remedy 1 Check the position of the Primary Charging Shutter and the Cleaning Pad 1 A In the case that the Primary Charging Shutter and the Cleaning Pad fail to operate stopped at HP at front side 1 A 1 Check the connection of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor M6 Motor side J3017 J3060 iR ADV 8xxx J3160 iR ADV 6xxx relay PCB side J...

Page 694: ...ce the DC Controller PCB PCB1 Description The Primary Charging Shutter Sensor PS94 detects that the shutter is closed although it is moved to the open position E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E061 0001 05 Title Potential control error VL Remedy 1 Check the connection of the Pre exposure LED connector connection open circuit the caught cable 2 Check the installation of the Primary Char...

Page 695: ...the dark area did not fall within the range target value 10V although retry was executed 8 times at VD potential control E064 00FF 05 Title High voltage setting error Remedy 1 Turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 Replace the DCON PCB Description With the state in which the developing AC is output 600V or higher developing DC output was detected Basically this error is not detected However to dete...

Page 696: ...he DC Controller PCB PCB1 Description The Pre transfer Charging Shutter Sensor PS95 detects that the shutter is opened although it is moved to the close position E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E066 0002 05 Title Pre transfer Charging Shutter HP close error Remedy 1 Check the position of the Pre transfer Charging Shutter 1 A In the case that the Pre transfer Charging Shutter fails to ...

Page 697: ... High Voltage Unit side J3098 2 Check the connection between the Relay PCB PCB5 and the High Voltage Unit Relay side J519 High Voltage Unit side J3099 3 Replace the Pre transfer Charging Assembly 4 Check the connection inside of the High Voltage Unit Check the connection of the High Voltage Unit Relay J3098 and the Transfer High Voltage PCB J3544 Check the connection of the High Voltage Unit Relay...

Page 698: ...tion disappears Use the machine or the unit in an environment where condensation does not occur Description After the BD range was specified lock was unlocked for 1 second or longer E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E100 13xx 05 Title Polygon Motor BD unlock error Laser diode is not lit up failure of the BD PCB power supply error or condensation Remedy 1 Check if the door is opened Clos...

Page 699: ...e Location Item Description E110 12xx 05 Title Polygon Motor FG unlock error Remedy 1 Check if the door is opened Close the door 2 Check the connector connection open circuit and the caught cable of the DC Controller PCB PCB1 and the Laser Driver PCB PCB35 DC Controller side J471 J472 Laser Driver side J5100 J5101 Relay Harness connection to Polygon Motor M44 and BD Sensor J3011 3 Replace the Lase...

Page 700: ... Driver PCB PCB3 5 Replace the DC Controller PCB PCB1 Description Failed to establish a communication between the DC Controller PCB PCB1 and the Feed Driver Pub PCB3 E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E197 0003 05 Title Error in Duplex Driver PCB connection detection Remedy 1 Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB PCB1 and the Fixing Feed Drawer DC Controller side J431 J432 F...

Page 701: ...nected E197 0010 05 Title Error in Primary Charging High Voltage PCB connection detection Remedy 1 Check the connection between the Main Driver PCB PCB2 and the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB PCB11 Main Driver side J111 Primary Charging High Voltage side J3501 2 Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB PCB11 Description Connection between the Main Driver PCB PCB2 and the Primary Charging H...

Page 702: ...le Power supply 24V error Remedy 1 Connector disconnection open circuit of the Reader Power Supply 2 Failure of power supply Description 24V port is OFF when a job is started E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E227 0003 04 Title Power supply 24V error Remedy 1 Connector disconnection open circuit of the Reader Power Supply 2 Failure of power supply Description 24V port is OFF when a job ...

Page 703: ...ales companies Description E246 0003 00 Title System error Remedy Contact to the sales companies Description E246 0005 00 Title System error Remedy Contact to the sales companies Description E247 0001 00 Title System error Remedy Contact to the sales companies Description E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E247 0002 00 Title System error Remedy Contact to the sales companies Description ...

Page 704: ...rs or the operation stops abnormally E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E270 0002 04 Title Error in horizontal scanning vertical scanning synchronous signal Remedy 1 Connector disconnection open circuit of the Scanner Unit Reader DADF 2 Connector disconnection open circuit of the Reader Controller PCB PCB1 3 Failure of the Scanner Unit Reader DADF 4 Failure of the Reader Controller PCB P...

Page 705: ...AM 2 Replacement of HDD 3 Replacement of the Main Controller PCB Description JBIG decode error E315 000e 00 Title Codec error Remedy 1 Replacement of SDRAM 2 Replacement of HDD 3 Replacement of the Main Controller PCB Description Software decode error E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E315 0025 00 Title Codec error Remedy Replacement of the Main Controller PCB Description ROTU hardware ...

Page 706: ... 0551 00 Title Codec error Remedy jcdImage device Description Abnormal interruption is detected after starting the operation E315 0560 00 Title Codec error Remedy jcdImage device Description Interruption does not occur although 2 minutes have passed after starting the operation E315 0561 00 Title Codec error Remedy jcdImage device Description Abnormal interruption is detected after starting the op...

Page 707: ...of the Pickup Roller Unit Lifter HP Sensor SR12 does not change within the specified period of time although the Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor M10 is driven E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E407 0001 04 Title Tray Lifter Motor M8 error Remedy 1 Connector disconnection open circuit of the Tray HP Sensor SR13 2 Connector disconnection open circuit of the Tray Lifter Motor M8 3 Failure ...

Page 708: ...on open circuit of the Disengagement HP Sensor 2 SR16 2 Connector disconnection open circuit of the Disengagement Motor 2 M7 3 Failure of the Disengagement HP Sensor 2 SR16 4 Failure of the Disengagement Motor 2 M7 5 Failure of the DADF Driver PCB PCB1 Description The DADF Disengagement HP Sensor 2 SR16 is not turned OFF within the specified period of time although the DADF Disengagement Motor 2 M...

Page 709: ...tive times E505 0001 05 Title Finisher back up RAM EEPROM error Finisher D1 E1 Remedy The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty Description The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error The value written in EEPROM and the value extracted from EEPROM doesn t conform E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E505 0002 05 Title EEPROM error External 2 Hole Puncher Remedy The Punch Controller PCB is fa...

Page 710: ...The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate front home position Sensor when the alignment plate front Motor has been driven for 4 seconds E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E531 8001 05 Title Staple home position error Finisher E1 Remedy 1 The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Stapler is faulty 2 The Stapler is faulty 3 The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty Descript...

Page 711: ...he Finisher Controller PCB is faulty Description 1 If the tray does not return to home position when the Tray 1 Shift Motor is driven for 25 seconds 2 If the tray does not move to other area when Tray 1 Shift Motor is driven for 5 seconds E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E540 8002 05 Title Tray 1 shift area error Finisher E1 Remedy 1 The Tray 1 Shift Area Sensor PCB is faulty 2 The wir...

Page 712: ...ed during tray operation 3 During evacuation operation arrival at the area beyond the Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 2 is detected before this Sensor detects paper surface E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E542 8004 05 Title The Tray 2 Shift Motor clock error Finisher E1 Remedy 1 The Tray 2 Shift Area Sensor PCB is faulty 2 The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Tray 2 Shift Mo...

Page 713: ... Folding Unit H1 Remedy 1 Connector of the Upper Stopper HP Sensor S16 is disconnected 2 Upper Stopper HP Sensor S16 is faulty Description The receiving light intensity failed to be within the threshold although the emitting light intensity is adjusted to be within the threshold when adjusting the Sensor E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E569 8001 05 Title Upper Stopper Motor of Paper F...

Page 714: ...h CL101 ang Stack Ejection Lower Roller Clutch CL102 is faulty 5 The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty Description The stapler does not return to the shutter home position when the Stack Ejection Motor has been driven for 3 seconds E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E584 8001 05 Title Shutter home position error Finisher E1 Remedy 1 The Shutter Home Position Sensor PI113 is faulty 2 The ...

Page 715: ...the Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 LED1 PTR1 has been decreased to 0 E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E592 8005 05 Title Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 error External 2 Hole Puncher Remedy 1 The wiring between the LED PCB Photosensor PCB and Punch Controller PCB is faulty 2 The LED PCB and Photosensor PCB is faulty 3 The Punch Controller PCB is faulty 4 The Finisher Controller PCB ...

Page 716: ...nector of the Tray Lift Motor M2 is disconnected 2 Tray Lift Motor M2 is faulty 3 Connector of the Paper Feed Sensor S3 is disconnected 4 Paper Feed Sensor is faulty Description The Paper Feed Sensor S3 did not turned ON when the Inserter paper feed tray moved up E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E5E1 0002 05 Title Tray Lift Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to return to HP Document In...

Page 717: ...M3 is faulty 4 The Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB is faulty Description The Guide Home Position Sensor does not turn OFF when the Guide Motor has been driven for 50 pulses E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E5F3 8001 05 Title Aligning plate home position error Finisher E1 Remedy 1 The Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor PI5 is faulty 2 The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty 3 The A...

Page 718: ...edy 1 The Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor PI14 Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor PI15 and Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor PI1 is faulty 2 The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty 3 The Paper Pushing Plate Motor M8 is faulty 4 The Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB is faulty Description The number of pulses detected by the Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor is 6 pulse...

Page 719: ...2 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1 Reinstall the system 2 HDD Description The file on HDD in which the Web browser refers to is corrupted or deleted E602 0100 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1 Check the Cable and Power Connector 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI and then turn OFF and ...

Page 720: ... then ON the main power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in FSTDEV E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0113 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK ...

Page 721: ...the main power Use SST to perform reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If the error still remains it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in FSTDEV E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0200 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1 Check the Cable and Power Connector 2 If the measures ...

Page 722: ... then ON the main power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in IMG_MNG E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0213 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK...

Page 723: ... the main power Use SST to perform reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If the error still remains it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in IMG_MNG E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0300 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1 Check the Cable and Power Connector 2 If the measure...

Page 724: ... then ON the main power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in FSTCDEV E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0313 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK...

Page 725: ... the main power Use SST to perform reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If the error still remains it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in FSTCDEV E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0400 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1 Check the Cable and Power Connector 2 If the measure...

Page 726: ... then ON the main power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in THUMDEV E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0413 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK...

Page 727: ... the main power Use SST to perform reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If the error still remains it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in THUMDEV E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0500 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1 Check the Cable and Power Connector 2 If the measure...

Page 728: ... then ON the main power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in APL_GEN E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0513 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK...

Page 729: ... the main power Use SST to perform reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If the error still remains it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in APL_GEN E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0600 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1 Check the Cable and Power Connector 2 If the measure...

Page 730: ... then ON the main power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in TMP_GEN E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0613 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK...

Page 731: ... the main power Use SST to perform reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If the error still remains it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in TMP_GEN E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0700 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1 Check the Cable and Power Connector 2 If the measure...

Page 732: ... then ON the main power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in TMP_FAX E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0713 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK...

Page 733: ... the main power Use SST to perform reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If the error still remains it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in TMP_FAX E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0800 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1 Check the Cable and Power Connector 2 If the measure...

Page 734: ... then ON the main power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in TMP_PSS E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0813 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK...

Page 735: ... SST to perform reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If the error still remains it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in TMP_PSS E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0900 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1 Check the Cable and Power Connector 2 If the measures above do not solv...

Page 736: ...e Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0912 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the sy...

Page 737: ...Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozen minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON th...

Page 738: ... above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in BOOTDEV E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1012 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI and then turn OFF and t...

Page 739: ...Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozen minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON th...

Page 740: ...y HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in APL_MEAP E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1111 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read Write level 1 Check the Cable and Power Connector 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and re...

Page 741: ...ve do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in APL_MEAP E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1125 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozen m...

Page 742: ...e caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in APL_SEND E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1211 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy This is the error which usually does not occur in Read Write level 1 Check the Cable and Power Connector 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the ...

Page 743: ...ve do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in APL_SEND E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1225 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozen m...

Page 744: ... above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in APL_KEEP E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1312 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI and then turn OFF and ...

Page 745: ...00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozen minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON...

Page 746: ... above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in APL_LOG E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1412 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI and then turn OFF and t...

Page 747: ...00 Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozen minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON...

Page 748: ...s above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in CRBDEV E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1512 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI and then turn OFF and t...

Page 749: ...Title Hard disk error Remedy The document data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozen minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON th...

Page 750: ... above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Error in APL_CDS E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1612 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy Error due to data corruption or software bug 1 Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI and then turn OFF and t...

Page 751: ...ment data such as Box on the HDD can be damaged 1 Enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CHECK duration several minutes to several dozen minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON the main power Use SST to perform refor...

Page 752: ... main power 3 If the error still remains it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Unidentified partition error E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 FF03 00 Title Hard disk error Remedy 1 Execute HDD CHECK duration several dozen minutes with CHK TYPE 0 and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the measures above do not solve the ...

Page 753: ...or software bug 1 Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI and then turn OFF and then ON the main power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem it can be caused by HDD failure therefore replace the HDD and reinstall the system Description Unidentified partition error E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 FF21 00 Title H...

Page 754: ...ECK duration several minutes to several dozen minutes and then turn OFF and then ON the power 2 If the measures above do not solve the problem enter the corresponding CHK TYPE in the partition to execute HDD CLEAR and then turn OFF and then ON the main power Use SST to perform reformat reinstallation in the case of the following BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND 3 If the error still remains it can be ...

Page 755: ...or encryption processing error Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the power Description Error in the encryption processing part E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E610 0202 00 Title Failure of the HDD encryption key hardware configuration error initialization error encryption key error encryption processing error Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the power Description Error in the encryption processi...

Page 756: ...ription Error in access of the modem IC port IC E674 0010 00 Title FAX error Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB Description FAX error E674 0011 00 Title FAX error Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB Description FAX error E674 0030 00 Title FAX error Remedy Download the system software for 2 line FAX Description Checksum error E674 0100 00 Title FAX error Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the powe...

Page 757: ...ommunication between the host machine and the Finisher was lost E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E711 0040 05 Title IPC communication error serial error Remedy 1 Check the cable connection Check the connection between DCON side J462 and Finisher Lattice side J9043 Finisher Cable 2 Replace the DC Controller PCB Description Communication between the host machine and the Finisher was lost...

Page 758: ...d Remedy Check the cable and then go through the following to clear the error Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Description The Card Reader which was connected before turning OFF the power is not connected at power on E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E719 0012 00 Title IPC error at Card Reader operation Remedy Check the cable and then go through the following to clear the error Se...

Page 759: ... 3 Replace the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB Description Negotiation failure E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E732 0001 00 Title Reader communication error Remedy 1 Check the connection of the Connector with the Reader 2 Check the power of the Reader check if the initialization operation is executed at startup 3 Replace the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Control...

Page 760: ...connector connection error open circuit DC Controller PCB J441 J442 Main Controller PCB 2 J21 J22 Main Controller PCB 2 J2 Main Controller PCB 1 J1019 2 Replace the DC Controller PCB Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB1 Description An image request signal is not sent from the Main Controller PCB 2 to the DC Controller PCB Or a vertical synchronization signal a signal to synchronize the write...

Page 761: ...PCB1 model are not matched E746 0003 00 Title Different Image Analysis PCB model Remedy 1 Check the connection of the Image Analysis PCB 2 Replace the Image Analysis PCB Description Different Image Analysis PCB model E746 0021 00 Title Image Analysis PCB self check error detection Remedy 1 Check the connection of the Image Analysis PCB 2 Replace the Image Analysis PCB Description Image Analysis PC...

Page 762: ...ever recovery by restart is possible Turn OFF and then ON the power Description Error occurs but auto recovery of system is possible TPM E748 2000 00 Title Main Controller PCB access error Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 2 Description Main Controller PCB Chip access error E748 2001 00 Title Main Controller PCB access error Remedy 1 Remove and then reinstall the DDR2 SDRAM M0 M1 P 2 Replac...

Page 763: ...Item Description E804 0000 05 Title Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 2 error Remedy 1 Check the connection of the Connector 2 Replace the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 FM14 Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 FM15 Description The Fan stop signal is detected for 5 seconds or longer and retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 FM14 Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 FM15 is turned ON The error...

Page 764: ...rt in the IH Power Supply E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E808 0008 05 Title Fixing Power Supply error Remedy 1 Check the connection between the Main Driver PCB PCB2 and the Fixing Power Supply PCB PCB10 2 Check the connection between the Fixing Power Supply PCB PCB10 and the Heater Unit 3 Replace the Fixing Roller and Heater Unit 4 Replace the Fixing Power Supply PCB PCB10 5 Replace ...

Page 765: ...le POD Deck Air Assist Fan error Remedy 1 Check connector disconnection improper connection Disconnect and then connect the connector Target connector Deck Lite Controller J30 2 Replace the Motor Cooling Fan FM4 3 Replace the Deck Lite Controller PCB Description POD Deck Lite When the Pickup Motor Cooling Fan is not locked E Code Detail Code Location Item Description E905 0003 05 Title POD Deck Ai...

Page 766: ...m PICKUP NG Pickup error POWER ON Power ON DOOR OP Door open SEQ NG Sequence jam DELAY ESC Delay jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray OTH JAM Other jams STNRY ESC Stationary jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray STP Staple SDL STP Saddle stitch staple INIT ROT Residual at initial rotation UP DEVICE Upper stream device jam OTHER Others ERROR Error RETRY ERR Retry error STOP Press...

Page 767: ...or PS36 00 0114 DELAY Reverse Vertical Path Sensor PS65 00 0115 DELAY Duplex Left Sensor PS66 00 0202 STNRY Right Deck Pull Out Sensor PS32 00 0203 STNRY Vertical Path Sensor 1 PS24 00 0204 STNRY Writing Gudging Sensor PS28 00 0205 STNRY Registration Sensor PS29 00 0207 STNRY Left Deck Pull Out Sensor PS33 00 0208 STNRY Duplex Merging Sesor PS67 00 0209 STNRY Duplex Outlet Sesor PS64 00 020B STNRY...

Page 768: ...or PS66 00 0B01 DOOR OP Front Door Open Detection Switch DOOR OP 00 0B02 DOOR OP Multi purpose Tray Coverr Sensor DOOR OP 00 0B03 DOOR OP Vertical Path Cover Open Close Sensor DOOR OP 00 0CA1 OTHER FeedSts time out jam OTHER 00 0CA2 OTHER RefeedStart time out jam OTHER 00 0CA3 OTHER ImageSet time out jam OTHER 00 0CA4 OTHER PageComplete time out jam OTHER 00 0CA5 OTHER Fixing temperature control t...

Page 769: ...IMING NG 01 0073 HP NG Disengaging HP sensor 1 SR15 01 0074 HP NG Disengaging HP sensor 2 SR16 01 0075 HP NG Pickup roller unit lifter HP sensor SR12 01 0090 ADF OP DADF open closed sensor 1 2 ADF OP 01 0091 ADF OP DADF open closed sensor 1 2 ADF OP 01 0092 COVER OP Cover open closed sensor SR10 01 0093 COVER OP Cover open closed sensor SR10 01 0094 POWER ON All feed sensor 3 POWER ON 01 0095 PICK...

Page 770: ...ng NG Timing NG 01 0073 Hp NG Disengaging HP sensor 1 SR15 01 0074 Hp NG Disengaging HP sensor 2 SR16 01 0075 Hp NG Pickup roller unit lifter HP sensor SR12 01 0090 ADF OP DADF open closed sensor 1 2 SR1 3 Reader 01 0091 ADF OP DADF open closed sensor 1 2 SR1 3 Reader 01 0092 COVER OP Cover open closed sensor SR10 01 0093 COVER OP Cover open closed sensor SR10 01 0094 Power ON All feed type sensor...

Page 771: ...eck feed sensor PS1 00 0118 DELAY Deck pickup sensor PS6 00 0218 STNRY Deck pickup sensor PS6 00 0A18 POWER ON Deck pickup sensor PS6 F 7 4 T 7 18 Paper Deck Unit A1 PS1 PS6 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Description Sensor ID 00 0117 DELAY Deck feed sensor PS1 00 0118 DELAY Deck pickup sensor PS6 00 0218 STNRY Deck pickup sensor PS6 00 0A18 POWER ON Deck pickup sensor PS6 F 7 5 T 7 19 ...

Page 772: ...t Sensor Delay jam S12 02 10B3 DELAY Reverse Sensor Delay jam S10 02 10B4 DELAY Reverse Timing Sensor Delay jam S11 02 11C1 STNRY Paper Registration Sensor Stationary jam S4 02 11C2 STNRY Reverse Inlet Sensor Stationary jam S12 02 11C3 STNRY Reverse Sensor Stationary jam S10 02 11C4 STNRY Reverse Timing Sensor Stationary jam S11 02 13D7 POWER ON Power ON jam POWER ON 02 14D8 COVER OP Door Open jam...

Page 773: ...Y Delivery 1 Sensor Delay jam S25 02 10BA DELAY Delivery 2 Sensor Delay jam S15 02 10BB DELAY 3 fold Tray Empty Sensor Delay jam S18 02 11C1 STNRY Paper Registration Sensor Stationary jam S4 02 11C2 STNRY Reverse Inlet Sensor Stationary jam S12 02 11C3 STNRY Reverse Sensor Stationary jam S10 02 11C4 STNRY Reverse Timing Sensor Stationary jam S11 02 11C5 STNRY Slowdown Timing Sensor Stationary jam ...

Page 774: ... External 2 hole Puncher A1 PI63 LED5 PTR5 F 7 8 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Description Sensor ID 02 1F44 PUNCH Punch home jam PI63 02 1F45 POWER ON Punch Residual jam LED5 PTR5 02 1012 DELAY Punch Path Sensor Feed Delay jam LED5 PTR5 02 1122 STNRY Punch Path Sensor Feed Stationary jam LED5 PTR5 T 7 22 ...

Page 775: ...dle Inlet Sensor Feed Delay jam PI22 02 1121 STNRY Inlet Path Sensor Feed Stationary jam PI103 02 1123 STNRY Escape Path Sensor Feed Stationary jam PI118 02 1124 STNRY Delivery Path Sensor Feed Stationary jam PI104 02 112F OTHER Error Avoidance jam OTHER 02 11A1 STNRY Saddle Feed Path Sensor Feed Stationary jam PI18 PI19 PI20 02 11A2 STNRY Saddle Delivery Sensor Feed Stationary jam PI11 PI17 02 11...

Page 776: ...ight Sensor PS6 Measures 1 Turn OFF ON the power When it is recovered the measure is completed If it is not recovered execute the following measures 2 Check if the Deck Lifter rises If not execute the following measures If an alarm occurs although it rises execute step 5 and later steps 3 Check the connection between the Right Deck Lifter Motor M4 and the Feed Driver PCB PCB3 Motor side J2069 PCB ...

Page 777: ... between the Cassette 4 Lifter Motor M21 and the Feed Driver PCB PCB3 Motor side J2074 PCB side J225 4 Replace the Cassette 4 5 Check the connection between the Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor PS18 and the Feed Driver PCB PCB3 Sensor side J2091 J3636 relay PCB side J224 6 Check the operation of the Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor PS18 and replace it if necessary 7 Replace the Feed Driver PCB PCB3 Al...

Page 778: ...olenoid SL7 cannot be detected Measures 1 Check the connection of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid SL7 Solenoid side J2052 Pickup Unit side J3634 Feed Driver PCB side J221 2 Replace the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid SL7 3 Replace the Feed Driver PCB PCB3 Alarm Code Title A movement B cause C measures 04 0071 Error in Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid connection Movement Jam occurred when picking up from the Cas...

Page 779: ... between J126 and J412 7 Replace the DCON PCB PCB1 Alarm Code Title A movement B cause C measures 09 0009 Drum HP signal absence alarm Movement Only when the 2D shading is ON the accuracy of shading is degraded and an image error occurs Uneven density may occur Cause The Drum HP cycle is longer than the specified cycle Measures 1 Install the Drum HP Sensor PS61 and check the connector 2 Check the ...

Page 780: ... cable 9 Replace the parts Primary Charging Assembly Laser Scanner Unit Potential Sensor Primary Charging High Voltage PCB PCB11 Drum Motor M1 Main Driver PCB PCB2 DC Controller PCB PCB1 Alarm Code Title A movement B cause C measures 33 0001 Delivery Assembly Decurler Fan alarm Movement No change Cause Connector disconnection of the Paper Cooling Fan FM5 Failure of the Paper Cooling Fan FM5 Measur...

Page 781: ...ar Cause Light intensity is insufficient when adjusting output of the Lead Sensor 1 PCB4 Measures Clean the Lead Sensor 1 PCB4 periodical maintenance 50 0009 Insufficient light intensity in Delivery Sensor Movement Nothing in particular Cause Light intensity is insufficient when adjusting output of the Delivery Sensor PCB5 Measures Clean the Delivery Sensor PCB5 periodical maintenance 50 0010 Alar...

Page 782: ...made PCL PCL initialization error 79 0002 Canon made PCL PCL processing error 79 0003 Canon made PCL Overflow of work memory for translator 79 0004 Canon made PCL Download overflow 80 0001 BDL Admin error 80 0003 BDL Data Area error 80 0004 BDL Wrapper error 80 0007 BDL Resource error Alarm Code Title A movement B cause C measures 80 0008 BDL Attribute error 80 0009 BDL VolatileResource error 80 0...

Page 783: ...8 8 Service Mode Service Mode Overview COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD ...

Page 784: ...his is a MEAP application with functions of network communication to Content Delivery System V1 0 hereinafter CDS and installation of firmware MEAP applications or system options Refer to Updater V1 0 service manual If MODELIST or MODELIST CLASSIC or Updater is pressed the screen will switch to initial screen for each mode F 8 1 Service mode item explanations Explanatory texts for the initial wind...

Page 785: ... depend on which electrical parts intended and its device classification For instance if the host machine uses paper pass detection sensor then press the button on the COPIER and P Sensor position Device classification Electrical parts classification 2 Then the selected electrical parts classification s mark name port number and 0 1 content will appear 3 If the i button is pressed the screen displ...

Page 786: ... SW UI User Interface display related Image related fixing IMG FIX Fixing related Image related transfer IMG TR Transfer related Image related developing IMG DEV Developer related Image related laser latent image IMG LSR Laser latent image related Image related reader ADF IMG RDR Reader ADF image related Image related controller other general items IMG MCON MN CON image related and image related i...

Page 787: ...r and Service engineer COPIER OPTION FNC SW SM PSWD Level2 Password for service engineer for transition to service mode Setting range To reinforce the security change the password from a default eight digit numeral default 11111111 After the above setting to enter Service Mode enter password screen will appear 1 Additional Functions System Settings System Manager Settings enter System Manager ID e...

Page 788: ...eration in User Mode The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content SCMNT in HDD Service Mode Content SCMNT can be installed and upgraded on SST Settings Registration Prefernces Display Settings Language Keyboard Switch Settings Registration Language Keybord Switch Set Keyboard Layout English USA Layout Cancel OK 1 1 English Japanese French German Italian Dutch Langua...

Page 789: ...e written in the service label When you replaced the DC controller PCB or executed the RAM clear function adjustment values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default Therefore when you made adjustments and changed values of the Service Mode in the field be sure to write down the changed values in the service label When there is no relevant field in the service label write down the values in a blank f...

Page 790: ...splay adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SDL STCH Dis of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver Lv 1 Details To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 DECK Display of POD Deck ROM version Lv 1 Details To display the ROM version of ROM version Use case ...

Page 791: ...Estonian language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION LANG FI Display of Finnish language file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG HU Display ...

Page 792: ...d N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 MEAP Display of MEAP contents version Lv 1 Details To display the version of MEAP contents in HDD Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION OCR CN Display of Chinese OCR simplified Lv 1 Details To display the version of Chinese OCR simplified is dis...

Page 793: ...e is displayed when no file is found Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION TIMESTMP Display of timestamp version Lv 1 Details To display the version of Time Stamp file is displayed when no file is found Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range...

Page 794: ...of Finnish media information Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION MEDIA HU Dis of Hungarian media information ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Hungarian media information Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA...

Page 795: ...Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SYSTEM Dis of Linux kernel tool driver file ver Lv 1 Details To display the version of Linux kernel tool driver file Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 ROOT Display of ROOT version Lv 1 Details To display the ROOT version...

Page 796: ...01 to 99 99 INTRO AP Dis of useful func introduce appli ver Lv 1 Details To display the version of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION TSP JLK Dis of PCAM Option Board version Lv 1 Details To display the version of the PCAM Option Board Use case When upgr...

Page 797: ...COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY NL Dis of COPY appli Dutch file version Lv 2 Details To display the Dutch language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 9...

Page 798: ... COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SEND FR Dis of SEND appli French file version Lv 1 Details To display the French language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 t...

Page 799: ...ND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SEND NO Dis of SEND appli Norwegian file version Lv 2 Details To display the Norwegian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 0...

Page 800: ...rate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO IT Dis useful func intro Italian file ver Lv 1 Details To display the version of Italian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO DE Dis of useful func intro German ...

Page 801: ...eful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO PL Dis of useful func intro Polish file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Polish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Dis...

Page 802: ...splay the version of Italian language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN DE Dis of custom menu German file version Lv 1 Details To display the version of German language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate met...

Page 803: ...ustom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN PT Dis of custom menu Portuguese file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file for custom menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 0...

Page 804: ...lity application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ACSBT ES Dis of accessibility Spanish file ver Lv 1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to ...

Page 805: ...for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ACSBT RU Dis of accessibility Russian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Russian language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set ra...

Page 806: ...simplified Chinese language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS TW Display of ERS Chinese file ver trad Lv 2 Details To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display o...

Page 807: ...When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS BU Display of ERS Bulgarian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 ERS CR Display of ERS Croatian...

Page 808: ...e case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement memo UAC User Access Control COPIER DISPLAY VERSION NLS EL Display of UAC Greek file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Greek language file for UAC application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 ...

Page 809: ... upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement memo UAC User Access Control COPIER DISPLAY VERSION NLS RM Display of UAC Romanian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file for UAC application Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99...

Page 810: ...language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BOX CS Display of BOX appli Czech file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display ad...

Page 811: ...e 00 01 to 99 99 BOX ID Display of BOX appli Indonesian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BOX BU Dis of BOX appli Bulgarian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language f...

Page 812: ...et range 0 to 1 0 Not connected 1 Connected SORTER Connect state of Finisher related option Lv 1 Details To display the connecting state of Finisher related options Use case When checking the connection of Finisher related options Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range Left column connecting state of Finisher related options 1 to 5 1 Without Saddle 2 With Saddle without Fold...

Page 813: ...hine Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not installed 1 Installed COPIER DISPLAY ACC STS SEND Display of SEND support PCB existence Lv 1 Details To display whether there is PCB to support SEND function SEND function can be used only when the PCB is mounted Use case When checking the connection between the machine and the PCB that supports SEND function Adj set o...

Page 814: ...e case When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Roller Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 0 to 999 Unit Deg C FIX UE Dis of Fixing Roller edge temperature Lv 1 Details To display the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 is located in the rear nip inlet side of Fixing Roller Use case When checki...

Page 815: ... Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV PRI PRIMARY PRI GRID Dis of Primary Charging Ass y grid bias Lv 1 Details To display the grid bias voltage that is applied to the Primacy Charging Assembly at the latest The result set in COPIER ADJUST HV PRI PRI GRID is reflected Use case When checking ON OFF of potential control Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 500 to 900 Unit 1...

Page 816: ...se case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB At scanned image failure Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 0 to FFFF Appropriate target value 512 to 2047 TARGET R Shading target value R Lv 2 Details To display the shading target value of Red Continuous display of 0 minimum or FFFF maximum is considered a failure of the Reader Controller PCB Use case When replacing the ...

Page 817: ...e Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 0 to 164 Appropriate target value 20 to 163 Supplement memo LED cannot be replaced individually Replace the Scanner Unit COPIER DISPLAY CCD LAMP CL Scan Lamp intensity adj VL color frt Lv 2 Details To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit paper front in color scanning mode Use case When image failure occurs ...

Page 818: ... Color Image Reader Unit C1 only To display the CMOS Sensor B W gain level adjustment value 1 of Scanner Unit paper back Use case When image failure occurs at back side scanning in B W mode Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 0 to 48 Appropriate target value 1 to 47 COPIER DISPLAY CCD GAIN2BW2 Img Sensor gain level adj VL2 B W Back Lv 2 Details This service mode can be us...

Page 819: ...he Scanner Unit Reader Controller PCB Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB At scanned image failure Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 0 to 48 Appropriate target value 1 to 47 COPIER DISPLAY CCD GAIN2 EG Gain level of Img Sensor even bit G bck Lv 2 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit C1 only To display the ...

Page 820: ...y only Unit V VDM Dis of dark area measured potential VL Lv 1 Details To display the dark area measured potential value Adj set operate method N A Display only Unit V BIAS C Dis of dev bias potential control result Lv 2 Details To display the developing bias potential control result Adj set operate method N A Display only Unit V LPOWER C Output laser intnsty potntl ctrl result Lv 2 Details To disp...

Page 821: ...iginal on Copyboard Glass 2 Close the Copyboard Cover DADF 3 Select the item Caution Unless the Copyboard Cover DADF is closed this is not displayed correctly Display adj set range A B L configuration size T 8 10 MISC COPIER DISPLAY MISC LPOWER Display of laser light intensity Lv 2 Details To display the laser power setting value during image formation in real time Check that laser power is differ...

Page 822: ...has been registered execute COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE 2D READ Use case When uneven image occurs Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY 2D SHADE DRM LOT COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE 2D READ COPIER OPTION IMG LSR 2D SHADE DRM LOT Display of Drum Lot number Lv 2 Details To display the Photosensitive Drum Lot numbe...

Page 823: ...P002 15 Not used 14 Not used 13 Not used 12 Not used 11 Not used 10 Not used 9 Not used 8 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 2 Error FM14 FM15 1 Error 7 For R D use 6 For R D use 5 For R D use 4 For R D use 3 For R D use 2 For R D use 1 For R D use 0 For R D use Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P003 15 Primary Charging Shutter Sensor PS94 1 HP front 14 Not used 13 For R D use 12 For R D use 11 For R D use ...

Page 824: ...tch SW2 0 Close 1 Open 5 Fixing Feed Lever 1 Fixing Feed Unit presence 4 Fixing Power Supply PCB 12V OFF PCB10 1 12V to Fixing Power Supply PCB is OFF or safety circuit operation 3 Outer Delivery Sensor PS36 1 Paper presence 2 Not used 1 Fixing Motor Error M3 1 Stop 0 Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan Error FM7 1 Stop Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P005 15 Roller Bias OFF 0 OFF 1 ON 14 Pre transfer...

Page 825: ... used 2 Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor PS53 0 HP or middle size 1 or small size 1 1 Not used 0 Pre transfer Charging Shutter Sensor PS95 1 HP front Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P008 15 Fixing Power Supply Detection 1 iRA6075 Series 14 Not used 13 Not used 12 Fixing Power Supply PCB 12V Detection PCB10 0 Fixing Power Supply PCB 12V ON 11 Fixing Power Supply PCB Power Supply ID1 PCB10 Detect...

Page 826: ...tion 12 Toner Exchange Cover Sensor PS54 0 Cover Open or Connector disconnection 11 Not used 10 Toner Supply Motor Error M10 1 Overcurrent Error logical change 9 Not used 8 Toner Feed Motor Error M28 1 Overcurrent Error logical change 7 Buffer Toner Sensor TS3 1 Toner presence 6 Buffer Toner Sensor Connection TS3 0 Connect 5 Toner Excess Supply Sensor TS2 1 Toner presence 4 Toner Excess Supply Sen...

Page 827: ...N M2 1 ON 2 Developing Motor_CCW M2 0 CW 1 Not used 0 Not used Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P015 15 Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1 2 PS19 1 Paper presence 14 Right Deck Pickup Solenoid Connection SL6 0 Connect 1 Not connect or Driving 13 Right Deck Paper Height Sensor PS6 0 Lifter Up 12 Vertical Path Sensor 2 PS25 1 Paper presence 11 Vertical Path Sensor 3 PS26 1 Paper presence 10 Right Deck Upper ...

Page 828: ...4 switches 0 ON Condition that the switch is pressed 1 OFF As for the combination refer to the Pickup Feed System in Service Manual 6 Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch SW9 5 Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch SW9 4 Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch SW9 3 Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch SW7 Detect paper size by combination of 4 switches 0 ON Condition that the switch is ...

Page 829: ... combination refer to the Pickup Feed System in Service Manual Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P020 15 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 PS49 Detect paper level by combination of the Paper Level Sensor 1 2 0 OFF 1 ON Condition that the flag blocks the sensor As for the combination refer to the Pickup Feed System in Service Manual 14 Left Deck Lifter Motor Error M5 1 Error 13 Left Deck Upper Limit Sen...

Page 830: ...ot used 1 Not used 0 Not used Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P023 15 For R D use 14 For R D use 13 For R D use 12 For R D use 11 Registration Sensor PS29 1 Paper presence 10 Duplex Outlet Sensor PS64 1 Paper presence 9 Not used 8 Left Deck Merging Solenoid Connection SL11 0 Connect 1 Not connect or Driving 7 Not used 6 Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid Connection SL5 0 Connect 1 Not connect or Drivi...

Page 831: ...P027 15 Transfer High Voltage PCB Connection PCB13 0 Connect 14 Not used 13 Transfer High Voltage PCB 24V Check PCB13 1 Error 12 Not used 11 Not used 10 Not used 9 Not used 8 Not used 7 Duplex Merging Sensor PS67 1 Paper presence 6 Registration Motor Duplex Motor Cooling Fan FM42 1 Stop 5 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor PS65 1 Paper presence 4 Not used 3 Paper Cooling Fan Error FM5 1 Stop 2 Not used ...

Page 832: ...ot used 9 Not used 8 Not used 7 Not used 6 Not used 5 Not used 4 Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan Half Speed FM8 1 Half Speed 3 Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan Full Speed FM8 1 Full Speed priority 2 Not used 1 Not used 0 Not used T 8 14 Host Machine_Main Controller DC CON P001 to P005 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P001 0 7 For R D use 8 Data Analyzer Board power state 0 Abnormal 1 Normal 9 11 For R D u...

Page 833: ...odel Identification 1 X system or Copyboard 0 S system 7 Original Size Sensor 1 CF1 0 Original presence P003 0 Original Size Sensor 2 CF2 0 Original presence 1 DADF Sensor 1 SR1 1 Close 0 Open 2 DADF Sensor 2 SR3 1 Close 0 Open 3 Scanner Unit Heat Exhaust Fan Lock Signal FM1 1 Failure 4 Scanner Unit Cooling Fan Lock Signal FM2 1 Failure 5 LED Select 1 DIPSW2 3 1 1 Rank A 1 0 Rank B 0 1 Rank C 6 LE...

Page 834: ...per presence 6 Original Size Sensor 2 SR18 1 Paper presence 7 Original Size Sensor 1 SR17 1 Paper presence P004 0 Delivery Sensor PCB5 0 Paper presence 1 Read Sensor 2 SR5 1 Paper presence 2 Read Sensor 1 PCB4 0 Paper presence 3 Registration Sensor PCB3 0 Paper presence 4 ITOP Not used 5 Glass Shift HP Sensor SR11 0 HP 6 Feed Sensor 0 Paper presence 7 Post separation Sensor 3 PCB2 0 Paper presence...

Page 835: ... used 12 not used 11 not used 10 not used 9 not used 8 not used 7 not used 6 not used 5 not used 4 not used 3 not used 2 not used 1 not used 0 not used Addres bit Description Symbol Remarks P050 15 for R D 14 not used 13 for R D 12 for R D 11 deck open sensor PS9 0 connected 1 unconnected 10 deck set sensor PS5 0 paper present 1 paper absent 9 deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW2 0 ON 1 OF...

Page 836: ... used 12 not used 11 not used 10 not used 9 not used 8 not used 7 not used 6 not used 5 not used 4 not used 3 not used 2 not used 1 not used 0 not used Addres bit Description Symbol Remarks P050 15 for R D 14 not used 13 for R D 12 for R D 11 deck open sensor PS9 0 connected 1 unconnected 10 deck set sensor PS5 0 paper present 1 paper absent 9 deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW2 0 ON 1 OF...

Page 837: ...Identification signal2 PF3098 1 H 2 L PF4154 1 L 2 L 3 PCB Identification signal1 2 1 0 P050 7 Through pass IN_motor driver current Analog input 6 Paper feed motor driver current Analog input 5 4 3 2 1 0 P051 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P052 7 Folding unit sensor H No unit 6 By Borah motor driver_standby signal H Movement is possible L stop 5 Reverse solenoid_PWM SL1 PWM 4 3 2 ...

Page 838: ...P061 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P047 7 Reserve unit motor B M3 H active 6 Reserve unit motor A M3 H active 5 Reserve unit motorB M3 H active 4 Reserve unit motorA M3 H active 3 Straight path feed motor IN B M9 H active 2 Straight path feed motor IN A M9 H active 1 Straight path feed motor IN B M9 H active 0 Straight path feed motor IN A M9 H active P048 7 DAconverter Cssignal 6 C fold flapper...

Page 839: ...NABL M8 H output L OFF P056 7 Fold position adjustment motor B M10 H active 6 Fold position adjustment motor A M10 H active 5 Fold position adjustment motor B M10 H active 4 Fold position adjustment motor A M10 H active 3 Reverse sensor S10 H paper on 2 C fold stopper sensor S17 H home 1 C fold tray motor sensor S19 H home 0 C fold tray empty sensor S18 L paper on Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P...

Page 840: ...6 sensor PWM signal 0 ON 1 OFF 5 horizontal registration motor electric current setting M62 0 drive electric current 1 maintenance electric current 4 not used 3 not used 2 not used 1 not used 0 not used Addres bit Description Symbol Remarks P045 7 SW602 on the punch controller PCB 0 ON 1 OFF 6 SW603 on the punch controller PCB 0 ON 1 OFF 5 for R D 4 not used 3 LED602 on the punch controller PCB 0 ...

Page 841: ...r clock signal M102 4 tray 2 shift motor FG signal M108 3 tray 1 shift motor FG signal M107 2 feed motor clock signal M101 1 punch feed motor clock signal M63 0 punch paper trailing edge detection 0 not detected 1 detected P005 7 not used 6 not used 5 tray motor clock signal 4 saddle serial signal 3 saddle serial signal 2 PWM output for solenoid 1 for R D 0 for R D Addres bit Description Symbol Re...

Page 842: ... CW CCW signal M108 0 CW 1 CCW 5 feed roller separation solenoid SL101 0 OFF 1 ON 4 punch feed motor standby M63 0 standby 1 drive 3 punch feed motor electric current change I0 M63 2 punch feed motor electric current change I1 M63 1 feed motor electric current change I0 M101 0 feed motor electric current change I1 M101 Addres bit Description Symbol Remarks P014 7 tray 1 shift motor enable signal M...

Page 843: ... 4 staple safety switch signal MS104 0 OFF 1 ON 3 not used 2 not used 1 not used 0 Stapler shift motor lock signal M105 P020 7 not used 6 not used 5 not used 4 not used 3 escape feed motor phase B signal M112 2 escape feed motor phase A signal M112 1 escape feed motor phase B signal M112 0 escape feed motor phase A signal M112 Addres bit Description Symbol Remarks P021 7 puncher unit connection de...

Page 844: ...ate HP sensor PI14 0 besides HP 1 HP Addres bit Description Symbol Remarks P031 7 guide motor phase B signal M3 6 guide motor phase A signal M3 5 alignment motor B signal M5 4 alignment motor A signal M5 3 not used 2 paper positioning plate motor phase B signal M4 1 paper positioning plate motor phase A signal M4 0 feed motor CW CCW signal M1 0 CCW 1 CW P032 7 saddle rear staple electric current d...

Page 845: ...6 0 ON 1 OFF 6 saddle software IPC communication 5 saddle software IPC communication 4 stitcher motor front CW signal M7 0 ON 1 OFF 3 stitcher motor front CCW signal M7 0 ON 1 OFF 2 staple sensor front SW6 0 needle absent 1 needle present 1 not used 0 not used P039 7 SW504 8 on the saddle controller PCB 0 ON 1 OFF 6 SW504 7 on the saddle controller PCB 0 ON 1 OFF 5 SW504 6 on the saddle controller...

Page 846: ...area is copied set the larger value As the value is incremented by 1 the image position moves to the trailing edge side by 0 1mm Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 1 to 100 Unit 0 1 mm Default...

Page 847: ...de COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STRD POS ADJ X MG Adj img ratio in book mod vert scan frt Lv 1 Details To make a fine adjustment of image magnification in vertical scanning direction at copyboard reading When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label As the value is incremented by 1 the image magnification changes by 0 01 Enlarge Reduce Use case When replaci...

Page 848: ...then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display adj set range 7500 to 9999 Default value 9418 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT X W PLT Y COPIER ADJUST CCD SH TRGT Shading target value B W Copyboard Lv 1 Details To set the B W shading target value in copyboard reading mode Use case When...

Page 849: ...ode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M1 MTF value 1 setting horz scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display ...

Page 850: ...K key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 85 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 S2 MTF value 2 setting vert scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate me...

Page 851: ...UST CCD 100DF2RG Img Sensr RG color displace crrct VL bck Lv 1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit C1 only To correct the color displacement R and G lines in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit paper back When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use case When replacing the Reader ...

Page 852: ...t range 0 to 2550 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST CCD CCD CHNG Scanner Unit ppr frt rplce flag setting Lv 1 Details To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at the replacement of Scanner Unit paper front When replacing the Scanner Unit paper front enter 1 When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use case When replacing the ...

Page 853: ...K key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 85 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M7 MTF value 7 setting horz scan Back Lv 1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit C1 only Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader ...

Page 854: ...K key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 85 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S6 MTF value 6 setting vert scan Back Lv 1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit C1 only Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader ...

Page 855: ...1 to 2550 Default value 2000 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH R10 DFCH B2 DFCH B10 DFCH G2 DFCH G10 COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF LNR COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH B10 Complex chart No 10 data B Back side Lv 1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit C1 only To derive the front back side linearity set the Blue data for paper back of No 10 image in DADF c...

Page 856: ...ss OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 20 to 85 Default value 50 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD MTF CLC COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 S12 MTF value 12 setting vert scan Front Lv 1 Details Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation Enter the value of service label on the Reader Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set oper...

Page 857: ...tting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 2550 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH K2 Complex chart No 2 data B W Back Lv 1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit C1 only To derive the front back side linearity set the B W data for paper back of No 2 image in DADF complex chart Enter the valu...

Page 858: ... DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data When replacing the Scanner Unit paper back Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 700 to 1400 Default value 1156 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD D...

Page 859: ...ing the rotation speed of the Polygon Mirror modulating clock Convert the magnification measurement line length of PG for image position adjustment into a percentage and enter the amount of change in percentage As the value is incremented by 1 the image magnification changes by 0 01 Enlarge Reduce Use case When checking image at initial installation At check operation when replacing the Laser Scan...

Page 860: ...NS ADJ Density correction of copy image Lv 1 Details To correct the density of copy image by changing the F value table When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Blurring is alleviated when the value is increased and fogging is alleviated when the value is decreased Use case When fogging or blurring at high density area occurs with a copy image Adj set...

Page 861: ... Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1000 Unit 1 pixel Appropriate target value 118 Default value 118 BLANK R Adjustment of right edge margin Lv 1 Details To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper As the value is incremented by 1 the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel 0 0212 mm Use case When reducing the m...

Page 862: ...ss OK key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 30 to 30 Unit 1 V Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST V CONT VD OFST Dark area tgt potential ofst VL entry Lv 1 Details To set the offset auto adjustment value of dark area target potential VL manually As the value is incremented by 1 the offset value changes by 1V Increase Decrease Use case When replacing the DC Controller PC...

Page 863: ...ntial control is turned OFF the specified primary charging current is output Use case When outputting image while potential control is OFF When changing the primary charging current and then checking the high voltage output Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 0 to 1600 Un...

Page 864: ...odes Transfer Roller target current offset value 10 to 10 Unit 5 micro A Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR OFS2 to 6 COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR OFS2 Adj transfer tgt current offset Heavy 1 Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller for heavy paper 1 Set the environment temperature and humidity feed mode and Transfer Roller target curr...

Page 865: ... Transfer Roller target current offset value 10 to 10 Unit 5 micro A Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR OFS1 2 4 to 6 COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR OFS4 Adj transfer tgt current offset Thin Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller for thin paper Set the environment temperature and humidity feed mode and Transfer Roller target current of...

Page 866: ... special paper 2 set in TR SP2 the specified offset value is added to the Transfer Roller target current Use case When transfer failure occurs Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range Environment 0 to 4 0 No specification 1 Environment 1and 2 2 Environment 3 to 5 3 Environment 6 and 7 4 All environments Feed mode 0 to 7 0 No specification 1 Cassett...

Page 867: ...fset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing 0 to 20 Unit 5 micro A 1 mm Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR L OF1 to 4 6 TR L SP1 TR L OF6 Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst Spcl 2 Lv 2 Details To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing for special paper 2 When the paper type is the one speci...

Page 868: ...re transfer charging current offset value 10 to 10 Unit 10 micro A Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR P TR OF1 3 to 6 COPIER ADJUST HV TR P TR OF3 Adj of pre trn charge crrnt ofst Heavy2 Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre transfer charging current for heavy paper 2 Set the environment temperature and humidity feed mode and pre transfer charging current offset ...

Page 869: ...ue 10 to 10 Unit 10 micro A Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR P TR OF1 to 3 5 to 6 COPIER ADJUST HV TR P TR OF5 Adj pre trn charge crrnt ofst Special 1 Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset value of the pre transfer charging current for special paper 1 Set the environment temperature and humidity feed mode and pre transfer charging current offset value in the order from left Whe...

Page 870: ...TR SP2 Set trns tgt crrnt adj special paper 2 Lv 2 Details To set the paper type of special paper 2 which the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller is adjusted When the actual usage status matches to the paper type set in this item and the environment and feed mode set in TR OFS6 the offset value is added to the Transfer Roller target current Use case When transfer failure occu...

Page 871: ...6 Recycled paper 7 Color paper 8 Punched paper 9 Tab paper 10 Letterhead Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR P TR OF6 T 8 35 FEED ADJ COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST Adj of registration start timing Plain Lv 1 Details To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor in the case of plain paper As the value is incremented by 1 the margin on the leading edge of paper is incre...

Page 872: ...e start position cannot be adjusted in service mode execute mechanical adjustment Display adj set range 20 to 20 Unit 0 1 mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C4 Cassette 4 write start pstn in horz scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 4 As the value is incremented by 1 the margin on the left ed...

Page 873: ...turn ON the Registration Motor when feeding plain paper from the Multi purpose Tray As the value is incremented by 1 the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0 1 mm Top margin becomes smaller An image moves upward Top margin becomes larger An image moves downward Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 50 to ...

Page 874: ...rch amount changes by 0 5 mm Increase Decrease Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 5 mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ LP MULT1 MP Tray pre rgst arch amount Plain Lv 1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain paper from the Multi purpose Tray As the value is inc...

Page 875: ...00 to 200 Unit 0 1 mm sec Default value 0 T 8 36 CST ADJ COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4R Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width Lv 1 Details To adjust the width of A4R paper in the Multi purpose Tray When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label When replacing the Multi purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value execute COPIER FUNCTION CST A4R ...

Page 876: ...witch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 4 to 4 Default value 0 K ADJ Set criteria for black text front side Lv 1 Details To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing As the value is increased the text tends to be detected as black Use case When preferring the text to ...

Page 877: ... is increased decreased As a result the number of images to be printed until the Waste Toner Container becomes full varies According to the usage of the user set the number of images calculation with A4 and 5 image duty until the full toner message is displayed Set 2 if the setting is dark but set 1 according to circumstances Set 2 if the setting is light but set 1 according to circumstances Use c...

Page 878: ... reading with 1 path Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 2 to 2 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST MISC TBSIS WB Setting of blank band ejection time Lv 2 Details To set the blank band ejection time As the value is incremented by 1 the ejection time changes by 0 1 second Increase Decre...

Page 879: ...e the value when taking a measure for drum ghost Decrease the value when potential is not applied well Use case When drum ghost is significant drum pitch is not correct When potential is not applied well Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display adj set range 110 to 233 Unit 0 4 m...

Page 880: ... For the details of paper for stream reading position adjustment refer to the Service Manual COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD Card number setting Lv 1 Details To set the card number to be used for Card Reader A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards specified by CARD RNG can be used Use case At installation of the Card Reader After replacement of the HDD Adj set operate metho...

Page 881: ...o not use Shift JIS character strings Be sure to use E RDS RGW PORT COM TEST COM LOG and RGW ADR as a set Display adj set range URL Default value https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E RDS RGW PORT COM TEST COM LOG Supplement memo Embedded RDS Function to send device information such as the device counter failure and consumables to the sales company s...

Page 882: ... Details To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard Glass Use case When replacing the Copyboard Glass When replacing the Scanner Unit When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method 1 Set paper on the Copyboard Glass 2 Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure t...

Page 883: ...et paper on the DADF 2 Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF WLVL3 Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Related service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR R DFTAR G DFTAR B DFTAR2 R DFTAR2 G DFTAR2 B DFTBK BW BW TGT Set of B W shading target value Lv 1 Details After the white level data X Y Z for the Standard Whit...

Page 884: ...fine adjustment by COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C4 A4R Adj set operate method 1 Set A4R paper on the Cassette 4 and set the guide so that it fits the paper width 2 Select the item and then press OK key The value is registered after automatic adjustment Caution After execution check the registered value by COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C4 A4R and write it down on the service label Related service mode COPIER ADJU...

Page 885: ...sembly and Pre transfer Charging Assembly simultaneously 1 reciprocation Check the reciprocation operation of the Wire Cleaner Use case When checking operation of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor after removing and then installing the Primary Charging Assembly at working around the Process area Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range During operat...

Page 886: ...ess the nine keys in sequence T 8 46 PART CHK COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK CL Specification of operation Clutch Lv 1 Details To specify the Clutch to operate Use case When replacing the Clutch checking the operation Adj set operate method Enter the value and then press OK key Display adj set range 1 to 6 1 Developing Clutch CL1 2 Magnet Roller Clutch CL5 3 to 6 Not used Default value 0 Related service...

Page 887: ...FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Clear of error code Lv 1 Details To clear error codes E000 E001 E002 E003 E717 E719 E000 E001 E002 and E003 are fixing related errors E004 IH Power Supply and E005 Web absence do not need to be cleared Use case At error occurrence Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch DC CON RAM clear of DC Controller PCB Lv 1 Details ...

Page 888: ... Details To clear the user mode setting values excluding values for Control Panel common settings and FAX Common Settings Timer Settings Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Settings Copy Settings Communications Settings Printer Settings Use case When clearing various setting values of user mode Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switc...

Page 889: ...rmal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E RDS RGW PORT RGW ADR COM LOG COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR KEY CLR Encrypt key clear of HDD Encrypt Board Lv 2 Details To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board Security Kit for replacement Processing is executed at the time of replacement of the Encryption Board and a new encryption key is generate...

Page 890: ...the Copyboard Glass 2 Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Related service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M1 to 12 MTF2 S1 to 12 COPIER FUNCTION MISC R CLM DF1 Sampling of clr front stream read MTF VL Lv 1 Details The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the factory setting value depending on the c...

Page 891: ...M1 to 12 MTF S1 to 12 COPIER FUNCTION MISC R CLPLT EN Color copyboard read MTF VL initial set Lv 1 Details To return the MTF value for color copyboard reading to the factory setting value Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the Reader Controller PCB the MTF value obtained by sampling of the MTF chart becomes disabled When CLM PLTN is executed the value is automatically ...

Page 892: ... BWM DF1 BWM TGT COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2 M1 to 12 MTF2 S1 to 12 COPIER FUNCTION MISC R CLDF2 EN Clr back stream read MTF VL initial set Lv 1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit C1only To return the MTF value for color back side stream reading to the factory setting value Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the Reader Co...

Page 893: ...e incorrect judgment Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 55 1 50 The image becomes foggy Default value 0 Required time Approx 2 minutes Supplement memo The MTF value is set to 65 at the time of shipment SCANLMP2 Light up check of LED Lamp Unit back Lv 1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader...

Page 894: ... press OK key Caution Drum memory may occur so be sure not to execute this item frequently Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Required time Approx 30 seconds COPIER FUNCTION MISC P ENV PRT Temp hmdy surface temp of Fix Roll log Lv 1 Details To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a ...

Page 895: ...dj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key DV RT Idle rotation of Developing Assembly Lv 1 Details To execute idle rotation of the Developing Assembly Duration can be set by COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DV RT LG Use case When small vertical lines occurs on an image Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution If using frequently deterioration of developer or toner...

Page 896: ...range Top 2 digits Progress ratio Returns to 00 at termination Last 2 digits Result at termination 00 Normally finished Others Abnormally finished Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE DEBUG 1 Setting of log type and save timing Lv 2 Details To set the types of logs to be stored and the timing to store logs in the HDD Logs are used to analyze the cause of a trouble Use case When ana...

Page 897: ...and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 255 Related service mode COPIER OPTION IMG LSR 2D SHADE COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE M LINE2 M LINE2 2D shading horizontal scan 2 correction Lv 2 Details To set the correction value of the horizontal scanning direction 2 at 2D shading Adj set operate method Enter the value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 255 Related service mode COPIER ...

Page 898: ...D P1 SHD P3 SHD P3 2D shading pattern 3 output Lv 1 Details To output pattern 3 for 2D shading Use case When checking 2D shading profile visually and entering manually Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Related service mode COPIER OPTION IMG LSR 2D SHADE COPIER FUNCTION 2D SHADE SHD P1 SHD P2 2D READ Read 2D shading ROM Lv 1 Details To read 2D shading ROM data To check RO...

Page 899: ... day in an HH environment At last rotation after 1500 sheets since the last potential control Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW MODEL SZ Fixed magnifictn DADF orgnl dtct size Lv 1 Details To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection size with DADF It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader according to the location Use case Upon user s request A...

Page 900: ...t of the machine Use case When installing removing the Reader Unit Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not installed 1 Installed Default value According to the setting at shipment COPIER OPTION FNC SW ORG LGL Special paper size set in DADF mode LGL Lv 2 Details To set the size of special paper LGL...

Page 901: ...epending on the setting of option bit MeapModelBIT COPIER OPTION FNC SW SC L CNT Set large paper jdgmt reference at scan Lv 1 Details To set the judgment reference of the scan counter as to which to use B4 or LTR to determine large size The threshold is determined by the combination with the setting of B4 L CNT SC L CNT 0 B4 L CNT 0 paper exceeding B4 is determined as large size paper with B4 or s...

Page 902: ...adj set range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default value 0 Related user mode Settings Registration Set Destination Register Destinations Register New Dest File Protocol WebDAV Settings Registration Function Settings Send Common Settings Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX Supplement memo WebDAV function is equipped as standard with the machine COPIER OPTION FNC SW CARD RNG Card number setting department num...

Page 903: ...e initial value Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter 0 and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 Returned to the initial value Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW ILSZ JAM ON OFF of size difference jam detection Lv 2 Details To set ON OFF of size difference jam detection Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default value 0 W RAID S...

Page 904: ...on of the Upright Control Panel Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not installed 1 Installed Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW INVALPDL Disable of PDL license Lv 1 Details To disable the registered PDL license When 1 Disabled is set PDL is disabled even if a PDL license is registered This is set to the machines installed at convenience stores which do not allow PDL to be used Use case When prohibit...

Page 905: ... 900 sheets 1 Approx 140 sheets A4 5 image ratio Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW BXNUPLOG ON OFF of Nup log at Inbox print Lv 2 Details To set whether to keep Nup log at Inbox print Use case When keeping Nup log at Inbox print Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value At normal service 0 At customization 1 SDLMTW...

Page 906: ... Unified Authentication function Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW MIB NVTA RFC compatible character stringMIB write Lv 1 Details As default MIB object which NVT ASCII can be written exists in order to link with LUI entry value This violates RFC orde...

Page 907: ...j set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default value 1 T LW LVL Not used Lv 2 Details COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW MEAP DSP Screen switch set from MEAP to standard Lv 2 Details To set to enable disable switching from MEAP screen to the standard screen COPY SEND Mail Box screen etc Setting to display hide the arrow mark on MEAP screen In the case of an error jam alarm the screen is switched to the standard ...

Page 908: ... value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default value 1 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI HOLD Display hide of hold job screen Lv 2 Details To set whether to display the hold job screen on the Control Panel Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power s...

Page 909: ...he memory media screen display on the Control Panel Use case When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 Related user mode Preferences Display Settings Store Location Display Settings Memory Media The setting value is changed to 0 when turning OFF the foregoing user mode and the value is changed to 1 when turning ON the m...

Page 910: ...ain power switch Display adj set range 0 to 4 0 0 second 1 15 seconds 2 30 seconds 3 45 seconds 4 60 seconds Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX CBLTINVL Setting of Fixing Web Solenoid ON times Lv 1 Details To set frequency to turn ON the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid If an image failure occurs due to the soiled Pressure Roller set 1 If an image failure occurs due to the soiled Separation C...

Page 911: ... OPTION IMG FIX RAG CONT COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FIX DWN Set prdctvty reduct mode small size Lv 2 Details To set the speed ratio in the case of reducing productivity when feeding small size paper Use case When an image failure crepe mark occurs Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 3 to 0 3 40 2 60 1 80 0 100 Default value 0 FIX RT Set idle rotati...

Page 912: ...than the center temperature feeding speed at the center of a paper becomes faster than the speed at the edge so paper wrinkle occurs If 2 is set control temperature is increased by performing idle rotation when printing to A3 LDR or larger size paper at the start of printing in a normal humidity high humidity environment Paper wrinkle which occurs at this time can be decreased but first copy time ...

Page 913: ...play adj set range 0 to 20 0 OFF Unit 30 seconds Default value 1 15 seconds Related service mode COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DRM IDL DRM IDL3 COPIER OPTION IMG DEV ATM Set of highland ev voltg reduction mode Lv 2 Details To set the highland environment voltage reduction mode in the case that leak occurs at a high latitude When 1 is set high voltage settings for the Primary Charging Assembly Pre transfer...

Page 914: ...ransfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad is shortened Display adj set range 7 to 0 Unit 30 minutes Default value 0 255 minutes COPIER OPTION IMG DEV TBLTCLSW Setting of ETB cleaning timing Lv 1 Details To set the timing to execute ETB cleaning control When 1 or 2 is set it is also executed at the time of the Charging Wire cleaning As the value is increased the soiling of the back side of paper is decrea...

Page 915: ... preferring to use the Unified Authentication function because of security concern Use case Upon user s request not to use the Unified Authentication function Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG DEV MIB NVTA RFC compatible character stringMIB write Lv 1 D...

Page 916: ...rate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When 1 ON is set black line is resolved but sharpness of image edge is decreased Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 DFDST L1 DADF mode dust dtct level adj ppr intvl Lv 1 Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed at paper i...

Page 917: ...g of the direction which the background reduction is more TBD Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG RDR ABC MD2 Adj back digital ABC bckgd dens reduct Lv 1 Details To adjust the background density reduction setting level of back side digital ABC Auto Background Control at B W mode Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 1 to 3 1 Setting of the directi...

Page 918: ... Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not supported 1 Supported Default value 0 T 8 59 IMG MCON COPIER OPTION IMG MCON PASCAL Use no use of auto gradation adj data Lv 1 Details To set to use not to use the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT that is generated by auto gradation adjustment Full Quick Adjust control Selection is available as to whether to use gamma LUT at the time of image formation Use ca...

Page 919: ...e 0 DH MODE Not used Lv 2 Details COPIER OPTION IMG MCON VP ART Setting of line art processing Lv 2 Details To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF In the outline processing a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is recognized as line art and is converted into vector data Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data or to recognize it as one l...

Page 920: ...ite dots become less significant by enlarging black dots by thin line correction Use case When white dots are significant Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION IMG MCON VDADDCNT HDADDCNT LIN OFST Related user mode Thin line correction horizontal line correction and vertical lin...

Page 921: ...tion is accorded with the setting value of CLN ADJ When setting CLN SW to 0 operation is not executed regardless of the CLN ADJ setting Use case When amount of toner supply to the Cleaning Blade is decreased extremely Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 OFF 1 Based on environment control 2 ON Default value 1 Related service mode COPIE...

Page 922: ...play adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF Normal mode 1 ON Anti condensation mode T 8 62 FEED SW COPIER OPTION FEED SW TRY CHG Set of Delivery Tray switch at tray full Lv 2 Details To set the Delivery Tray switching control when the Delivery Tray of the Finisher reaches to the full level If Tray A B is selected as a delivery tray tray is switched to the Tray A when the Tray B reaches to the full level At th...

Page 923: ... 3 ON after a job and at warm up rotation Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION FEED SW DK1 TURN DK3 TURN DK4 TURN DK5 TURN COPIER OPTION FEED SW DK3 TURN ON OFF of Casstt3 Pckup Rol little rotn Lv 1 Details To set whether to rotate the Cassette 3 Pickup Roller a little after completion of job or at the time of warm up rotation If the Pickup Cassette has not been used for a long time ...

Page 924: ...rm up rotation 3 ON after a job and at warm up rotation Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION FEED SW DK1 TURN DK2 TURN DK3 TURN DK5 TURN COPIER OPTION FEED SW DK1 TURN ON OFF of R Deck Pckup Rol little rotn Lv 1 Details To set whether to rotate the Right Deck Pickup Roller a little after completion of job or at the time of warm up rotation If the Pickup Deck has not been used for a l...

Page 925: ...n power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Output from the tray from which the last job was output 1 Output from the delivery destination which priority is high among the delivery trays Default value 0 Related user mode Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Output Tray Settings T 8 63 NETWORK COPIER OPTION NETWORK RAW DATA Setting of received data print mode Lv 2 Details To set print m...

Page 926: ...s cable while Service NAVI is used Use case When the Service NAVI is used Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION NETWORK CMD PORT Supplement memo T O T TUIF over TCP Communication protocol to be used for communication with the built in appli...

Page 927: ...to be used for e mail transmission At the time of e mail transmission this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e mail transmission only when it s authenticated COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS PLN Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry Lv 2 Details To restrict use of PLAIN LOGIN authentication which is plaintext at the tim...

Page 928: ...Caution This item is enabled when the setting value of SSH SW is ON Start of the machine might be approx 3 to 4 minutes longer than the normal operation because regeneration process takes time Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not regenerated 1 Generated Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION NETWORK SSH SW Level 2 COPIER OPTION NETWORK U NAME Setting of SSH server login user name Lv 2 De...

Page 929: ...MEAP Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 65535 Default value 8443 COPIER OPTION NETWORK LPD PORT Setting of LPD port number Lv 2 Details To set the LPD port number Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Di...

Page 930: ...Option 81under the packet monitoring network environment Selecting ON enables dynamic change of IP address by Option 81 of DHCP in the case that the dynamic DNS setting is ON in user mode Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to set ON for the dynamic DNS setting in user mode to enable...

Page 931: ...ON the main power switch Display adj set range 1 to 3 1 WSD and SNMP 2 WSD and CPCA 3 CPCA and SNMP Default value 1 COPIER OPTION NETWORK 802XTOUT Set of IEEE802 1X authentication timeout Lv 1 Details To set timeout value for IEEE802 1X authentication If the device executes 802 1X authentication change the wait time for response from the authentication server Use case When response from the authen...

Page 932: ...memo Windows NT LAN Manager authentication A user authentication method for network logon which was generally used in the OS for Windows NT Series prior to Windows NT 4 0 COPIER OPTION NETWORK AFS JOB Set of FAX server job reception port Lv 1 Details To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends jobs Use case When changing the job reception port of the fax server Display ...

Page 933: ...BLK ON OFF of IP address block function Lv 1 Details To set ON OFF of IP address block function When 1 is set IP Address Range Settings and RX Print Range screen is displayed on the Control Panel Use case When using the IP address block function Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 Related user mode Preferences...

Page 934: ...ails To set whether to permit restoration of Inbox backup data Machine subject to restoration can be selected from either the same model or the next model When restoration is completed normally the setting value is returned to 0 Use case At replacement permit to restore backup data of other model some models Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the m...

Page 935: ...Division Display adj set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default value 00000000 Related service mode COPIER OPTION CUSTOM DEV SP1 to SP3 SP5 to SP8 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM DEV SP5 Device special settings 5 Lv 2 Details To execute the device special settings 5 Use case When specific instructions are given from the Quality Support Division Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key...

Page 936: ...umn the power frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz which the DC Controller judged at power on is displayed In the case that the power frequency is not matched with the one at the installation location set the AC power frequency at right side column Use case When the breaker is frequently tripped during operation Adj set operate method 1 Select the right side column 2 Enter the setting value and then press OK key...

Page 937: ...R3 Setting of software counter 3 Lv 1 Details To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check screen Use case Upon user dealer s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 999 Default value The value differs according to the location COUNTER4 Setting of software counter 4 Lv 1 Details...

Page 938: ...etection of full tray 1 At detection of height Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER MF LG ST Dis hide of long strip mode Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Long Original button When 1 is set Long Original button is displayed in Copy Options screen and the long strip paper becomes available Use case Upon user s request use of long strip original or long strip paper Adj set operate met...

Page 939: ...ime deletion with random data 3 3 time deletion with random data 4 DOD Default value 1 Supplement memo HDD data complete deletion function a function to completely delete data in HDD by overwriting with 0 null data or random data to the file data when logically deleting file on HDD deleting management information data COPIER OPTION USER JOB INVL Job intvl setting at interruption copy Lv 2 Details ...

Page 940: ... default dis items on charge counter Lv 1 Details To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter Check screen Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use this mode overseas outside Japan Display adj set range 0 to 2 For Japan 0 Counter 1 Total 1 101 1 Counter 1 Total 2 ...

Page 941: ...try of 7 digit password is required as well as entry of department ID Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Department ID only 1 7 digit password entry Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER RUI RJT Connct set at invalid auth from remoteUI Lv 2 Details To set to disconnect H...

Page 942: ...de for MEAP platform MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode In safe mode MEAP application is stopped while just the system application which starts with initial state is activated This mode enables obtaining log for cause analysis of MEAP failure Use case Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to be activated due to resource confliction between MEAP applications s...

Page 943: ...alize is a function to assure job grouping function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1 0 The setting to enable this mode can avoid job rearrangement because the machine does not receive job data from other connection until it completes job data reception from the current connection Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn...

Page 944: ... mail transmission Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Retained 1 Deleted Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER DOM ADD Additional entry of mail destn domain Lv 2 Details To set to automatically add the domain specified in user mode to the sending address To entered at th...

Page 945: ...IER OPTION USER FREE DSP Display hide of charge disable screen Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Use Charge Management screen for switching between charge and no charge The hardware switch for switching charge no charge in the Coin Manager enables the mode in which all the services are available for free store manager mode by temporarily releasing the charging system Even without ...

Page 946: ...rnal community name Use case When restricting SNTP access with the community name administrator right that is retained internally Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 OFF 1 Read only 2 Read Write Default value 2 Related user mode Preferences Network SNMP Settings Community Name 1 Settings COPIER OP...

Page 947: ... range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default value 1 Related user mode Preferences External Interface USB Settings Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device COPIER OPTION USER CTCHKDSP Display hide of counter print Lv 1 Details To set whether to display or hide Print List on the Counter Check screen Model name model number information counter check date and counter information can be output as a total count ...

Page 948: ... the time of copy or B W Inbox output Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 Low screen ruling 134 lines is used for photo judgment area and high screen ruling 141 lines for text judgment area 1 Low screen ruling is used for photo judgment area and TBIC for text judgment area 2 TBIC is used for both ...

Page 949: ...v 2 Details To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled When 1 is set jobs can be merged Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER JA JDF Setting of JDF SAM Lv 2 Details To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled When 1 is set JDF can be used Use case When the ope...

Page 950: ... Supplement memo Composition function Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark Print Date T 8 66 CST COPIER OPTION CST U1 NAME Dis hide of ppr name in ppr size groupU1 Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U1 detection Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Di...

Page 951: ...Original Selection COPIER OPTION CST CST4 P1 Setting of Cassette 4 paper size Lv 1 Details To set the paper size used in Cassette 4 Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to match with the hardware setting size Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 A5R 1 STMTR Default value USA 1 Countries oth...

Page 952: ...ey 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 3 from 0 to 2 The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 from 3 once the mode has been changed COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW DA CNCT 1 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI BOX UI SEND UI FAX 0 Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Settings Comm...

Page 953: ...the Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen In the case to specify 1 to 4 Euro Pound Swiss Franc Dollar by going through the following COPIER OPTION ACC UNIT PRC entry is in fractional unit Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents 0 50 Use case At installation of Coin Manager Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution This mode is enabl...

Page 954: ...y on the upper limit number of sheets processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup location Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 No support 1 Priority on speed 2 Priority on upper limit number of sheets Default value 0 PDL THR Norm PDL pnt set External charge mode6 7 Lv 2 Details To set normal PDL print job processing at external charge mode 6 7 When 1 is set and externa...

Page 955: ...1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 9999999 Default value 0 AP CODE Set output pass code from print server Lv 2 Details To set the pass code for output from print server Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 9999999 Default value...

Page 956: ...hen checking whether SEND function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST SEND 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR SEND Display adj set range When operation finished normally OK Default value 0 TR SEND Trns license key dis of SEND function Lv 2 Details To display transfer license key to use SEND function when ...

Page 957: ...PDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR EXPDF Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PDFDR Install state dis of Direct Print PDF Lv 2 Details To display installation state of Direct Print PDF when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether Direct Print PDF is...

Page 958: ...ing HDD When replacing the device Adj set operate method 1 Select ST BRDIM 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR BRDIM Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST VNC Install state dis of Remote Oprtr Soft Lv 2 Details To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether Remote Oper...

Page 959: ...2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR TRSND Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST WTMRK Install state dis of Secure Watermark Lv 2 Details To display installation state of Secure Watermark when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether Secure Watermark is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST WTMRK 2 Enter 0 and then pres...

Page 960: ...VPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR DVPDF Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST SCPDF Install state dis of Trace Smooth PDF Lv 2 Details To display installation state of Trace Smooth PDF when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether Trace Smooth PDF is installe...

Page 961: ...ion when transfer is disabled Use case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj set operate method 1 Select ST PS 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR PS Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PCL Install state display of PCL function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PCL function when transfer is disabled Use case Whe...

Page 962: ...g the device Adj set operate method 1 Select ST LIPS4 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR LIPS4 Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PSPCL Install state dis of PS PCL function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PS PCL function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether PS PCL function is installed Adj set opera...

Page 963: ...te method 1 Select ST PSPCU 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR PSPCU Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST LXUFR Install state dis of UFR II function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of UFR II function when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether UFR II function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST LXUF...

Page 964: ...the device Adj set operate method 1 Select ST JBLK 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR JBLK Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST AFAX Installation state dis of Remote Fax Lv 2 Details To display installation state of Remote Fax when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether Remote Fax is installed Adj set operate method 1 Sel...

Page 965: ... Select ST OOXML 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR OOXML Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST XPS Install state dis of Direct Print XPS Lv 2 Details To display installation state of Direct Print XPS when transfer is disabled Use case When checking whether Direct Print XPS is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST XPS 2 Enter 0 ...

Page 966: ... enabled for test print only Use case At trouble analysis Display adj set range 0 to 6 0 Error diffusion 1 Low screen ruling approx 133 to 190 lines 2 High screen ruling approx 200 to 268 lines 3 Copy screen approx 220 lines 4 REOS screen no screen structure 5 Error diffusion with trailing edge adjustment 6 High screen ruling with trailing edge adjustment DENS K Adj of Bk color density at test pri...

Page 967: ...and check the remote host address of PING transmission target 5 Select the item and enter the remote host address and then press OK key and Start key OK Connection is normal Checking procedure is complete NG Connection failed Go to step 6 if the cable connection is OK In case of cable connection failure connect again and then go to step 5 6 Select the item and enter loopback address and then press...

Page 968: ...r a hardware failure has occurred to the IPSec Encryption Board Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range At normal state OK At failure occurrence NG 0 The board cannot be recognized 1 An error occurred to the result Required time Approx 3 minutes IPSECINT Interrupt test of IPSec Encryption Board Lv 1 Details To execute the interrupt test of IPSec Encryptio...

Page 969: ...ted Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 RMT PRT Remote print counter Lv 1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine and 2 sided print is stacked according to the charge counter at report print Large size 1 small size 1 A blank sheet is not counted Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 BOX PRT Inbox print counter Lv 1 Details To count up when the paper is delivered outside t...

Page 970: ...heets DK Deck pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Unit Number of sheets 2 SIDE 2 sided pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Unit Number of sheets T 8 75 FEEDER COPIER COUNTER FEEDER FEED DADF original pickup total counter Lv 1 Use case When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF Unit Number of sheets L FEED DADF large size pickup total ...

Page 971: ...reaches 2000 E005 0001 occurs Use case At the time of Fixing Cleaning Web level detection replacement Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Unit Number of times WST TNR Waste toner counter Lv 1 Details This item is used to clear the warning when the Waste Toner full warning is displayed Use case ...

Page 972: ...stops the operation Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed continuously as a large job the average paper length affects calculation of the life Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit mm DVRUNLEN Average distance of job Lv 1 Details Average running distance in the period from when the printer engine starts printing operation to when it stops the operation Since the printe...

Page 973: ...nter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER PRDC 1 PO CLN Pre trn Charge Wire Clean Pad prts cntr Lv 1 Details Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1 2 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the ...

Page 974: ...o clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 PO UNIT Pre transfer Charging Ass y parts cntr Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use c...

Page 975: ...m and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 SP CLAW Drum Cleaner Separation Claw prts cntr Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking ...

Page 976: ...ine Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 ...

Page 977: ...t the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 C4 FD RL Cassette 4 Feed Roller parts counter Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set ope...

Page 978: ...lacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DR...

Page 979: ...et range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default value 0 Supplement memo Regardless of the read mode 1 sided 2 sided the counter is advanced every time a sheet is fed COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 LNT TAP1 Dust Removal Sheet 1 counter DADF Lv 1 Details Dust colleting 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts...

Page 980: ... estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 FIN STPR Stapler parts counter Fin D1 E1 Lv 1 Details Stapler Unit 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consump...

Page 981: ...lue after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 BACK ROL Paper Return Roller parts counter Fin E1 Lv 1 Details Paper Return Roller Front Rear 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear...

Page 982: ...key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default value 0 IS COLL1 Horz Feed Drive Roller prts cntr PF INS Lv 1 Details 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use case When checking the consumption level...

Page 983: ...ed Lv 1 Details T 8 83 LF COPIER COUNTER LF K DRM LF Display of Drum Unit Bk life Lv 1 Details To display how much the Drum Unit Bk is close to the end of life in percentage When a new part is set the value becomes 0 Use case When checking the life of Drum Unit Display adj set range 0 to 100 Unit Default value 0 T 8 84 ...

Page 984: ...prox 113 FEEDER DISPLAY RDSN RCV Display of Lead Sensor reception voltage Lv 1 Details To display the light receiving voltage value for the Lead Sensor Use case When jams frequently occur Adj set operate method Remove and insert the paper at the sensor position and check the value at presence absence of the paper Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value At the presence of paper 123...

Page 985: ...e leading edge of the sheet Use case When installing DADF When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 1 mm Default value 0 FEEDER ADJUST LA SPD2 Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn back Lv 1 Details This service mode can be used for the model with Duplex Color Image Reader Unit C...

Page 986: ...Sensor PCB3 Lead Sensor 1 PCB4 Lead Sensor 2 SR5 Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key MTR CHK Specifying DADF Operation Motor Lv 1 Details To specify the DADF Motor to operate The motor is activated by MTR ON Use case At operation check Adj set operate method Enter the value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 9 0 Pickup Motor M1 1 Feed Motor M2 2 Registration ...

Page 987: ... Disengagement Solenoid SL1 1 Stamp Solenoid SL2 Related service mode FEEDER FUNCTION SL ON FEEDER FUNCTION SL ON Operation check of DADF Solenoid Lv 1 Details To start operation check for the solenoid specified by SL CHK Use case At operation check Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops 2 Press OK key Th...

Page 988: ...Inch Lv 1 Details To set ON OFF of mixed paper detection AB configuration and Inch configuration Use case When enabling to mix AB and Inch configuration sizes original Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF Mixed paper is not detected 1 ON Mixed paper is detected T 8 88 ...

Page 989: ...incremented by 1 the staple position moves by 0 49 mm Toward front Toward rear The item can be also set with DIP switch of the Finisher with common setting range and setting value The latest setting value is enabled regardless of service mode DIP switch Use case When the A4R LGL LTRR paper rear staple position is displaced Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Tu...

Page 990: ...and then press OK key Display adj set range 10 to 10 Unit 0 42 mm Appropriate target value 0 Default value 0 SORTER ADJUST STP F3 A4R front stpl pstn 45 deg Fin E1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the one front staple position on the A4R size paper As the value is incremented by 1 the staple position moves to the rear side by 0 49mm The item can be also set with DIP switch of the Finisher with common settin...

Page 991: ...ter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 4 to 2 Unit 1 mm Appropriate target value 0 Default value 0 SORTER ADJUST PRCS RET Adj Process Tray return amount Fin E1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the pull back amount of the paper on the Processing Tray As the value is incremented by 1 the amount to return papers to the Process Tray Stopper is increased by 1 4 mm paper feed amount of ...

Page 992: ...ER ADJUST THN STC Poor thin ppr stack prev mode Fin E1 Lv 1 Details Set 1 when thin paper is not appropriately stacked When 1 is set the stacking condition of thin paper improves The item can be also set with DIP switch of the Finisher with common setting range and setting value The latest setting value is enabled regardless of service mode DIP switch Use case When thin paper is not appropriately ...

Page 993: ...he item can be also set with DIP switch of the Finisher with common setting range and setting value The latest setting value is enabled regardless of service mode DIP switch Use case When increasing the stacking capacity for saddle stitching Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 SDL ALM Saddle full stack alarm m...

Page 994: ...P PRINT before execution After execution enter necessary setting values The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF ON Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT PF CON Controller PCB RAM clear PFU Lv 1 Details To execute the RAM clear of Inserter Folder Controller PCB on Paper Folding Unit to delete all the adjustment contents and counter information Adj set operate...

Page 995: ...Lv 1 Details To set the limit of stack capacity for small size Z fold paper When clearing the limit of stack capacity paper can be stacked beyond the maximum stack capacity The item can be also set with DIP switch of the Finisher with common setting range and setting value The latest setting value is enabled regardless of service mode DIP switch Use case When stacking the paper beyond the maximum ...

Page 996: ... 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 SORTER OPTION BUFF INT Ppr intvl after buffer ppr ejctn Fin E1 Lv 1 Details In case of paper with excessive upward curl paper right after the buffer paper is ejected at the Finisher hits the Stack Delivery Roller causing Saddle Delivery Sensor stationary jam When 1 is set the jam can be avoided since the paper intervals between the present and the following papers after...

Page 997: ...etting menu level 3 Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the level 3 of printer setting menu Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default value 0 MENU 4 Hide dis of printer setting menu level 4 Lv 2 Details To set whether to display or hide the ...

Page 998: ...locating the Machine Printer Cover B1 Shift Tray E1 Reader Heater Unit Cassette Heater Unit Paper Deck Heater Unit A1 Utility Tray A1 A2 Card Reader C1 Copy Card Reader F1 Voice Guidance Kit F1 F2 Installation Procedure for Expansion Bus F1 F2 IPSec Board B2 and Wireless LAN Board B1 Additional Memory Type B 512MB Combination of HDD Options ...

Page 999: ... to 80 2 The machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun provide curtains to the window 3 Be sure to provide adequate ventilation of the room to keep the work environment comfortable Room odor can be bothering when running the machine for a long time in a poorly ventilated room although the ozone...

Page 1000: ...0mm or more 3 To install the host machine install it in a well ventilated place Especially when there are multiple host machine s be sure to locate the machine where the machine is free from direct exhaust of other machines Be sure to keep the machine away from the air inlet duct which is used for ventilation of the room F 9 2 Points to Note at Installation Work Take note of the following points w...

Page 1001: ...vailable No installation is not available T 9 1 Order to Install the Host machine and the Options NOTE In the case of installing the host machine and the other options at the same time follow the order as described below to install the options first so that the installation operability is improved 1 Checking before Installation 2 Unpacking 3 Installation of the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover 4 I...

Page 1002: ... of the Reader Unit Printer Cover AUS only 7 Size Plate R X 3 4 Finisher Connector Cover X 2 8 Size Plate L X 1 5 Service Book Holder X 1 1 Developing Assembly X 1 2 Toner Container X 1 3 Exhaust Filter X 1 12 Touch Pen X 1 6 Cleaning Tool X 1 230V region only 11 Power Code X 1 The connector has a different shape depending on locations 9 Case Sheet EU X1 EUR only EUR only 10 Hook and Loop Fastener...

Page 1003: ...tall the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover 8 Screw Binding M4x6 X 3 Use 2 of them 7 Screw RS Tightening M4x10 X 6 1 Reader Fixation Plate L X 1 2 Reader Fixation Plate R X 1 3 Left Rear Cover X 1 4 Left Upper Cover X 1 5 Right Upper Cover X 1 6 Upper Rear Cover X 1 9 Rubber Cap X 4 10 Wire Saddle X 3 F 9 4 ...

Page 1004: ... How to Use The Manuals 1 5 UK FRA SPA ITA GER 1 Registration for Purchase in USA 1 Drum Unit Warranty 1 Installation Check List 1 UFR II User Software CD 1 1 1 PCL User Software CD EFIGS 1 iR ADVANCE 6075i 6065i 6055i only iW Enterprise Manag Console 1 iW Access Management System 1 iW Management Console CD 1 1 Frequently Asked Questions 1 1 Getting Started 1 1 Main unit warranty for Korea only 1 ...

Page 1005: ...mm 1 064 mm 1 305 mm 1 Pull the plastic bag all the way down 2 Open 4 Handle Covers 1 Claw each F 9 5 3 Hold the handles at the right side of the host machine and lift the host machine to remove the pad Put the plastic bag aside in the direction of the arrow CAUTION Be sure not to lift the host machine too much Otherwise it will lose the balance Pad plastic bag Handle Handle Cover 4 Hold the handl...

Page 1006: ...e fit the casters to the center of the Slope Plate to slowly bring the machine down CAUTION Be careful not to make the casters off from the Slope Plate Handle Handle F 9 8 F 9 9 8 Remove tapes on the exterior surface of the host machine NOTE Do not remove 2 tapes for tags and a tape for the Filter Cover at this step These tapes will be removed later on F 9 10 9 Close 4 Handle Covers 10 When instal...

Page 1007: ...ing the Developing Assembly 1 Unpack the Developing Assembly 2 Check if there are any scratches on the cylinder while rotating the gear manually in the direction of the arrow CAUTION Do not damage and touch the cylinder Do not turn the gear inversely F 9 11 3 Open the Right Cover 4 Turn the Lock Lever and open the Developing Assembly Pressure Cover F 9 12 ...

Page 1008: ...age When the Buffer Shutter is open be sure to close it by pulling it toward the front Whether the Developing Assembly is installed properly can be checked with the Shutter Arm Buffer Shutter is open Buffer Shutter is closed Shutter Arm Shutter Arm F 9 13 F 9 14 CAUTION How to Hold the Developing Assembly When holding the Developing Assembly be sure to hold the handle of the Developing Assembly as...

Page 1009: ...e and align the protrusions at both sides of the assembly with the rails on the host machine Protrusion rail Protrusion Protrusion rail F 9 16 6 Along the rails insert the Developing Assembly horizontally 1 Connector 7 Close the Developing Assembly Pressure Cover and return the Lock Lever to the original position 8 Secure with the Screw Binding M4x6 9 Close the Right Cover F 9 17 F 9 18 ...

Page 1010: ... each cassette 3 Close the Vertical Path Cover 4 Open the Front Cover 5 Press the Release Button to open the Left and Right Decks and remove the tape NOTE Be sure to release the Release button slowly because it may not come out if releasing it abruptly F 9 19 6 Loosen the screw and slide the Deck Pressure Plate in the direction of the arrow Check that the screw position is at the engraved mark 1 a...

Page 1011: ...pes securing the tag 2 Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Release Lever in the direction of the arrow and pull the Fixing Feed Unit all the way out F 9 21 NOTE In the case that the Fixing Nip Pressure Release Screw is hard to be removed release the lock by pressing the Lock Springs at both rails and pull out the Fixing Feed Unit further until it stops Lock Spring Lock Spring F 9 22 ...

Page 1012: ... the 2 Fixing Nip Pressure Release Screws Inner Delivery Unit Fixing Nip Pressure Release Screw Fixing Nip Pressure Release Screw F 9 23 5 Close the Inner Delivery Unit 6 Remove the ETB Spacer 7 Return the Fixing Feed Unit and lock the Fixing Feed Unit Release Lever NOTE In the case of pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit further be sure to return the Fixing Feed Unit while releasing the Lock Spring 8...

Page 1013: ...e direction of the arrow to release 2 Unpack the Toner Container and shake it approx 10 times horizontally F 9 25 F 9 26 3 Remove the cap of the Toner Container 4 Set the Toner Container to the Main Body and turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to secure the Toner Container in place 5 Close the Toner Exchange Cover Installing the Exhaust Filter 1 Remove the tape and remove the Filter ...

Page 1014: ...ucts designed for Europe 2 Hold the Exhaust Filter as shown in the figure and install it to the Main Body 3 Install the Filter Cover 1 Screw RS Tightening M4x10 F 9 29 F 9 30 Installing the USB Device Port only with the products designed for Europe CAUTION Use the Card Reader prepared by each sales company 1 Open the Toner Exchange Cover 2 Remove the Bottle Regulation Rail 1 Screw F 9 31 ...

Page 1015: ...e the Upper Left Cover in the arrow direction 1 Screw 4 Remove the Clear Cover and Device Port Sheet 2 Screws Removed screws will be used in step 4 2 Claws x2 x2 Claws F 9 32 F 9 33 5 Replace the Device Port Sheet with the Case Sheet and install the Clear Cover 2 Claws 2 Screws Use the screws removed in step 3 x2 x2 6 Turn over the cover removed in step 2 and put the Hook and Loop Fastener through...

Page 1016: ...with the products designed for Europe 7 Affix one side strip along the rib line of section A A 8 Place the card reader on the hook and loop fastener F 9 36 F 9 37 9 Push the card reader against the side strip and section A and affix one side strip to section B of the card reader A B 10 Fix the card reader and harness cable with the hook and loop fastener 150 mm F 9 38 F 9 39 ...

Page 1017: ...the Toner Exchange Cover F 9 40 Setting the Environment Heater Switch 1 Check that the Leakage Breaker is ON 2 Turn ON the Environment Heater Switch and the Cassette Heater Switch in accordance with the installation environment Set the environment switches in accordance with the installation environment In the case of high humidity environment turn ON the Environment Switch The Drum Heater is turn...

Page 1018: ...sure to perform the following procedure for operation check of the Stamp Unit To enable the Stamp Unit it is required to install the FAX Board 6 Change the operation panel screen to Scan and Send and press Other Function 7 Press Finished Stamp in the second page of the Other Function screen 8 Set to the feeder and conduct transmission test to check that the originals are stamped In the Case of Pri...

Page 1019: ... the Paper Cassette can be executed Installation of the Host Machine 1 Confirm the position to install the Host Machine and turn the 2 adjusters with your hand until they closely contact the floor NOTE If you failed to turn the adjusters with your hand use a screwdriver so that they can be turned by your hand 2 Use a screwdriver to turn the adjusters in the direction of the arrow to make them secu...

Page 1020: ...Pen F 9 45 Setting the Deck 1 Push the Deck Release Button to pull out the Left and the Right Decks to the front 2 Remove the 3 screws fixing the Trailing Edge Guide Plate Left Guide Plate and Right Guide Plate in place and fix each of the guide plates at user s desired size NOTE Setting at the time of shipment A4 size Left Guide Plate Right Guide Plate Trail Edge Guide Plate Screw x3 3 Put the sp...

Page 1021: ...gh the clearance at the handle area NOTE When taking out the size plate access it from back side of the Deck Cover and push it out upward F 9 48 F 9 47 5 Push the Left Right Deck in 6 When the size is switched register paper size for the Front Deck in service mode Right Deck COPIER OPTION CST P SZ C1 Left Deck COPIER OPTION CST P SZ C2 A4 0 B5 1 LTR 2 7 Exit from the service mode ...

Page 1022: ...l Edge Guide Plate to the specified size Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever Side Guide Plate Lever Side Guide Plate Side Guide Plate Trail Edge Guide Plate 4 Set paper and open the cover at the insertion area of the Size Plate Paper Cover F 9 49 F 9 50 5 Cut the 2 points of the Size Plate R with nippers Cut 6 Following the paper size set the Size Plate R unused size plates should be put together 7 Close...

Page 1023: ...sette deck and check that the left edge margin of the image L1 is within 2 5 1 5mm If it is not within the range execute adjustment by following the procedure below image L1 Feeding direction of paper 1 Adjust the image position in service mode Right Deck COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C1 Left Deck COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2 Cassette 3 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C3 Cassette 4 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ...

Page 1024: ...n the 4 screws of the Cassette Button Link Unit Cassette Button Link Unit Cassette Button Link Unit F 9 54 F 9 55 8 According to the scale in which the position was checked in step 6 adjust the position of the Cassette Button Link Button In the case of larger margin at the rear side move the Cassette Button Link Unit to the rear side In the case of larger margin at the front side move the Cassette...

Page 1025: ...nt from the cassette deck and check that the left edge margin of the image is within 2 5 1 5mm NOTE When a mechanical adjustment was made be sure to execute the service mode in step 1 again F 9 57 Left Edge Margin Adjustment 2nd side NOTE By executing the margin adjustment 2nd side for the Cassette 3 the adjustment is applied to all source of paper Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3 and c...

Page 1026: ...that the leading edge margin is within 2 5 0 5mm 3 When the setting value was changed in step 1 write down the new numerical value in the service label 4 Exit from the service mode F 9 59 Leading Edge Margin Adjustment 2nd side NOTE By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Cassette 3 the adjustment is applied to all source of paper Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3 and che...

Page 1027: ...anged in step 1 write down the new numerical value in the service label 3 Exit from the service mode 4 Print from the Multi purpose Tray Pickup and check that the left edge margin of the image is within 2 5 1 5mm NOTE If the adjustment cannot be made with the setting value of 20 to 20 adjustment amount 2 0 to 2 0mm execute step 5 and later steps F 9 61 5 Open the MP Pickup Tray 6 Loosen the screw ...

Page 1028: ...tion Overview If the user s network environment is TCP IP use the Ping function to check that the network setting is properly performed If the user s network environment is IPX SPX or Apple Talk there is no need to check the network environment Checking the Network Connection CAUTION Be sure to use the network cable with Category 5e or higher In addition a sealed type STP cable is recommended Usin...

Page 1029: ...r about checking of the network connection using Ping 2 Confirm the remote host address with the system administrator 3 Enter the remote host address to Ping The network is properly connected if the message say Response from the host The network is not properly connected if the message say No response from the host therefore execute the following troubleshooting Network Troubleshooting Checking Co...

Page 1030: ...ost Machine is correct if the message say Response from the host If the message say No response from the host check the following NOTE When setting the address by manually input set the Subnet Mask by following the instruction of the administrator Checking Network Function on the Main Controller Perform checking by the loopback address 1 Select the following Additional Functions Configuration Netw...

Page 1031: ...n power switch 3 Check that the control panel display and the main power lamp are OFF and then disconnect the power plug 4 Lift the host machine off the floor by turning the 2 adjusters with a screwdriver 5 Remove the 2 Finisher Connector Covers from the left side of the host machine 1 Claw each 1 Protrusion each Claw Protrusion F 9 64 6 Remove the Left Upper Cover 3 Screws 3 Projections 3 Claws P...

Page 1032: ...ocedure 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Open the Inner Cover 1 Screw to loosen Loosen CAUTION When removing the Primary Charging Assembly and the Pre transfer Charging Assembly go through the following procedure while the Charging Shutter is open At sleep mode press the Power Switch on the Control Panel check that the machine is in standby condition turn OFF the Main Power and then perform removing In th...

Page 1033: ...e direction of the arrow to pull out the Pre transfer Charging Assembly 4 Wipe the top surface of the Pre transfer Charging Assembly with lint free paper F 9 70 F 9 71 CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to fit the Transfer Charging Assembly to the groove on the host machine and install it horizontally F 9 72 ...

Page 1034: ...sure to install this equipment after installing the Upright Control Panel Checking the Contents The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used 3 Screw P Tightening M4X10 X 8 1 Printer Cover X1 2 Screw TP M4X8 X 1 4 Reader Fixing Plate L X 1 5 Reader Fixing Plate R X 1 6 Reader Mount X 1 7 Screw RS Tightening M4X8 X 2 1 1 1 1 Use 4 for them F 9 73 ...

Page 1035: ... 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure NOTE Installation procedures for imageRUNNER ADVANCE 8105 8095 8085 Series and iR ADVANCE 6075 6065 6055 Series are the same Subsequent illustrations and pictures are the case of imageRUNNER ADVANCE 8105 8095 8085 Series 1 Remove the Reader Positioning Shaft and s...

Page 1036: ...l model only Install the Reader Fixation Plate R to make the Control Panel Cable and the Power Supply Cable over the plate 2 Bosses 1 Screw RS tight M4x8 come with the host machine 3 Install the Reader Fixation Plate L come with the host machine to the installation position of front side 2 Bosses 1 Screw RS tight M4x8 come with the host machine F 9 75 F 9 76 4 Install the Printer Cover 4 Screws P ...

Page 1037: ...st machine 3 Protrusion 2 Claws Claw x2 Protrusion Protrusion F 9 78 F 9 79 7 Install the Right Upper Cover come with the host machine 3 Protrusions 3 Screws RS tight M4x10 come with the host machine 4 Rubber Caps come with the host machine x2 Rubber Cap Protrusions 8 stall the Left Upper Cover come with the host machine in the direction of the arrow 4 Protrusions 3 Claws 3 Screws RS tight M4x10 c...

Page 1038: ...he host machine 1 Protrusion 1 Claw Protrusion Claw F 9 82 Operation Check 1 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 A message is displayed prompting to check that the Reader Unit Cable is connected properly 4 Select 0 for the following service mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW W SCNR 5 Get out from service mode 6 Turn OFF and then ON the main power switc...

Page 1039: ...ts 1 Shift Tray x 1 2 Shift Drive Unit x 1 3 Shift Tray Cover x 1 4 Shift Tray Support Base x 1 5 Reinforcing Plate x 1 6 Shift Delivery Support Base 1 x 1 7 Shift Delivery Support Base 2 x 1 9 Rubber Cap x 3 10 Shift Tray Shaft x 1 12 Screw RS Tightening M4x8 x 4 13 Screw Binding M4x6 x 2 8 Face Cover x 1 11 Screw RS Tightening M4x20 x 2 F 9 83 ...

Page 1040: ...Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure 1 Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2 Wire Saddles 2 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Protrusion x2 Protrusion F 9 84 3 Open the Toner Replacement Cover 4 Remove the 2 Finisher Connection Covers The removed Finisher Connection Cover will not be used 1 Claw each x2 5 Remove th...

Page 1041: ...t Delivery Support Base 1 using the removed screws x2 x2 F 9 87 F 9 88 8 Remove the screw and install the Shift Delivery Support Base 2 using the removed screw and the screw included in the package 1 Screw RS Tightening M4x8 CAUTION The 2 screws used are different in length Be sure to install them to the correct positions x2 screw included in the package M4x8 removed screw M4x10 9 Install the Shif...

Page 1042: ...tallation Procedure Installation Shift Tray E1 Installation Procedure 10 Install the Shift Tray Cover Install the Shift Tray Cover 2 Claws 3 Stepped Screws Use the screws removed in step 6 x3 Claw x2 F 9 91 11 Install the Shift Tray Shaft F 9 92 ...

Page 1043: ...ation Procedure 12 Install the Shift Tray 2 Protrusions Protrusion 13 Install the Reinforcing Plate 2 Screws RS Tightening M4x20 x2 F 9 93 F 9 94 14 Install the Harness Fixing Plate attached to the end of the Shift Tray Cable 1 Claw 1 Boss 1 Screw RS Tightening M4x8 2 connectors Boss Claw x2 F 9 95 ...

Page 1044: ...ing to the host machine into the groove when installing the unit x2 Rubber Cap Rubber Cap F 9 96 16 Install the Left Upper Cover 17 Remove the Face Cover from the Delivery Cover removed in step 6 18 Install the Face Cover removed in step 17 and the Face Cover included in the package 19 Close the Toner Replacement Cover 20 Return the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable to t...

Page 1045: ... Installed Europe only Reader Heater Unit Prepare the following parts because each part of the Cassette Heater Unit is assigned as service part NO Parts name Parts Number Q ty 1 Reader Heater 200V FK2 7164 000 1 pc 2 Flat Screw M4 x4 XA9 1956 000 4 pc 3 Heater Sheet FC8 6060 000 1 sheet Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power sw...

Page 1046: ...rocedure 1 Open the DADF 2 Remove the right retainer cover 2 screws x2 F 9 99 F 9 100 3 Remove the DF cable cover 2 screws x2 CAUTION When removing the copyboard glass be sure not to get your fingers touched with the glass surface or the backside of the white plate In case the glass is soiled clean it with lint free paper F 9 102 F 9 101 ...

Page 1047: ...t Installation Procedure 4 Remove the copy board glass 5 Align the 5 heater sheets in the marking line and put them on Marking line F 9 103 F 9 104 6 Install the reader heater 4 screws flat head M4X4 2 bosses CAUTION Do not scratch surface of the wire and the Scanner Rail x4 Boss Guide Shaft F 9 105 ...

Page 1048: ...tion Reader Heater Unit Installation Procedure 7 Pass the connecter under the wire and the Scanner Rail CAUTION Do not scratch surface of the wire and the Scanner Rail Wire Scanner Rail F 9 106 8 To make a space A to put the harness through loosen the screw A Hole Screw F 9 107 ...

Page 1049: ...in the 4 places NOTE Make sure to keep the harness tightly put x4 Guide Guide 10 Open the 2 Edge Saddles put the connector through a hole of the plate and then secure in place using the 2 Edge Saddles edge F 9 108 F 9 109 11 Release the wire saddle and connect the connector Wire saddle 12 Secure the harness in place using the Wire Saddle sheet Wire saddle F 9 110 F 9 111 ...

Page 1050: ... check that the sheet is on the plate Sheet Sheet F 9 112 13 Aligning with the boss tighten the screw that has been loosened in step 8 14 Install the removed cover Copy board glass DF cable cover Right retainer cover 15 Close the DADF 16 Turn ON the environment switch 17 Insert the power plug to the outlet 18 Turn the main power switch ON ...

Page 1051: ...ce part No Parts Name Parts Number Q ty 1 Cassette Heater Unit FM3 4855 000 1 pc 2 Screw RS tightening M4x8 XB6 6400 805 2 pc Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug F 9 113 T 9 4 Installatio...

Page 1052: ...t Installation Procedure Installation Cassette Heater Unit Installation Procedure 6 Pull out Cassette 3 to remove 4 Screws x4 7 Put the 2 Rails in F 9 116 F 9 117 8 Remove the Connector Cover 1 Claw 2 Protrusions Protrusion Protrusion Claw F 9 118 ...

Page 1053: ...he Holes of the Host Machine Protrusion Protrusion Hole Hole F 9 119 10 Fit the 2 bosses of the host machine into the holes of the Cassette Heater Unit to install the Cassette Heater Unit 2 Screws RS tightening M4x8 CAUTION The unit may be fallen down if misaligned from the bosses so be sure to hold the lower part by hand until the screws are tightened Boss Hole Boss Hole x2 F 9 120 ...

Page 1054: ...stalled Cassette 3 with 4 screws close Cassette 3 F 9 121 F 9 122 16 Pull out the Rails at the installation area of the Right Deck 17 Fit the 4 pins on the Rails with the grooves of the Right Deck to place the Right Deck over the Rails 18 After having installed Right Deck with 2 screws close the Right Deck 19 Install the Left Deck o the Right Deck in the same way 20 Close the Front Cover 21 Turn o...

Page 1055: ...5 9 5 1 6 3 7 11 8 12 4 2 10 5 8 A A 11 6 12 4 2 10 5 1 3 5 5 7 9 No Parts Name Parts Number Q ty 1 Heater Unit FG6 9651 000 1pc 2 AC Input Connector FK3 0631 000 1pc 3 Relay Harness Unit FG6 2957 000 1pc 4 AC Cable FG6 1117 000 1pc 5 Screw with Toothed Washer XB2 7400 607 3pcs 6 Cable Protection Bushing WT2 5098 000 1pc 7 Power Supply Label FS6 8725 000 1pc 8 Screw Binding M4x4 XB1 2400 409 2pcs ...

Page 1056: ... disconnect the power plug CAUTION When installing the heater to the paper deck take the following precautions a The AC power plug of the host machine must have been removed from the outlet b Install the heater after installing the host machine and paper deck c Use correct screws length and diameters at correct positions Installation Procedure Paper Deck Unit A1 1 Disconnect the connector of the p...

Page 1057: ...Deck Heater Unit A1 Installation Procedure Paper Deck Unit A1 3 Detach the right cover of the paper deck 3 screws x3 4 Detech the rear cover of the paper deck 6 screws M3x8 2pcs M4x8 4pcs x6 F 9 128 F 9 129 5 Detach the front upper cover 3 screws 1 connector x3 x1 6 Detach the top cover 2 screws x2 F 9 130 F 9 131 ...

Page 1058: ...he top panel of the paper deck and then take the connector out from the hole on the top plate 9 Insert 2 hooks of the heater unit into the holes on the top plate of the paper deck and then secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck 1 screw with toothed washer x1 F 9 132 F 9 133 10 Attach the heater connector to the panel mount 11 Remove the blindfold plate from the power core mount ...

Page 1059: ... RS tight M4x8 A x2 x2 14 Insert the bind locks of the cable ties in the holes at A shown below in the rear side panel to secure the relay harness 15 Connect the connector at both ends of the relay harness unit to the heater connector and AC power connector respectively 16 Reatach the exterior covers of the paper deck in the following sequence 1 Top cover take care not to have the cables caught 2 ...

Page 1060: ...er Deck Heater Unit A1 Installation Procedure Paper Deck Unit A1 17 Remove the Harness 2 wire saddles 18 Remove the Left Rear Cover 1 claw 1 protrusion Projection Claw F 9 138 F 9 139 19 Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable 20 Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow 4 screws x4 F 9 140 F 9 141 ...

Page 1061: ...Cover in the direction of the arrow 3 screws x3 22 Remove the blindfold plate 2 screws x2 NOTE Removed blindfold plate and screw are no longer reused F 9 142 F 9 143 23 Insert the AC cord into the hole of the cord mount and then secure the ground cable to the cord mount 1 screw with toothed washer x1 24 Attach the cord mount on the host machine 1 connector 2 screws Binding M4x4 x2 x1 F 9 144 F 9 1...

Page 1062: ... following sequence 1 Rear Lower Cover 3 screws RS tight M4x10 2 Close the Controller Box 4 screws RS tight M4x10 3 Connect the Reader Communication Cable 1 claw 1 protrusion 4 Fix the Harness 2 wire saddles 27 Close the deck compartment Manually slide the paper deck to the left place in aside of the host machine F 9 146 28 Stick the power supply label on the rear panel of the paper deck 29 Fix th...

Page 1063: ...machine then fit the reuse band of the AC cable and 3 wire saddles as shown Wire the AC cable as shown in the figure and joint the AC connector to the power cord mount of the heater x3 x1 x3 F 9 149 CAUTION To ensure smooth connection of the heater power connectors explain to the user that any obstacle that can prevent the paper deck from opening should not be placed in the hatched area 1 Host mac...

Page 1064: ...Paper Deck Unit D1 1 Disconnect the connector of the paper deck from the host machine x1 x1 2 Release the paper deck from the host machine and then press down the latch plate of the paper deck housing with your finger to open the housing F 9 151 F 9 152 3 Detach the right cover of the paper deck 3 screws x3 4 Detech the rear cover of the paper deck 7 screws M3x8 2pcs M4x8 5pcs 1 x7 F 9 153 F 9 154...

Page 1065: ...nit D1 5 Detach the front upper cover 4 screws 1 connector x4 x1 6 Detach the top cover 2 4 screws 1 x4 F 9 155 F 9 156 7 Atach the supplied cable protection bushing 1 into the hole on the top panel of the paper deck 8 Detach the heater support plate 3 2 screws 2 x2 9 Atach the heater support plate 2 to the heater unit 3 1 screw with toothed washer 1 x1 F 9 157 F 9 158 ...

Page 1066: ... 1 under the top plate 2 and take out the connector 3 from the hole 4 of the top plate 11 Hang the two hooks 5 of the heater unit on the top plate and fix by the 2 screws 6 x2 x2 12 Attach the heater connector 2 to the panel mount 1 F 9 159 F 9 160 13 Remove the blindfold plate from the power core mount of the papar deck 1 screw x1 NOTE Removed blindfold plate and screw are no longer reused F 9 16...

Page 1067: ...RS tight M4x8 1 16 Insert the bind locks of the cable ties in the holes at 3 shown below in the rear side panel to secure the relay harness 17 Connect the connector at both ends of the relay harness unit to the heater connector 4 and AC power connector 4 respectively x2 x2 18 Reatach the exterior covers of the paper deck in the following sequence 1 Top cover take care not to have the cables caught...

Page 1068: ...er Deck Heater Unit A1 Installation Procedure Paper Deck Unit D1 19 Remove the Harness 2 wire saddles 20 Remove the Left Rear Cover 1 claw 1 protrusion Projection Claw F 9 164 F 9 165 21 Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable 22 Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow 4 screws x4 F 9 166 F 9 167 ...

Page 1069: ...Cover in the direction of the arrow 3 screws x3 24 Remove the blindfold plate 2 screws x2 NOTE Removed blindfold plate and screw are no longer reused F 9 168 F 9 169 25 Insert the AC cord into the hole of the cord mount and then secure the ground cable to the cord mount 1 screw with toothed washer x1 26 Attach the cord mount on the host machine 1 connector 2 screws Binding M4x4 x2 x1 F 9 170 F 9 1...

Page 1070: ... following sequence 1 Rear Lower Cover 3 screws RS tight M4x10 2 Close the Controller Box 4 screws RS tight M4x10 3 Connect the Reader Communication Cable 1 claw 1 protrusion 4 Fix the Harness 2 wire saddles 29 Close the deck compartment Manually slide the paper deck to the left place in aside of the host machine F 9 172 30 Stick the power supply label on the rear panel of the paper deck 31 Fix th...

Page 1071: ... machine then fit the reuse band of the AC cable and 3 wire saddles as shown Wire the AC cable as shown in the figure and joint the AC connector to the power cord mount of the heater x3 x1 x3 F 9 175 CAUTION To ensure smooth connection of the heater power connectors explain to the user that any obstacle that can prevent the paper deck from opening should not be placed in the hatched area 1 Host ma...

Page 1072: ...Tray A1 A2 Checking the Contents The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used 6 Screw TP M4x8 X 10 5 Keyboard Table Plate X 1 1 Utility Tray Unit X 1 2 Wire Saddle X 5 4 Screw TP M4x10 X 2 3 Screw TP M4x14 X 4 Use 3 of them Included in A2 only Included in A2 only Use when installing the USB Keyboard F 9 177 ...

Page 1073: ...rocedure is applied to model with the Flat Control Panel 1 Remove packing tapes 2 Loosen the 2 screws of the Utility Tray Unit and remove the Utility Tray Mounting Plate In Case of Utility Tray A1 Screw F 9 178 In Case of Utility Tray A2 Loosen the 2 screws and move the Utility Tray Mounting Plate in the direction of the arrow until it stops Utility Tray Mounting Plate CAUTION Be sure not to pull ...

Page 1074: ...bber Caps from the Right Upper Cover The removed Rubber Caps will not be used 4 Install the Mounting Plate 3 Screws TP M4x14 x3 F 9 181 F 9 182 5 Install the Utility Tray 2 Screws TP M4x10 2 Screws TP The screws loosened in step 2 x2 When Installing the USB Keyboard 1 Remove the 2 Cap Covers and install the 5 Wire Saddles Wire Saddles Cap Cover F 9 183 F 9 184 ...

Page 1075: ...ntents Contents of Card Reader C1 Card Reader C1 Copy Card Reader F1 Points to Note at Installation CAUTION To install this equipment the Copy Card Reader Attachment A2 is required Checking the Contents Contents of Card Reader C1 The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used 1 Card Reader X 1 2 Toothed Washer X 1 3 Screw RS Tightening M4x8 X 1 F 9 185 ...

Page 1076: ...ontents Contents of Copy Card Reader Attachment A2 Contents of Copy Card Reader Attachment A2 1 Card Reader Mounting Plate X 1 2 Card Reader X 1 5 Card Reader External Relay Harness X 1 7 Cord Guide X 1 10 Screw RS tight M4x8 X 1 6 Connector Case X 2 8 PCB Spacer X 1 9 Screw TP M4x12 X 1 4 Connector Cover2 X 1 11 Screw Bindeing M4x20 X 1 12 Screw TP M3x6 X 1 3 Connector Cover1 X 1 F 9 186 ...

Page 1077: ...20 1pc No Yes 12 Screw TP M3x6 1pc Yes Yes Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug T 9 6 Installation Procedure CAUTION Refer to Combination of options when installing this equipment before o...

Page 1078: ...l be used in step 13 2 Hooks Hook Hook 3 Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable 4 Hold the handle and remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while holding the cables USB Cable Main Controller PCB 1 x2 Handle Control Panel Cable F 9 188 F 9 189 5 Remove the Face Cover The removed Face Cover will not be used 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 7 x2 6 Install the PCB Spacer F 9 1...

Page 1079: ... Screws Use the screws removed in step 5 1 Screw TP M3x6 1 Connector x3 8 Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops CAUTION Install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables 9 Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable F 9 192 10 Remove the screw The removed screw will be used in step 12 x2 11 Connect the Card Reader External Relay Harness F 9 193 F 9 194 ...

Page 1080: ...ernal Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cover 13 Install the Side Cover by putting the Card Reader External Relay Harness through a hole of the cover 2 Hooks 1 Screw Use the screw removed in step 2 Hole Hook Hook F 9 195 F 9 196 14 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 15 Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit and change the position of the cable Copy Card Reader F1 only 1 Screw 16 Insta...

Page 1081: ...ng Plate 1 Toothed Washer 1 Screw RS Tightening M4x8 18 2 Install the Card Reader Unit assembled in step 18 1 1 Screw TP M4x12 F 9 199 F 9 200 In the Case of Flat Control Panel 18 1 Install the Card Reader 1 Toothed Washer 1 Screw Binding M4x20 19 Put the connector of the Card Reader Unit through the hole on the Card Reader Mounting Plate Upright Control Panel only 20 Connect the connectors of the...

Page 1082: ... Case CAUTION When installing the Connector Cases be sure to place the tie wrap on the Card Reader External Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cases Tie wrap Tie wrap F 9 203 22 Secure the Card Reader External Relay Harness to the Cord Guide In the Case of Upright Control Panel 22 1 Remove the cover of Cord Guide and affix it to the area indicated in the figure F 9 204 ...

Page 1083: ... NOTE When installing it be sure A part does not interfere when opening closing the Right Rear Cover 1 A F 9 205 In the Case of Flat Control Panel 22 1 Remove the cover of Cord Guide and affix it to the area indicated in the figure NOTE Be sure to affix the Cord Guide above A area for not interfering to open close the Right Rear Cover 1 A 22 2 Put the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the...

Page 1084: ...ged if a request arises from a user Make this setting before the step 3 Specify the number of cards to be used in service mode Level 2 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CARD RNG To enable the number of sheets turn OFF ON the main power switch After that go through the procedure from step 2 2 Enter the card number to be used 1 to 2001 Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD NOTE 1000 cards from the inputted n...

Page 1085: ...not be used 1 Speaker Unit Upper X 1 2 Speaker Unit Lower X 1 3 Voice Guidance Board Unit X 1 4 Speaker Cable X 1 5 Cord Guide X 7 6 Ring Core X 2 9 Screw TP M3x6 X 4 8 Screw Binding M4x6 X 1 7 Screw Binding M4x20 X 2 Use 4 of them 10 Screw Binding M4x16 X 2 11 Screw Binding M3x16 X 1 14 Support Plate X 1 12 Cable Face Seal X 1 13 Card Spacer X 1 Included with F2 only Included with F2 only Include...

Page 1086: ...CAUTION Refer to Combination of options when installing this equipment before operation NOTE Although model with the Upright Control Panel is used for illustration in this procedure the same procedure is applied to model with the Flat Control Panel 1 Press A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A F 9 210 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in step 11 2 Hooks Hook Hook 3 ...

Page 1087: ...he part be sure not to make burrs A F 9 214 5 Install the Voice Guidance Board Unit to the Main Controller PCB 1 1 Connector 4 Screws TP M3x6 NOTE Check that the connector is connected properly x4 Connector 6 Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops CAUTION Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables 7 Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Ca...

Page 1088: ...Board Unit 11 Install the Side Cover by putting the Speaker Cable through a hole of the cover 2 Hooks 1 Screw Use the screw removed in step 2 12 Put the Speaker Cable through the guide Hole Hook Hook Guide F 9 217 F 9 218 9 Attach the 2 Ring Cores to both ends of the Speaker Cable CAUTION Be sure to attach the Ring Cores within 50mm from the end of the Speaker Cable 50mm F 9 216 F 9 215 ...

Page 1089: ...ffix them to the area indicated in the figure NOTE When affixing it be sure to keep 30mm or more distance from the end of the Rear Upper Cover to prevent interfering with opening closing the Right Rear Cover 1 30 mm F 9 221 F 9 222 13 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 14 Remove the 2 Rubber Caps from the Right Upper Cover The removed Rubber Caps will not be used 15 Install the Speaker Unit Lower 2 Scre...

Page 1090: ...t the setting is ON Operation Check When Starting to Use 1 Press reset key 3 secs or more 2 Press Main Menu in Control Panel 3 If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame Voice Guidance Kit is available If Voice Guidance Kit doesn t properly operate check the below Enter Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION and check whether languages to be used for TTS JA TTS EN TTS IT TTS FR TTS ES TTS...

Page 1091: ...Bus F1 F2 is required Procedures after Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 will falls into 3 Types according to the installation combination Reference Pages in the Manual According to Product Combination Title Reference for procedure Expansion Bus F1 F2 IPSec Board B2 Wireless LAN Board B1 Reference Pages in the Manual Type 1 Refer to Installing the Expansion Bus F1 F2 and the IPSec Board B2 Simult...

Page 1092: ...AN Board B1 Checking the Contents IPSec Boa Checking the Contents The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used Expansion Bus F1 F2 1 PCI Bus Expansion PCB X 1 5 PCI Riser Support Plate X 1 3 PCB Spacer X 3 2 Riser Support Plate X 1 4 Screw TP M3x6 X 5 Included with F2 only IPSec Board B2 3 Wireless LAN Auxiliary Plate 1 2 Screw TP M3 6 2 1 IPSec PCB 1 CD Guides FCC IC Instr...

Page 1093: ... F2 IPSec Board B2 and Wireless LAN Board B1 Checking the Contents Wireless L Wireless LAN Board B1 1 Wireless LAN Board x 1 2 Bulk Head Unit x 1 4 Wireless LAN Auxiliary Plate x 1 5 Wireless LAN Support Plate x 1 3 Expansion Support Plate x 1 6 MFP Antenna x 1 7 Cord Guide L90 x 3 8 Wireless LAN Indication Label x 1 11 Screw TP M3x6 x 5 10 Antenna Tape x 1Sheet 9 Wireless LAN Support Plate x 1 F ...

Page 1094: ...IPSec Board B2 and Wireless LAN Board B1 Check Items when Turning OFF the CD Guides User s Manual Wireless LAN User s Manual CD FCC IC Instruction Sheet USA only Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the ...

Page 1095: ...he Upright Control Panel is used for illustration in this procedure the same procedure is applied to model with the Flat Control Panel Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 1 Press A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A F 9 228 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in step 7 2 hocks Hook Hook 3 Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable 4 Hold the handle and remov...

Page 1096: ...ing the Expansion Bus F1 F2 and the IPSec Board B2 Simultaneously 1 Install the Expansion PCB to the Riser Support Plate 2 Screws TP M3x6 Included in the Expansion Bus Kit x2 2 Install the 3 PCB Spacers F 9 231 F 9 232 3 Insert the Expansion PCB into the connector on the Main Controller PCB 1 to install it 3 Screws TP M3x6 Included in the Expansion Kit x3 4 Insert the IPSec PCB into the connector ...

Page 1097: ... the IPSec Board B2 Simultaneously CAUTION Point to Caution at Installation Be careful to install the correct Wireless LAN Support Plate F 9 235 CAUTION Point to Caution at Installation When installing the Bulkhead Unit be sure to place the flat side of the terminal at upper side 1 Install the Bulkhead Unit to the Wireless LAN Support Plate 2 Screws TP M3x6 Included in the Wireless LAN Board x2 Wi...

Page 1098: ...n PCB and install it to the Expansion Support Plate 1 Screw TP M3x6 Included in the Wireless LAN Board 4 Remove the Face Plate from the Main Controller PCB 1 The removed Face Plate will not be used 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 7 x2 F 9 238 F 9 239 5 Install the 3 PCB Spacers included in the Expansion Bus Kit 6 Install the Expansion Support Plate assembled in step 3 to the Main ...

Page 1099: ...ring the Wireless LAN Support Plate in place using the screws be careful not to trap the Fan Cable x4 8 Insert the terminal of the Bulkhead Unit to the position shown in the figure NOTE Check that the terminal is installed properly F 9 242 F 9 243 NOTE When installing the IPSec Board go through the steps 9 through 11 When not installing it go on to the step 12 9 Remove the plate of the IPSec PCB T...

Page 1100: ...to the connector on the Expansion PCB to install it 2 Screws TP M3x6 Included in the IPSec Board x2 CAUTION Install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables 12 Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops 13 Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable 14 Insert the terminal of the Antenna for MFP into the terminal of the Main Controller PCB 1 F 9 246 F 9 247 15 ...

Page 1101: ... Adhesive Tape to the Antenna for MFP and affix the antenna to the host machine CAUTION Point to Caution at Installation When opening closing the Right Rear Cover be careful not to trap cables NOTE Keep the remaining tapes for later use as needed Antenna for MFP Antenna Adhesive Tape 18 Remove the covers of 3 Cord Guides F 9 249 F 9 250 CAUTION Point to Caution at Installation Be sure to affix the...

Page 1102: ...rd Guide Covers F 9 254 21 Affix the Wireless LAN Label Checking after Installation In the Case that the IPSec Board is Installed 1 Connect the power plug to the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Select Settings Registration Preferences Network Confirm Network Connection Set Changes and set the item ON 4 Select Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings 5 Check that IPSec Set...

Page 1103: ...t Checking before Installation 1 Check the memory capacity Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY ACC STS RAM 2 Get out from service mode Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug F 9 256 Installation Pro...

Page 1104: ...ansion RAM NOTE Be sure to insert it until it stops 3 Return the Rear Small Cover to its original position 4 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 5 Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch F 9 258 Checking after Installation 1 Check that the memory capacity is increased Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY ACC STS RAM 2 Get out from service mode ...

Page 1105: ... Data Encryption Mirroring Kit p 9 148 to p 9 169 TYPE 4 to 7 correspond to CASE 5 described in HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C Series Installation Procedure included in HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit C2 TYPE 5 2 Option HDDs 250GB HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit p 9 170 to p 9 191 TYPE 6 HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit p 9 192 to p 9 208 TYPE 7 Option HDD 250GB HDD ...

Page 1106: ... Checking the Contents CAUTION If a Grounding Plate is included in the package of the Option HDD do not use the HDD Grounding Plate It may cause reduction in the transfer speed of the HDD F 9 259 1 HDD Support Plate x 1 2 HDD x 1 3 Anti vibration Damper x 4 4 Spacer x 4 5 Screw W SEMS M3x14 x 4 6 Screw TP M3x6 x 2 7 Gasket x 1 CD Guides FCC IC Sheet F 9 260 ...

Page 1107: ...s 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication user authentication s...

Page 1108: ...rence only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure 1 Procedure to make a backu...

Page 1109: ...cation to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this function With regard to the license there is a ne...

Page 1110: ... the file and click Save 9 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data CAUTION Backup of Advanced Box When setting a SMB server as a backup destination Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD Depending on the system version of the machine both backup and restoratio...

Page 1111: ...nformation Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 Select Basic Tools Quick Menu Export 3 If the file needs to be en...

Page 1112: ... are turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Assembling the Option HDD CAUTION When assembling the Option HDD be sure to pay attention to the direction Be sure that the label face of the Option HDD is up Be sure that the A part of the HDD Support Plate is on the other side of the connecter A Connecter Label F 9 261 1 Assemble the Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD Support Plate 4 Anti vibration Dampers ...

Page 1113: ...HDD 250GB Procedure to Replace with the HDD Procedure to Replace with the HDD 1 Push A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A 2 Open the HDD Cap 1 Rubber cap 1 Screw F 9 263 F 9 264 3 Turn the HDD Fixed Plate toward the front 1 Screw 4 Remove the HDD The removed HDD will not be used 2 Connecters x2 F 9 265 F 9 266 ...

Page 1114: ...n HDD 250GB Procedure to Replace with the HDD 5 Insert the assembled Option HDD 6 Connect 2 connecters to the Option HDD x2 F 9 267 F 9 268 7 Return the HDD Fixed Plate to its original position 1 Screw 8 Close the HDD Cap 1 Screw 1 Rubber cap 9 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 10 Connect the power plug to the outlet ...

Page 1115: ...fe mode 3 Selecting the System Software 1 Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used 2 Start up the SST 3 Click Register Firmware 4 Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set and click SEARCH 5 Click REGISTER 6 Click OK 4 Downloading the System Software 1 Click CONNECT 2 From the list of machine series select the appropriate model 3 Selec...

Page 1116: ... Caution Label X 1 1 HDD Drawer Unit X 1 3 HDD Lock Pin X 2 2 HDD Lock Pin X 2 5 HDD Connector Plate X 2 4 HDD Cover X 2 Use 1 of them Use 1 of them 6 HDD Connector Plate X 2 Use 1 of them 8 Connector Fixation Block X 2 7 Conversion Connector X 2 Use 1 of them Use 1 of them 10 Screw P Tightening M3x8 X 4 Use 2 of them 9 Screw TP Round End M3x6 X 8 Use 6 of them 12 R HDD Label X 1 F 9 269 ...

Page 1117: ... is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit 1 Push A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A F 9 270 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw 2 hooks Hook Hook 3 Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2...

Page 1118: ...re Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit 5 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 4 Screws RS Tightening 3 Screws TP x7 6 Open the HDD Cap 1 Rubber Cap 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used 7 Return the rubber cap to the HDD cap F 9 273 F 9 274 8 Turn the HDD Fixed Plate toward the front 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used 9 Remove the HDD 2 Connectors x2 F 9 275 F 9 276 ...

Page 1119: ...Procedure Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit 10 Open the Controller Box and disconnect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable on the host machine Disconnected cables will not be used 2 Connectors 9 Wire Saddles 2 Edge Saddles x2 x11 F 9 277 11 Remove the HDD Case Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in Installing the HDD Case Unit step 1 x2 F 9 278 ...

Page 1120: ...DD Removed from the Host Machine 1 Disassemble the removed HDD 4 Screws W Sems 1 Screw TP 1 HDD Grounding Plate NOTE If the removed HDD has the screw TP and the HDD Grounding Plate remove them The removed screw TP and the HDD Grounding Plate will not be used 1 HDD Support Plate HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Grounding Plate x4 TP F 9 279 CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to install the ...

Page 1121: ...moved from the Host Machin NOTE Use the parts disassembled in step 1 and parts included in the Removable HDD Kit 2 Assemble the HDD disassembled in step 1 1 HDD Support Plate 1 HDD Connector Plate Included in the Removable HDD Kit 1 HDD 4 Screws W Sems HDD x4 Connector HDD Connector Plate HDD Support Plate F 9 281 3 Install the Conversion Connector CAUTION Be sure that there is no gap between the ...

Page 1122: ...ified below 2 Screws P Tightening M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact F 9 283 x2 Hole Boss F 9 284 5 Install the HDD Cover 1 Claw 1 Screw TP Round End M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end sc...

Page 1123: ...o HDD No XXXXXXXX Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit 1 Remove the E ring from the removed HDD Case Unit remove the shaft of the HDD Cap and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used HDD Fixed Plate 2 Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit and secure the HDD Case Unit with the E ring F 9 287 F 9 288 3 Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD...

Page 1124: ...removed in step 3 x2 Hole Hole Boss Boss 7 Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it 2 Screws TP Round End M3x6 8 Close the Edge Saddle x2 Edge Saddle F 9 291 F 9 292 Installing the HDD Case Unit 1 Install the HDD Case Unit 2 Hooks 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the screws removed in Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit step 11 NOTE Be careful not to catch the plate of the h...

Page 1125: ...is step C h A x2 x5 A CAUTION Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable is not overloaded F 9 295 F 9 294 3 Fold extra length of the CH B Cable FK2 7837 and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles CAUTION Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw A of Drawer When securing the cable be sure that it does not go over to the front When the FA...

Page 1126: ...k Hook F 9 299 8 Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language on the HDD Cap 9 Close the HDD Cap and install the key prepared by the user for locking NOTE Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller Size width x depth x height 67mmx14mmx64mm 10 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 11 Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position and secure the Reader Co...

Page 1127: ...250GB TYPE 3 Option HDD 250GB Removable HDD Kit Checking the Contents CAUTION If a Grounding Plate is included in the package of the Option HDD do not use the HDD Grounding Plate It may cause reduction in the transfer speed of the HDD F 9 302 Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD Support Plate x 1 2 HDD x 1 3 Anti vibration Damper x 4 4 Spacer x 4 5 Screw W SEMS M3x14 x 4 6 Screw TP M3x6 x 2 7 Gasket x 1 F 9 303...

Page 1128: ...C Sheet Removable HDD Kit 11 HDD Caution Label X 1 1 HDD Drawer Unit X 1 3 HDD Lock Pin X 2 2 HDD Lock Pin X 2 5 HDD Connector Plate X 2 4 HDD Cover X 2 Use 1 of them Use 1 of them 6 HDD Connector Plate X 2 Use 1 of them 8 Connector Fixation Block X 2 7 Conversion Connector X 2 Use 1 of them Use 1 of them 10 Screw P Tightening M3x8 X 4 Use 2 of them 9 Screw TP Round End M3x6 X 8 Use 6 of them 12 R...

Page 1129: ...e Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication user...

Page 1130: ...p of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure 1 Procedu...

Page 1131: ...dow specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this function With regard to the lic...

Page 1132: ...e location to save the file and click Save 9 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data CAUTION Backup of Advanced Box When setting a SMB server as a backup destination Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD Depending on the system version of the machine both bac...

Page 1133: ...ed 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 Select Basic Tools Quick Menu Export 3 If the f...

Page 1134: ... the power plug Installation Procedure Assembling the Option HDD CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to install the HDD Connector to the side with screw holes of the HDD Connector Plate Screw Hole Screw Hole Connector Label F 9 305 NOTE Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit 1 Assemble the Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD Support Plate 4 Anti vibratio...

Page 1135: ... the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector F 9 307 3 Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion Connector to install and tighten the screws in the order specified below 2 Screws P Tightening M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the C...

Page 1136: ...re to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Claw 5 Install the HDD Handle 2 Screws TP Round End M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 310 F 9 311 6 Affix the HDD No 1 of the R HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 7 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recordin...

Page 1137: ...ng the HDD and HDD Case Unit Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit 1 Push A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw 2 hooks Hook Hook F 9 313 F 9 314 3 Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2 Wire Saddles 4 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Protrusions x2 Protrusion 5 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 4 Screws RS Tightening 3 Screws TP x7 F...

Page 1138: ... Removable HDD Kit Installation Procedure Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit 6 Open the HDD Cap 1 Rubber cap 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used 7 Return the rubber cap to the HDD cap 8 Turn the HDD Fixed Plate toward the front 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used F 9 317 F 9 318 9 Remove the HDD The removed HDD will not be used 2 Connectors x2 F 9 319 ...

Page 1139: ...st machine Disconnected cables will not be used 2 Connectors 9 Wire Saddles 2 Edge Saddles x2 x11 F 9 320 11 Remove the HDD Case Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in Installing the HDD Case Unit step 1 x2 Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit 1 Remove the E ring from the removed HDD Case Unit remove the shaft of the HDD Cap and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate The removed HDD F...

Page 1140: ...n step 6 x2 4 Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed rail in the order of the arrows in the figure below The removed Leaf Spring will not be used 2 Bosses 2 Arms Boss Turn over Boss Arm F 9 323 F 9 324 5 Install the 2 HDD Lock Pins and the 2 HDD Lock Springs to the removed rail 6 Return the rail to its original position 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the screws removed in step 3 x2 Hole Hole Boss Boss 7 I...

Page 1141: ...oving the HDD and HDD Case Unit step 11 NOTE Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear side of the HDD Case Unit otherwise the installation work may become difficult x2 Hook Boss Hook F 9 327 2 Connect the CH A Cable FK2 7832 to the Main Controller PCB 2 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 4 Wire Saddles NOTE Be sure not to close the 2 Wire Saddles A in this st...

Page 1142: ...es CAUTION Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw A of Drawer When securing the cable be sure that it does not go over to the front When the FAX Board is installed be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB to secure the cable C h B A x2 4 Insert the assembled Removable HDD F 9 330 F 9 331 5 Close the Controller Box 6 Install the Rear Upper Cover NOTE Be sure to in...

Page 1143: ...te language on the HDD Cap 9 Close the HDD Cap and install the key prepared by the user for locking NOTE Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller Size width x depth x height 67mmx14mmx64mm F 9 334 F 9 335 10 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 11 Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position and secure the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply...

Page 1144: ...n download mode safe mode 3 Selecting the System Software 1 Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used 2 Start up the SST 3 Click Register Firmware 4 Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set and click SEARCH 5 Click REGISTER 6 Click OK 4 Downloading the System Software 1 Click CONNECT 2 From the list of machine series select the appropr...

Page 1145: ...king HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents CAUTION If a Grounding Pla...

Page 1146: ...ption HDD 8 Installation TYPE 4 Option HDD 80GB HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Contents Option HDD 8 Option HDD 80GB 1 HDD Support Plate x 1 2 HDD x 1 3 Anti vibration Damper x 4 4 Spacer x 4 5 Screw W SEMS M3x14 x 4 6 Screw TP M3x6 x 2 7 Gasket x 1 Use 1 of them CD Guides FCC IC Sheet F 9 337 ...

Page 1147: ...Mirroring Board or Encryption Board X 1 2 LED Board X 1 7 LED Cable 310mm FM3 9158 X 1 9 LED Label X 1 6 STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 X 1 3 Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 X 2 4 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7826 X 1 5 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7827 X 1 8 Screw TP M3x6 X 6 CD Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation FCC IC Sheet CD Guides of HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit...

Page 1148: ...o Send Function Favorite Settings Yes Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authenti...

Page 1149: ...Manual MEAP T 9 14 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the...

Page 1150: ...owing the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using thi...

Page 1151: ...ructions on the window specify the location to save the file and click Save 9 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data CAUTION Backup of Advanced Box When setting a SMB server as a backup destination Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD Depending on the syste...

Page 1152: ... sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 Select Basic T...

Page 1153: ...n Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure Removing the Covers 1 Push A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A F 9 339 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw 2 hooks Hook Hook 3 Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Powe...

Page 1154: ...Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing the C 5 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 4 Screws RS Tightening 3 Screws TP x7 6 Open the HDD Cap 1 Rubber cap 1 Screw F 9 342 F 9 343 7 Turn the HDD Fixed Plate toward the front 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board step 13 8 Remove the HDD 2 Connectors x2 F 9 344 F 9 345 ...

Page 1155: ...ation Procedure Installing the M 9 Remove the Face Plate The removed Face Plate and screw will not be used 1 Screw F 9 346 Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board NOTE The following shows combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Connect CH A to Slot 1 The original HDD Connect CH B to Slot 2 The new HDD Slot 1 HDD1 Slot 2 HDD2 CH A CH B Power Supply Cable Power ...

Page 1156: ...llation Procedure Installing the M 1 Open the Controller Box and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case Unit x5 F 9 348 2 Pull out the cables to the front and connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x2 3 Install the Mirroring Board or Encrypti...

Page 1157: ...re Saddles at the back of the HDD Case Unit 5 Free the cables from the 3 Wire Saddles at the front x2 F 9 351 6 Fold extra length of the cable and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles A x2 A 7 Connect the STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 to the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 5 Wire Saddles CAUTION Check that the STS Cable is connected p...

Page 1158: ...Installing the M 8 Install the LED Board to the side surface of the HDD Case Unit 2 Screws TP M3x6 x2 F 9 354 9 Connect the LED Cable 310mm FM3 9158 to the LED Board and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board 2 Connectors 6 Wire Saddles CAUTION Secure the LED Cable in the direction of the arrow Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the machine can oper...

Page 1159: ...the Slot 1 Slot 1 HDD1 Connector side CAUTION When assembling the Option HDD be sure to pay attention to the direction Be sure that the label face of the Option HDD is up Be sure that the A part of the HDD Support Plate is on the other side of the connecter A Connecter Label F 9 357 F 9 356 11 Assemble the Option HDD 80GB for the second HDD 1 HDD Support Plate 4 Anti vibration Dampers 4 Spacers 1 ...

Page 1160: ...emoving the Covers step 7 1 Screw TP M3x6 Use the contents included in the Option HDD x2 F 9 359 F 9 360 14 Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable included in the package to the HDD 14 1 Connect the Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7827 and the Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 to Slot 2 14 2 Connect the Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7826 and the Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 to Slot 1 NOTE When c...

Page 1161: ...e Power Supply Cables to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board CAUTION When connecting the Signal Cables the side labeled ch A or ch B should be connected to CH A or CH B on the board When connecting the Power Supply Cables the cable on the Slot 1 side should be connected to CH A and the other cable on the Slot 2 side should be connected to CH B Slot 1 HDD1 Slot 2 HDD2 CH A CH B Power Supply Cab...

Page 1162: ...ply Cable 1 Edger Saddle 9 Wire Saddles CAUTION Secure the cables so that there is no extra slack of the cables at A part Be sure that the Wire Saddle B is properly securing the cables When the FAX Board is installed be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB to secure the cable x10 A B F 9 364 CAUTION If there is extra slack of the cables be sure to tuck them to the host machine side F 9 ...

Page 1163: ...HDD Cap 1 Screw 1 Rubber cap CAUTION Be sure that the cables do not protrude from the A part of the HDD Cap If the cables protrude from the A part allow extra slack of the cables at the B part and tuck them to the host machine side A B F 9 367 19 Close the Controller Box CAUTION When closing the Controller Box check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not contact with it F 9 368 20 Install t...

Page 1164: ... Installation Procedure Installing the M 21 Install the Side Cover 2 hooks 1 Screw Hook Hook 22 Affix the LED Label F 9 370 F 9 371 23 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 24 Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position and secure the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable in place using the Wire Saddles 25 Connect the power plug to the outlet 26 Turn ON the main power switch ...

Page 1165: ...propriate model 3 Select Single and click start 4 Execute HDD format 5 After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Che...

Page 1166: ...e is limited only for the re building process at the initial installation The error occurred at re building process during operation is not targeted F 9 372 After Installing HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work When you have completed all installation work report to the system administrator for the following At the point when installation i...

Page 1167: ... Unpacking HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents CAUTION If a Groundi...

Page 1168: ...s Option HD Installation TYPE 5 2 Option HDDs 250GB HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Contents Option HD Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD Support Plate x 1 2 HDD x 1 3 Anti vibration Damper x 4 4 Spacer x 4 5 Screw W SEMS M3x14 x 4 6 Screw TP M3x6 x 2 7 Gasket x 1 Use 1 of them CD Guides FCC IC Sheet F 9 374 ...

Page 1169: ...irroring Board or Encryption Board X 1 2 LED Board X 1 7 LED Cable 310mm FM3 9158 X 1 9 LED Label X 1 6 STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 X 1 3 Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 X 2 4 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7826 X 1 5 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7827 X 1 8 Screw TP M3x6 X 6 CD Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation FCC IC Sheet CD Guides of HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit ...

Page 1170: ...ns No Send Function Favorite Settings Yes Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User auth...

Page 1171: ...e e Manual MEAP T 9 16 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of...

Page 1172: ...Following the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using...

Page 1173: ...instructions on the window specify the location to save the file and click Save 9 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data CAUTION Backup of Advanced Box When setting a SMB server as a backup destination Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD Depending on the s...

Page 1174: ...eing sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 Select Bas...

Page 1175: ...ay and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure Assembling the Option HDD CAUTION When assembling the Option HDD be sure to pay attention to the direction Be sure that the label face of the Option HDD is up Be sure that the A part of the HDD Support Plate is on the other side of the connecter A Connecter Label F 9 376 1 Assemble the Option HDD 25...

Page 1176: ...tion Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing Removing the Covers 1 Push A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw 2 hooks Hook Hook F 9 378 F 9 379 3 Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2 Wire Saddles 4 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Protrusions x2 Protrusion 5 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 4 Screws RS Tightening 3 Screws ...

Page 1177: ...ryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing 6 Open the HDD Cap 1 Rubber cap 1 Screw 7 Turn the HDD Fixed Plate toward the front 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board step 11 F 9 382 F 9 383 8 Remove the HDD The removed HDD will not be used 2 Connectors x2 9 Remove the Face Plate The removed Face Plate and screw will not be used 1 Scr...

Page 1178: ...he Mirroring Board or Encryption Board NOTE The following shows combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Connect CH A to Slot 1 The new HDD Connect CH B to Slot 2 The new HDD Slot 1 HDD1 Slot 2 HDD2 CH A CH B Power Supply Cable Power Supply Cable Signal Cable Signal Cable F 9 386 1 Open the Controller Box and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the host ma...

Page 1179: ...Installation Procedure Installing th 2 Pull out the cables to the front and connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x2 3 Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board 4 Screws TP M3x6 x4 F 9 388 F 9 389 4 Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles at the back of the HDD Case Unit 5 Free the cables fr...

Page 1180: ...able and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles A x2 A 7 Connect the STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 to the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 5 Wire Saddles CAUTION Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly x2 x6 Connector Connecto...

Page 1181: ...ocedure Installing th 9 Connect the LED Cable 310mm FM3 9158 to the LED Board and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board 2 Connectors 6 Wire Saddles CAUTION Secure the LED Cable in the direction of the arrow Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly x6 x2 F 9 394 10 Insert the assembled ...

Page 1182: ...TP M3x6 Use the contents included in the Option HDD x2 F 9 396 12 Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable included in the package to the HDD 12 1 Connect the Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7827 and the Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 to Slot 2 12 2 Connect the Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7826 and the Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 to Slot 1 NOTE When connecting the Signal Cables the side label...

Page 1183: ...he Power Supply Cables to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board CAUTION When connecting the Signal Cables the side labeled ch A or ch B should be connected to CH A or CH B on the board When connecting the Power Supply Cables the cable on the Slot 1 side should be connected to CH A and the other cable on the Slot 2 side should be connected to CH B Slot 1 HDD1 Slot 2 HDD2 CH A CH B Power Supply Ca...

Page 1184: ...pply Cable 1 Edger Saddle 9 Wire Saddles CAUTION Secure the cables so that there is no extra slack of the cables at A part Be sure that the Wire Saddle B is properly securing the cables When the FAX Board is installed be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB to secure the cable x10 A B F 9 400 CAUTION If there is extra slack of the cables be sure to tuck them to the host machine side F 9...

Page 1185: ... HDD Cap 1 Screw 1 Rubber cap CAUTION Be sure that the cables do not protrude from the A part of the HDD Cap If the cables protrude from the A part allow extra slack of the cables at the B part and tuck them to the host machine side A B F 9 403 17 Close the Controller Box CAUTION When closing the Controller Box check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not contact with it F 9 404 18 Install ...

Page 1186: ...Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Installing th 19 Install the Side Cover 2 hooks 1 Screw Hook Hook 20 Affix the LED Label F 9 406 F 9 407 21 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 22 Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position and secure the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable in place using the Wire Saddles 23 Connect the power plug to the out...

Page 1187: ...4 Execute HDD format 5 After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in servi...

Page 1188: ... limited only for the re building process at the initial installation The error occurred at re building process during operation is not targeted F 9 408 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work only when HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit has been installed When you have completed all installation work report to the system administrator for the following At the point when instal...

Page 1189: ...ackage has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents 1 Encryption Board X 1 2 LED Board X 1 7 LED Cable 310mm FM3 9158 X 1 9 LED Label X 1 6 STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 X 1 3 Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 X 2 4 Signal Cable 550m...

Page 1190: ... Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication user ...

Page 1191: ... of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure 1 Procedur...

Page 1192: ...ow specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this function With regard to the lice...

Page 1193: ... location to save the file and click Save 9 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data CAUTION Backup of Advanced Box When setting a SMB server as a backup destination Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD Depending on the system version of the machine both back...

Page 1194: ...d 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 Select Basic Tools Quick Menu Export 3 If the fi...

Page 1195: ...r switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure Removing the Covers 1 Push A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A F 9 410 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw 2 hooks Hook Hook 3 Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2 Wire S...

Page 1196: ... Remove the Rear Upper Cover 4 Screws RS Tightening 3 Screws TP x7 6 Open the HDD Cap 1 Rubber cap 1 Screw F 9 413 F 9 414 Installing the Encryption Board NOTE The following shows combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board Connect CH A to Slot 1 The original HDD No HDD to Slot 2 Slot 1 HDD1 Slot 2 Blank CH A CH B Power Supply Cable Power Supply Cable Signal Cable Signal Cable F 9 415 ...

Page 1197: ...steps 1 to 9 but it is not necessary to remove the HDD to perform this procedure 1 Open the Controller Box and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case Unit x5 F 9 416 2 Pull out the cables to the front and connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable to the Encryption Board x2 3 Install the ...

Page 1198: ...ase Unit 5 Free the cables from the 3 Wire Saddles at the front x2 F 9 419 6 Fold extra length of the cable and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles A x2 A 7 Connect the STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 to the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Encryption Board 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 5 Wire Saddles CAUTION Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the machin...

Page 1199: ...oard to the side surface of the HDD Case Unit 2 Screws TP M3x6 x2 F 9 422 9 Connect the LED Cable 310mm FM3 9158 to the LED Board and the Encryption Board 2 Connectors 6 Wire Saddles CAUTION Secure the LED Cable in the direction of the arrow Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly x6 x2...

Page 1200: ...ting the Signal Cables the side labeled HDD1 should be connected to the HDD Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 x2 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7826 F 9 424 11 Put the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable through A part 12 Connect the 2 connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the Encryption Board CAUTION When connecting the Signal Cables the side labeled ch A should be connected ...

Page 1201: ... 1 Edger Saddle 8 Wire Saddles CAUTION Secure the cables so that there is no extra slack of the cables at A part Be sure that the Wire Saddle B is properly securing the cables x9 A B CH A F 9 426 13 2 Connect the Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7827 and the Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 to CH B and secure them in place using the 2 Wire Saddles A 13 3 Fold extra length of the cables and secure them in p...

Page 1202: ...es be sure to tuck them to the host machine side F 9 428 CAUTION Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable is not overloaded F 9 429 14 Close the HDD Cap 1 Screw 1 Rubber cap CAUTION Be sure that the cables do not protrude from the A part of the HDD Cap If the cables protrude from the A part allow extra slack of the cables at the B part and tuck them to ...

Page 1203: ... is not trapped or does not contact with it F 9 431 16 Install the Rear Upper Cover NOTE Be sure to install the 3 TP screws show in the figure below F 9 432 17 Install the Side Cover 2 hooks 1 Screw Hook Hook 18 Affix the LED Label 19 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 20 Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position and secure the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable in pl...

Page 1204: ...fter 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in service mode COPIER Display V...

Page 1205: ...mes uncontrolled the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request Servicing work when a failure occurs Completion of the Installation Work Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2 00 or 2 01 is indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version Maintenance of the Secur...

Page 1206: ...ring Kit A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents CAUTION If a Grounding Plate is included in the package ...

Page 1207: ...s Option HDD 250GB Installation TYPE 7 Option HDD 250GB HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Contents Option HDD 250GB Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD Support Plate x 1 2 HDD x 1 3 Anti vibration Damper x 4 4 Spacer x 4 5 Screw W SEMS M3x14 x 4 6 Screw TP M3x6 x 2 7 Gasket x 1 CD Guides FCC IC Sheet F 9 437 ...

Page 1208: ...ryption Mirroring HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 1 Encryption Board X 1 2 LED Board X 1 7 LED Cable 310mm FM3 9158 X 1 9 LED Label X 1 6 STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 X 1 3 Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 X 2 4 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7826 X 1 5 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7827 X 1 8 Screw TP M3x6 X 6 CD Guides HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit User Documentation HDD Data Encryption Kit Notic...

Page 1209: ...Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local Device Aut...

Page 1210: ...0 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Pro...

Page 1211: ...tions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this function With r...

Page 1212: ...indow specify the location to save the file and click Save 9 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data CAUTION Backup of Advanced Box When setting a SMB server as a backup destination Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD Depending on the system version of the ...

Page 1213: ... stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 Select Basic Tools Quick Menu E...

Page 1214: ...Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure Assembling the Option HDD CAUTION When assembling the Option HDD be sure to pay attention to the direction Be sure that the label face of the Option HDD is up Be sure that the A part of the HDD Support Plate is on the other side of the connecter A Connecter Label F 9 439 1 Assembl...

Page 1215: ...llation Procedure Removing the Covers Removing the Covers 1 Push A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw 2 hooks Hook Hook F 9 441 F 9 442 3 Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2 Wire Saddles 4 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Protrusions x2 Protrusion 5 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 4 Screws RS Tightening 3 Screws TP x7 F 9 443...

Page 1216: ... Option HDD 250GB HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing the Covers 6 Open the HDD Cap 1 Rubber cap 1 Screw 7 Turn the HDD Fixed Plate toward the front 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in Installing the Encryption Board step 11 F 9 445 F 9 446 8 Remove the HDD The removed HDD will not be used 2 Connectors x2 F 9 447 ...

Page 1217: ...e Encryption Board NOTE The following shows combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board Connect CH A to Slot 1 The new HDD No HDD to Slot 2 Slot 1 HDD1 Slot 2 Blank CH A CH B Power Supply Cable Power Supply Cable Signal Cable Signal Cable F 9 448 1 Open the Controller Box and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the...

Page 1218: ...lling the Encryption Board 2 Pull out the cables to the front and connect the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable to the Encryption Board x2 3 Install the Encryption Board 4 Screws TP M3x6 x4 F 9 450 F 9 451 4 Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles at the back of the HDD Case Unit 5 Free the cables from the 3 Wire Saddles at the front x2 F 9 452 ...

Page 1219: ...ith the 2 Wire Saddles A x2 A 7 Connect the STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 to the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Encryption Board 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 5 Wire Saddles CAUTION Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly x2 x6 Connector Connector F 9 453 F 9 454 8 Install the LED Boa...

Page 1220: ...FM3 9158 to the LED Board and the Encryption Board 2 Connectors 6 Wire Saddles CAUTION Secure the LED Cable in the direction of the arrow Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly x6 x2 F 9 456 10 Insert the assembled HDD Connector side 11 Secure the HDD Fixed Plate 1 screw Use the screws...

Page 1221: ... NOTE When connecting the Signal Cables the side labeled HDD1 should be connected to the HDD Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 x2 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7826 F 9 459 13 Put the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable through A part 14 Connect the 2 connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the Encryption Board CAUTION When connecting the Signal Cables the side labeled ch A sho...

Page 1222: ...connected to CH A 1 Edger Saddle 8 Wire Saddles CAUTION Secure the cables so that there is no extra slack of the cables at A part Be sure that the Wire Saddle B is properly securing the cables x9 A B CH A F 9 461 15 2 Connect the Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7827 and the Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 to CH B and secure them in place using the 2 Wire Saddles A 15 3 Fold extra length of the cables and...

Page 1223: ...slack of the cables be sure to tuck them to the host machine side F 9 463 CAUTION Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable is not overloaded F 9 464 16 Close the HDD Cap 1 Screw 1 Rubber cap CAUTION Be sure that the cables do not protrude from the A part of the HDD Cap If the cables protrude from the A part allow extra slack of the cables at the B part ...

Page 1224: ...hat the LED Cable is not trapped or does not contact with it F 9 466 18 Install the Rear Upper Cover NOTE Be sure to install the 3 TP screws show in the figure below F 9 467 19 Install the Side Cover 2 hooks 1 Screw Hook Hook 20 Affix the LED Label 21 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 22 Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position and secure the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power S...

Page 1225: ...te HDD format 5 After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in service mode...

Page 1226: ...the function becomes uncontrolled the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request Servicing work when a failure occurs Completion of the Installation Work Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2 00 or 2 01 is indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version Mainten...

Page 1227: ...ts to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents CAUTI...

Page 1228: ...it Checking the Co Installation TYPE 8 Option HDD 80GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Co Option HDD 80GB 1 HDD Support Plate x 1 2 HDD x 1 3 Anti vibration Damper x 4 4 Spacer x 4 5 Screw W SEMS M3x14 x 4 6 Screw TP M3x6 x 2 7 Gasket x 1 CD Guides FCC IC Sheet F 9 472 ...

Page 1229: ... Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Co Removable HDD Kit 11 HDD Caution Label X 1 1 HDD Drawer Unit X 1 3 HDD Lock Pin X 2 2 HDD Lock Pin X 2 5 HDD Connector Plate X 2 4 HDD Cover X 2 6 HDD Connector Plate X 2 8 Connector Fixation Block X 2 7 Conversion Connector X 2 10 Screw P Tightening M3x8 X 4 9 Screw TP Round End M3x6 X 8 12 R HDD Label X 1 F 9 473 ...

Page 1230: ...rroring Board or Encryption Board X 1 2 LED Board X 1 4 LED Cable 310mm FM3 9158 X 1 6 LED Label X 1 3 STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 X 1 5 Screw TP M3x6 X 6 7 Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 X 2 8 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7826 X 1 9 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7827 X 1 CD Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation FCC IC Sheet CD Guides of HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit H...

Page 1231: ...functions No Send Function Favorite Settings Yes Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No Us...

Page 1232: ... see the e Manual MEAP T 9 22 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installa...

Page 1233: ...port 5 Following the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP applicatio...

Page 1234: ...ng the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file and click Save 9 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data CAUTION Backup of Advanced Box When setting a SMB server as a backup destination Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD Depending o...

Page 1235: ...t are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 Sel...

Page 1236: ...Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit 1 Push A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A F 9 475 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw 2 hooks Hook Hook 3 Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Read...

Page 1237: ...Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Proce 5 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 4 Screws RS Tightening 3 Screws TP x7 6 Open the HDD Cap 1 Rubber cap 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used 7 Return the rubber cap to the HDD cap F 9 478 F 9 479 8 Turn the HDD Fixed Plate toward the front 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used 9 Remove the HDD 2 Connectors x2 F 9 480 F 9 ...

Page 1238: ...ing Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation Proce 10 Open the Controller Box and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case Unit x5 F 9 482 11 Remove the HDD Case Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit step 3 ...

Page 1239: ... HDD Removed from the Host Machine the First HDD 1 Disassemble the removed HDD 4 Screws W Sems 1 Screw TP 1 HDD Grounding Plate NOTE If the removed HDD has the screw TP and the HDD Grounding Plate remove them The removed screw TP and the HDD Grounding Plate will not be used 1 HDD Support Plate HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Grounding Plate x4 TP F 9 484 CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure...

Page 1240: ...g Kit Installation Procedure Disass NOTE Use the parts disassembled in step 1 and parts included in the Removable HDD Kit 2 Assemble the HDD disassembled in step 1 1 HDD Support Plate 1 HDD Connector Plate Included in the Removable HDD Kit 1 HDD 4 Screws W Sems HDD x4 Connector HDD Connector Plate HDD Support Plate F 9 486 3 Install the Conversion Connector CAUTION Be sure that there is no gap bet...

Page 1241: ...rder specified below 2 Screws P Tightening M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact F 9 488 x2 Hole Boss F 9 489 5 Install the HDD Cover 1 Claw 1 Screw TP Round End M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the rou...

Page 1242: ...ated in the figure Serial No HDD No XXXXXXXX Assembling the Option HDD the Second HDD CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to install the HDD Connector to the side with screw holes of the HDD Connector Plate Screw Hole Screw Hole Connector Label F 9 493 F 9 492 NOTE Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit 1 Assemble the Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD ...

Page 1243: ... there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector F 9 495 3 Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion Connector to install and tighten the screws in the order specified below 2 Screws P Tightening M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten th...

Page 1244: ...d End M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Claw 5 Install the HDD Handle 2 Screws TP Round End M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 498 F 9 499 6 Affix the HDD No 2 of the R HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 7 Write down the serial number of the host machine t...

Page 1245: ...the HDD Cap and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used HDD Fixed Plate 2 Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit and secure the HDD Case Unit with the E ring 3 Remove the Face Plate The removed Face Plate will not be used 1 Screw F 9 501 F 9 502 4 Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD Case Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 7 x2...

Page 1246: ...position 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the screws removed in step 4 x2 Hole Hole Boss Boss 8 Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it 2 Screws TP Round End M3x6 9 Close the Edge Saddle x2 Edge Saddle F 9 505 F 9 506 Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit NOTE The following shows combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Bo...

Page 1247: ... and the Power Cable of the host machine to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x2 2 Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board 4 Screws TP M3x6 x4 F 9 508 F 9 509 3 Install the HDD Case Unit 2 Hooks 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the screws removed in Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit step 11 NOTE Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear side of the...

Page 1248: ...engths of the cables to the front x2 6 Fold extra length of the Cable and secure it in place using the 2 Wire Saddles A x2 A F 9 511 F 9 512 7 Connect the STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 to the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 5 Wire Saddles CAUTION Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the...

Page 1249: ...the direction of the arrow Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly x6 x2 F 9 515 10 Connect the 4 Connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Power Supply Cable CH B FK2 7837 Signal Cable CH B FK2 7837 Signal Cable CH A FK2 7832...

Page 1250: ...3 Wire Saddles x3 CAUTION Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable is not overloaded F 9 518 F 9 517 12 Put the CH B cable through the Wire Saddle 13 Fold the extra length of the CH A cable and secure it with the Wire Saddle CAUTION Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw A of Drawer When securing the cable be sure that it does n...

Page 1251: ...Proce 14 Insert the assembled Removable HDD CAUTION Be sure to insert the HDD No 1 to the Slot 1 and the HDD No 2 to the Slot 2 Slot 1 HDD1 Slot 2 HDD2 15 Close the Controller Box CAUTION When closing the Controller Box check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not contact with it F 9 521 F 9 520 16 Install the Rear Upper Cover NOTE Be sure to install the 3 TP screws show in the figure below...

Page 1252: ...anguage on the HDD Cap 20 Close the HDD Cap and install the key prepared by the user for locking NOTE Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller Size width x depth x height 67mmx14mmx64mm F 9 524 F 9 525 21 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 22 Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position and secure the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Ca...

Page 1253: ...propriate model 3 Select Single and click start 4 Execute HDD format 5 After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Che...

Page 1254: ...e is limited only for the re building process at the initial installation The error occurred at re building process during operation is not targeted F 9 526 After Installing HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work When you have completed all installation work report to the system administrator for the following At the point when installation i...

Page 1255: ... Option HDD 80GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit After Installing H Installation TYPE 8 Option HDD 80GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit After Installing H ...

Page 1256: ...s to Note when HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit has been Installed A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Conten...

Page 1257: ...g Kit Checking the Installation TYPE 9 2 Option HDDs 250GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD Support Plate x 1 2 HDD x 1 3 Anti vibration Damper x 4 4 Spacer x 4 5 Screw W SEMS M3x14 x 4 6 Screw TP M3x6 x 2 7 Gasket x 1 CD Guides FCC IC Sheet F 9 528 ...

Page 1258: ... HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Removable HDD Kit 11 HDD Caution Label X 1 1 HDD Drawer Unit X 1 3 HDD Lock Pin X 2 2 HDD Lock Pin X 2 5 HDD Connector Plate X 2 4 HDD Cover X 2 6 HDD Connector Plate X 2 8 Connector Fixation Block X 2 7 Conversion Connector X 2 10 Screw P Tightening M3x8 X 4 9 Screw TP Round End M3x6 X 8 12 R HDD Label X 1 F 9 529 ...

Page 1259: ...irroring Board or Encryption Board X 1 2 LED Board X 1 4 LED Cable 310mm FM3 9158 X 1 6 LED Label X 1 3 STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 X 1 5 Screw TP M3x6 X 6 7 Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 X 2 8 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7826 X 1 9 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7827 X 1 CD Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation FCC IC Sheet CD Guides of HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit ...

Page 1260: ...ox functions No Send Function Favorite Settings Yes Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No...

Page 1261: ...SMS see the e Manual MEAP T 9 24 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Insta...

Page 1262: ... Export 5 Following the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP applica...

Page 1263: ...owing the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file and click Save 9 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data CAUTION Backup of Advanced Box When setting a SMB server as a backup destination Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD Dependin...

Page 1264: ...that are being sent received or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 ...

Page 1265: ... OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure Assembling the Option HDD CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to install the HDD Connector to the side with screw holes of the HDD Connector Plate Screw Hole Screw Hole Connector Label F 9 531 NOTE Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit 1 Assemble the Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD Suppo...

Page 1266: ... there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector F 9 533 3 Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion Connector to install and tighten the screws in the order specified below 2 Screws P Tightening M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten th...

Page 1267: ...TION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 536 F 9 537 6 Affix the HDD No 1 of the R HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 7 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it to the area indicated in the figure Serial No HDD No XXXXXXXX 8 Assemble the other Option HDD 250GB in the same wa...

Page 1268: ...ata Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation P Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit 1 Push A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw 2 hooks Hook Hook F 9 540 F 9 541 3 Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2 Wire Saddles 4 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Protrusions x2 Protrusion 5 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 4 Screws RS Tightening 3...

Page 1269: ...0GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation P 6 Open the HDD Cap 1 Rubber cap 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used 7 Return the rubber cap to the HDD cap 8 Turn the HDD Fixed Plate toward the front 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used F 9 544 F 9 545 9 Remove the HDD The removed HDD will not be used 2 Connectors x2 F 9 546 ...

Page 1270: ...rroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Installation P 10 Open the Controller Box and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case Unit x5 F 9 547 11 Remove the HDD Case Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit step 3 ...

Page 1271: ...the HDD Cap and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used HDD Fixed Plate 2 Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit and secure the HDD Case Unit with the E ring 3 Remove the Face Plate The removed Face Plate will not be used 1 Screw F 9 549 F 9 550 4 Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD Case Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 7 x2...

Page 1272: ...inal position 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the screws removed in step 4 x2 Hole Hole Boss Boss 8 Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it 2 Screws TP Round End M3x6 9 Close the Edge Saddle x2 Edge Saddle F 9 553 F 9 554 Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit NOTE The following shows combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encrypti...

Page 1273: ...le and the Power Cable of the host machine to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board x2 2 Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board 4 Screws TP M3x6 x4 F 9 556 F 9 557 3 Install the HDD Case Unit 2 Hooks 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the screws removed in Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit step 11 NOTE Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear side of t...

Page 1274: ...ddles at the front and pull out the extra lengths of the cables to the front x2 6 Fold extra length of the Cable and secure it in place using the 2 Wire Saddles A x2 A F 9 559 F 9 560 7 Connect the STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 to the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 5 Wire Saddles CAUTION Check that the STS Cable is connected prope...

Page 1275: ...ire Saddles CAUTION Secure the LED Cable in the direction of the arrow Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly x6 x2 F 9 563 10 Connect the 4 Connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Power Supply Cable CH B FK2 7837 Signal Ca...

Page 1276: ...e 3 Wire Saddles x3 CAUTION Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable is not overloaded F 9 566 F 9 565 12 Put the CH B cable through the Wire Saddle 13 Fold the extra length of the CH A cable and secure it with the Wire Saddle CAUTION Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw A of Drawer When securing the cable be sure that it does...

Page 1277: ...ion Pro 14 Insert the assembled Removable HDD CAUTION Be sure to insert the HDD No 1 to the Slot 1 and the HDD No 2 to the Slot 2 Slot 1 HDD1 Slot 2 HDD2 15 Close the Controller Box CAUTION When closing the Controller Box check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not contact with it F 9 569 F 9 568 16 Install the Rear Upper Cover NOTE Be sure to install the 3 TP screws show in the figure bel...

Page 1278: ...HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language on the HDD Cap 20 Close the HDD Cap and install the key prepared by the user for locking NOTE Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller Size width x depth x height 67mmx14mmx64mm F 9 572 F 9 573 21 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 22 Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position and secure the Reader Communicatio...

Page 1279: ...Execute HDD format 5 After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in service...

Page 1280: ...ited only for the re building process at the initial installation The error occurred at re building process during operation is not targeted F 9 574 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work Only When HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit has been Installed When you have completed all installation work report to the system administrator for the following At the point when installati...

Page 1281: ... 9 2 Option HDDs 250GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Execution of Installation TYPE 9 2 Option HDDs 250GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Execution of ...

Page 1282: ...e package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents Removable HDD Kit 1 HDD Drawer Unit X 1 3 HDD Lock Pin X 2 2 HDD Lock Pin X 2 5 HDD Connector Plate X 2 4 HDD Cover X 2 Use 1 of them ...

Page 1283: ... HDD Caution Label X 1 12 R HDD Label X 1 HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 1 Encryption Board X 1 2 LED Board X 1 4 LED Cable 310mm FM3 9158 X 1 6 LED Label X 1 3 STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 X 1 5 Screw TP M3x6 X 6 7 Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 X 2 8 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7826 X 1 9 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7827 X 1 CD Guides HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit User Documentation HDD D...

Page 1284: ...n Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local Device A...

Page 1285: ... 26 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation P...

Page 1286: ...uctions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this function With...

Page 1287: ... window specify the location to save the file and click Save 9 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data CAUTION Backup of Advanced Box When setting a SMB server as a backup destination Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD Depending on the system version of th...

Page 1288: ...or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 Select Basic Tools Quick Menu...

Page 1289: ...eck that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit 1 Push A part and open the Right Rear Cover 1 A F 9 577 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw 2 hooks Hook Hook 3 Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader...

Page 1290: ... Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing the HDD and HDD Case 5 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 4 Screws RS Tightening 3 Screws TP x7 6 Open the HDD Cap 1 Rubber cap 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used 7 Return the rubber cap to the HDD cap F 9 580 F 9 581 8 Turn the HDD Fixed Plate toward the front 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used 9 Remove the HDD 2 Connectors x2 F 9 582 F 9 58...

Page 1291: ...ion Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing the HDD and HDD Case 10 Open the Controller Box and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case Unit x5 F 9 584 11 Remove the HDD Case Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in Installing the Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit step 3 x2 F 9 585 ...

Page 1292: ... Removed from the Host Machine 1 Disassemble the removed HDD 4 Screws W Sems 1 Screw TP 1 HDD Grounding Plate NOTE If the removed HDD has the screw TP and the HDD Grounding Plate remove them The removed screw TP and the HDD Grounding Plate will not be used 1 HDD Support Plate HDD HDD Support Plate HDD Grounding Plate x4 TP F 9 586 CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to install the HD...

Page 1293: ...mbling and Assembling of NOTE Use the parts disassembled in step 1 and parts included in the Removable HDD Kit 2 Assemble the HDD disassembled in step 1 1 HDD Support Plate 1 HDD Connector Plate Included in the Removable HDD Kit 1 HDD 4 Screws W Sems HDD x4 Connector HDD Connector Plate HDD Support Plate F 9 588 3 Install the Conversion Connector CAUTION Be sure that there is no gap between the HD...

Page 1294: ...ied below 2 Screws P Tightening M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly resulting in poor contact F 9 590 x2 Hole Boss F 9 591 5 Install the HDD Cover 1 Claw 1 Screw TP Round End M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end scre...

Page 1295: ... in the figure Serial No HDD No XXXXXXXX Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit 1 Remove the E ring from the removed HDD Case Unit remove the shaft of the HDD Cap and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used HDD Fixed Plate 2 Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit and secure the HDD Case Unit with the E ring F 9 594 F 9 595 3 Remove the ...

Page 1296: ...Return the rail to its original position 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the screws removed in step 3 x2 Hole Hole Boss Boss 8 Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it 2 Screws TP Round End M3x6 9 Close the Edge Saddle x2 Edge Saddle F 9 598 F 9 599 Installing the Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit NOTE The following shows combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board Co...

Page 1297: ...onnect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine to the Encryption Board x2 2 Install the Encryption Board 4 Screws TP M3x6 x4 F 9 601 F 9 602 3 Install the HDD Case Unit 2 Hooks 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the screws removed in Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit step 11 NOTE Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear side of the HDD Case Unit ...

Page 1298: ...ut the extra lengths of the cables to the front x2 6 Fold extra length of the Cable and secure it in place using the 2 Wire Saddles A x2 A F 9 604 F 9 605 7 Connect the STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 to the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Encryption Board 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 5 Wire Saddles CAUTION Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the mach...

Page 1299: ...e in the direction of the arrow Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly x6 x2 F 9 608 10 Connect the 4 Connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the Encryption Board Power Supply Cable CH B FK2 7837 Signal Cable CH B FK2 7837 Signal Cable CH A FK2 7832 Power Supply ...

Page 1300: ...the 3 Wire Saddles x3 CAUTION Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable is not overloaded F 9 611 F 9 610 12 Put the CH B cable through the Wire Saddle 13 Fold the extra length of the CH A cable and secure it with the Wire Saddle CAUTION Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw A of Drawer When securing the cable be sure that it do...

Page 1301: ... Kit Installation Procedure Installing the Encryption Board and 14 Insert the assembled Removable HDD 15 Close the Controller Box CAUTION When closing the Controller Box check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not contact with it F 9 614 F 9 613 16 Install the Rear Upper Cover NOTE Be sure to install the 3 TP screws show in the figure below F 9 615 17 Install the Side Cover 2 hooks 1 Screw...

Page 1302: ...e HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language on the HDD Cap 20 Close the HDD Cap and install the key prepared by the user for locking NOTE Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller Size width x depth x height 67mmx14mmx64mm F 9 617 F 9 618 21 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 22 Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position and secure the Reader Communicat...

Page 1303: ...cute HDD format 5 After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG etc in service mo...

Page 1304: ...n the function becomes uncontrolled the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request Servicing work when a failure occurs Completion of the Installation Work Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2 00 or 2 01 is indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version Maint...

Page 1305: ...tallation TYPE 10 Removable HDD Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment Installation TYPE 10 Removable HDD Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment ...

Page 1306: ...ing HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally Checking the Contents CAUTION If a Grounding Plat...

Page 1307: ...Contents Option HD Installation TYPE 11 Option HDD 250GB Removable HDD Kit HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit Checking the Contents Option HD Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD Support Plate x 1 2 HDD x 1 3 Anti vibration Damper x 4 4 Spacer x 4 5 Screw W SEMS M3x14 x 4 6 Screw TP M3x6 x 2 7 Gasket x 1 CD Guides FCC IC Sheet F 9 621 ...

Page 1308: ... the Contents Removab Removable HDD Kit 11 HDD Caution Label X 1 1 HDD Drawer Unit X 1 3 HDD Lock Pin X 2 2 HDD Lock Pin X 2 5 HDD Connector Plate X 2 4 HDD Cover X 2 Use 1 of them Use 1 of them 6 HDD Connector Plate X 2 Use 1 of them 8 Connector Fixation Block X 2 7 Conversion Connector X 2 Use 1 of them Use 1 of them 10 Screw P Tightening M3x8 X 4 Use 2 of them 9 Screw TP Round End M3x6 X 8 Use ...

Page 1309: ...ntents HDD Data HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit 1 Encryption Board X 1 2 LED Board X 1 4 LED Cable 310mm FM3 9158 X 1 6 LED Label X 1 3 STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 X 1 5 Screw TP M3x6 X 6 7 Power Supply Cable 570mm FK2 7831 X 2 8 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7826 X 1 9 Signal Cable 550mm FK2 7827 X 1 CD Guides HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit User Documentation HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice ...

Page 1310: ...tored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box Yes 3 Scan modes registered in the Send Function No Unsent documents documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode No Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Yes MEAP SMS Service Management Service password the password will return to its default password if it was changed No Job logs No User authentication information registered in the Local D...

Page 1311: ...EAP T 9 28 Making a Backup of the Data Reference only The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been installed These data items are property of the user and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide See Table Data to be backed up in Points to Note About Installation of the Install...

Page 1312: ...e instructions on the window specify the location to save the file 6 Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted If no MEAP application is installed there is no need to make a backup If a MEAP application has a backup function make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this functi...

Page 1313: ... on the window specify the location to save the file and click Save 9 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data CAUTION Backup of Advanced Box When setting a SMB server as a backup destination Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD Depending on the system versio...

Page 1314: ...ceived or stored are erased 10 Quick Menu Information Export Procedure 1 Access the URL given below and then access Remote UI http IP address of the device If the system administrator ID and password are set a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password and then click Administrator Login 2 Select Basic Tools Qui...

Page 1315: ...and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure Assembling the Option HDD CAUTION Points to Caution at Installation Be sure to install the HDD Connector to the side with screw holes of the HDD Connector Plate Screw Hole Screw Hole Connector Label F 9 624 NOTE Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit 1 Assemble the Option HDD 250GB 1 HDD Support Pl...

Page 1316: ...re is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion Connector F 9 626 3 Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion Connector to install and tighten the screws in the order specified below 2 Screws P Tightening M3x8 CAUTION Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the sc...

Page 1317: ...ew included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw Claw 5 Install the HDD Handle 2 Screws TP Round End M3x6 CAUTION Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw x2 F 9 629 F 9 630 6 Affix the HDD No 1 of the R HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD 7 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number and affix it t...

Page 1318: ...ion Procedure Removing 2 Remove the Side Cover 1 Screw 2 hooks Hook Hook 3 Free the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable from the 2 Wire Saddles 4 Remove the Left Rear Cover 2 Protrusions x2 Protrusion F 9 633 F 9 634 5 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 4 Screws RS Tightening 3 Screws TP x7 6 Open the HDD Cap 1 Rubber cap 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used 7 Return the ru...

Page 1319: ...yption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Removing 8 Turn the HDD Fixed Plate toward the front 1 Screw The removed screw will not be used 9 Remove the HDD The removed HDD will not be used 2 Connectors x2 F 9 637 F 9 638 10 Open the Controller Box and free the Signal Cable and the Power Supply Cable of the host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at the back of the HDD Case Unit x...

Page 1320: ...figuration inside of HDD Case Unit 1 Remove the E ring from the removed HDD Case Unit remove the shaft of the HDD Cap and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used 2 Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit and secure the HDD Case Unit with the E ring F 9 640 F 9 641 3 Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD Case Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be...

Page 1321: ...urn the rail to its original position 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the screws removed in step 3 x2 Hole Hole Boss Boss 8 Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it 2 Screws TP Round End M3x6 9 Close the Edge Saddle x2 Edge Saddle F 9 644 F 9 645 Installing the Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit NOTE The following shows combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board Conne...

Page 1322: ...t the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine to the Encryption Board x2 2 Install the Encryption Board 4 Screws TP M3x6 x4 F 9 647 F 9 648 3 Install the HDD Case Unit 2 Hooks 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the screws removed in Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit step 11 NOTE Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear side of the HDD Case Unit other...

Page 1323: ...Wire Saddles at the front and pull out the extra lengths of the cables to the front x2 6 Fold extra length of the Cable and secure it in place using the 2 Wire Saddles A x2 A F 9 650 F 9 651 7 Connect the STS Cable 340mm Light Blue FM3 9152 to the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Encryption Board 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 5 Wire Saddles CAUTION Check that the STS Cable is connected properly at the t...

Page 1324: ... Saddles CAUTION Secure the LED Cable in the direction of the arrow Check that the LED Cable is connected properly at the time of installation because the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected properly x6 x2 F 9 654 10 Connect the 4 Connectors of the Signal Cables and the Power Supply Cables to the Encryption Board Power Supply Cable CH B FK2 7837 Signal Cable CH B FK2 7837 Sign...

Page 1325: ... Wire Saddles x3 CAUTION Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable is not overloaded F 9 657 F 9 656 12 Put the CH B cable through the Wire Saddle 13 Fold the extra length of the CH A cable and secure it with the Wire Saddle CAUTION Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw A of Drawer When securing the cable be sure that it does no...

Page 1326: ...ryption Mirroring Kit Installation Procedure Installing th 14 Insert the assembled Removable HDD 15 Close the Controller Box CAUTION When closing the Controller Box check that the LED Cable is not trapped or does not contact with it F 9 660 F 9 659 16 Install the Rear Upper Cover NOTE Be sure to install the 3 TP screws show in the figure below F 9 661 17 Install the Side Cover 2 hooks 1 Screw Hook...

Page 1327: ... Caution Label in the appropriate language on the HDD Cap 20 Close the HDD Cap and install the key prepared by the user for locking NOTE Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller Size width x depth x height 67mmx14mmx64mm F 9 663 F 9 664 21 Close the Right Rear Cover 1 22 Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position and secure the Reader Communication C...

Page 1328: ...click start 4 Execute HDD format 5 After 5 sec from when the power of the host machine is turned OFF restart the host machine in download mode of safe mode 6 When download mode is displayed on the control panel click simple mode start 7 Click start to execute download 8 Follow the instruction on the screen and when download is complete click OK 9 Exit SST 10 Check the versions of MN CONT and LANG ...

Page 1329: ...d so that when the function becomes uncontrolled the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request Servicing work when a failure occurs Completion of the Installation Work Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2 00 or 2 01 is indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security ...

Page 1330: ... Service Tools General Timing Chart General Circuit Diagram List of User Mode Backup Data Detail of HDD partition Soft Counter List Appendix ...

Page 1331: ...ools are required when servicing the machine Tool name Tool No Ctgr Appearance Remarks Digital multimeter FY9 2002 A Used for electrical checks for adjustment of laser power in com bination with the laser power checker Cover switch TKN 0093 A Tester extension pin FY9 3038 A Tester extension pin L shaped FY9 3039 A Used as a probe ex tension when makingelectrical checks ...

Page 1332: ...No Ctgr Appearance Remarks Mirror positioning tool front rear FY9 3046 000 B Used for positioning the mirror mount 1 and the mirror mount 2 NA 3 Test Sheet FY9 9196 A Use for image adjustment check Electrode for checking potential sensor FY9 3059 000 B Surface potential sensor for zero level check ...

Page 1333: ...IV IV Appendix Service Tools Special Tools Appendix Service Tools Special Tools Tool name Tool No Ctgr Appearance Remarks MTF TEST SHEET FY9 9453 N MTF 128g FY9 9453 000 MK0808 100 MTF adjustment T 10 1 ...

Page 1334: ...soap Molybdenum disulfide MO 138S Tool No CK 0427 500 g can Lubricating oil Mineral oil paraffin family Tool No CK 0524 100 cc Lubricating oil Lubrication i e drive areas friction areas Silicone oil Tool No CK 0551 20 g Lubricating oil EM 50L Lubrication e g gears Special oil Special solid lubricating agent Lithium soap Tool No HY9 0007 Lubricating oil Lubrication e g scanner rail Silicone oil Too...

Page 1335: ...gon Motor M44 ETB Motor M43 Developing Motor M2 Drum Motor M1 Developing Clutch CL1 Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Potential Sensor EPC1 Developing DC bias Pre transfer charging bias Pre exposure LED Primary charging bias Transfer bias Fixing Motor M3 Fixing Heater H3 Duplex Feed Merging Motor M32 Duplex Feed Left Motor M19 Duplex Feed Right Motor M18 Delivery Motor M13 Multi purpose Tray R...

Page 1336: ... Motor M2 Drum Motor M1 Developing Clutch CL1 Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Potential Sensor EPC1 Developing DC bias Pre transfer charging bias Pre exposure LED Primary charging bias Transfer bias Print Status Fixing Motor M3 Duplex Feed Left Motor M19 Fixing Heater H3 Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid SL5 Delivery Motor M13 Multi purpose Tray Registration Front Motor M33 Right Deck Pickup Mo...

Page 1337: ...re Control Start key ON Polygon Motor M44 Video Signal PTOP ETB Motor M43 Developing Motor M2 Drum Motor M1 Developing Clutch CL1 Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Potential Sensor EPC1 Developing DC bias Pre transfer charging bias Pre exposure LED Primary charging bias Transfer bias Print Status Fixing Motor M3 Duplex Feed Merging Motor M32 Fixing Heater H3 Duplex Feed Left Motor M19 Duplex F...

Page 1338: ...gnal 5 Differential DRV2_5TH_J_CLK Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 5 Differential DRV2_5TH_J_M2S Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 5 Differential DRV2_5TH_J_M2S Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 5 Differential DRV2_6TH_J_M2S Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 6 Differential DRV2_6TH_J_M2S Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission...

Page 1339: ...nal IPC_TXD Finisher Communication Transmission Signal FIN_MODE Finisher Mode Signal FIN_RESET Finisher Reset Signal FIN_DOWNLOAD Finisher Download Signal J471 K_LDG_P LDG Data Differential K_LDG_N LDG Data Differential K_LDH_P LDH Data Differential K_LDH_N LDH Data Differential K_LDF_P LDF Data Differential K_LDF_N LDF Data Differential K_LDE_P LDE Data Differential K_LDE_N LDE Data Differential ...

Page 1340: ...XI XI Jack No Abbreviated Signal Name Signal Name J463 CLK Clock Signal CLK CLK Clock Signal CLK TX Transmission Signal TX TX Transmission Signal TX RX Reception Signal RX RX Reception Signal RX T 10 3 ...

Page 1341: ...7 FT08 FT40 FT39 1 2 J3637F 2 1 J3637M 1 3 2 J523 J9020 AC_N W AC_H B N C AC_N W 100V 200V J604 2 3 1 1 3 2 AC_H B AC_H B AC_N W AC_N W 100V AC_N W 200V 2 3 1 J3115F 1 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 To P 4 E 8 To P 13 J608 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 N C TEST_ 12V TEST_ 3_3V FIN_GND 1 2 3 4 J3638D J3174DH J3174L DRUM_H_LATCH_OFF DRUM_H_LATCH_ON CST_H_ON GND_2 CRNT_SNS_DTC_ANALOG GND_1 CRNT_SNS_REF_ANALOG CRN...

Page 1342: ...F 3 4 5 6 1 2 J3002 2 1 6 5 4 3 J517 3 4 5 6 1 2 J101 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J515 J2134DH 3 2 1 J2134D 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 J510 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J513 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 J511 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 J512 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 J501 2 1 6 5 4 3 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 J202B 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J202A 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 J201X 2 1 6 5 4 3 J691 3 2 1 2 3 4 1 J693 2 3 1 J692 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 1 2 3 J2154D GND GND 12V OCD S...

Page 1343: ...238M 12 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J9024 2 3 4 5 6 1 J3118M J505 2 1 J3238F 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J462 2 1 J3237M MT23 1 2 J502 2 1 J3237F J3130LH 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J3130L J9043B_BUS 0 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J3130D 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 J461 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 4 J9043A_BUS 0 7 N C GND 24VA IL SS 1 GND 24VB IL SS 1 24VB IL SS 1 GND N C N C N C 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 J520 2 3 4 5 1...

Page 1344: ..._3 RESERVE_OUT_4 DUP_DRAWER_CNCT GND PVCLK_K TXD STS RXD PCMD BOOT M2S M2S M2S M2S S2M S2M S2M S2M M2S M2S 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J204 J3017DH 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J3017L J3002D 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 J3017D 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2087 1 2 3 4 5 J493 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J491 12 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J431 J3002DA J3002DB 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 8 1 2 ...

Page 1345: ... 5 6 1 7 J111 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J3098D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J112 FT18 2 1 J3548 END60 1 4 3 2 J3217F 2 1 J3502 1 4 3 2 J3500 2 3 4 1 J3545 2 3 1 J3221M 2 1 J3222M 1 2 J3099M 1 4 3 2 J3510 2 3 4 1 J3217M MT02 1 2 J3513 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 J3097L J3097LH 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 J3544 2 3 1 J3512 MT03 2 1...

Page 1346: ... 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J3088D 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J114 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J3169L 2 1 6 5 4 3 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 J3169D J3169DH MT20 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 MT21 J3168LH 4 3 2 1 J3168L 1 2 3 4 5 6 J2133L 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2133 7 7 4 3 2 1 J3252D 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 J3252L J3252LH 1 2 3 J2132 Main Driver PCB Pre transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Environment Sen...

Page 1347: ...J2036D J2036DH 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 J2035L 2 1 J2036L 3 2 1 Main Driver PCB PCB2 Toner Exchange Cover Sensor PS54 Magnet Roller Clutch Buffer Toner Sensor Toner Excess Supply Sensor Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Developer Lower Cooling Fan Developer Upper Cooling Fan Pre transfer Charging Shutter Sensor Toner Feed Motor M28 CL05 TS03 TS02 FM02 FM30 FM31 PS95 Toner Supply Motor M10 M GND GND BOTTLE_M_ON...

Page 1348: ...3 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J3235L J3235LH J3251LH 1 2 3 J3251L 1 2 3 J2005 J3122DH 1 2 3 J3122D SOLD2 3 1 2 FT31 FT01 FT30 SOLD1 J3050LH 1 2 J3050L 3 2 1 J2136D 2 1 J3050D MT05 1 3 4 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 J2001D 3 2 1 J2053 1 2 3 J3122L 2 1 J2001L 1 2 3 3 2 1 J2003 1 2 3 J2002 3 2 1 3 2 1 Main Driver PCB PCB2 Vertical Path Sensor 1 PS24 Outer Delivery Sensor PS36 Fixed Feed Lever Sensor PS96 Waste T...

Page 1349: ...M_CLK 1 2 1 2 5V GND PRIM_OZON_FAN_ERR PRIM_OZON_FAN_PWM REAR_COOL_FAN_ERR REAR_COOL_FAN_PWM J127 DEV_SLV_CL_CNCTX DEV_SLV_CL_ON 1 2 3 4 J2008D 1 2 3 4 J2007D J2007LH J2006DH 1 2 J2006D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J2139 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J2138 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 11 J109 J2008LH 2 1 1 2 J2006L 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J2007L 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 3 2 1 Mai...

Page 1350: ...D IH_12V_MONI GND FROM_DCON_IH_PWM2 FROM_DCON_IH_PWM1 FROM_DCON_IH_PWM0 IH_VOLTAGE_ANALOG_TO_AD IH_CURRENT_ANALOG_TO_AD GND IH_PID1_LOW_SPEED E233 IH_PID0_LOW_SPEED E233 IH_ON IH_HIGH_UNIT_DTCX V_MONITOR N C N C N C 12V_TH IH_VIN_CMP 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 J3111L 19 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 J3172L J3172LH 2 1 J9005D 2 1 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 J3111D 13 12 11 10 9 ...

Page 1351: ...SL_ON FIX_ENT_SNS 5S GND FIX_CLAW_JAM_SNS FIX_M_CLK FIX_M_GAIN FIX_M_CCW FIX_M_ERR 5V GND GND FIX_M_ON FIX_EXT_SNS 5S MTR_A_OUT_A1 N C SUB_R_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER SHUT_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER WEB_SL_CNCTX FIX_CNCT2 N C 1 5 4 3 2 J102 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J2009 J9058DH 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J9058D 2 3 4 1 J9059M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 11 J105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 1...

Page 1352: ...9 10 J3177L J3177LH J3177D 1 3 2 J3115M 1 2 3 J107 2 1 2 3 1 J3116M 2 3 1 J3116F 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 J2137 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor M06 Drum Home Position Sensor PS61 Main Driver PCB PCB2 PCB27 PCB28 PATCH_SHUT_SL_ON PRIM_WIRE_CLN_M_ON2 PRIM_WIRE_CLN_M_ON1 PRE_LED_ON 24V PATCH_Vref PATCH_OUT 24V GND DKIT_CNST_DTCX 5V DKIT_CNCT_DTC 5V N C N C FT17 FT16 J4141DH J4141D J4060L 7 1 6 5 4 3 ...

Page 1353: ...3 2 1 5V 5V 5V 5V Feed Driver PCB PCB3 Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid SL03 Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor 1 PS21 Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor PS68 Cassette 3 Paper Sensor PS13 Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor PS17 Vertical Path Sensor 3 PS26 Vertical Path Sensor 2 PS25 Vertical Path Cover Open Close Sensor PS02 Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid SL04 Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor 1 PS22 Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor PS71...

Page 1354: ... J2045 J3132LH 1 2 J2052D J2052DH 1 2 J2052L 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 1 J215 2 3 4 5 1 J213 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J2146 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J2076 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J2147 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J2077 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 J2044 1 2 3 J2043 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 J2046 3 2 1 1 2 3 J2042 1 2 3 J2048 1 2 3 2 1 MT36 SL P S R_DECK_LIFT_SNS GND R_DECK_PULL 5V R_DE...

Page 1355: ...4 5 6 1 7 J3031D 1 2 3 J2088D J2088DH 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 J2096 1 2 3 4 5 J2085 1 2 J2074 1 2 J2072 1 2 J2069 1 2 3 J2083 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 11 J226 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J3033D 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J3273D 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 J3031LH J3273LH 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J3273L 1 2 3 J2082 1 2 3 4 5 J2084 1 2 3 4 5 J2095 1 2 3 J2094 1 2 3 J2093 J3033LH 11...

Page 1356: ...2V GND 24V GND GND GND 8TH 7TH 7TH CLK CLK GND DUP_DRAWER_CNCT_DTC RESERVE_OUT_3 RESERVE_OUT_4 RESERVE_IN_3 RESERVE_IN_4 7TH 8TH S2M S2M M2S M2S MT11 MT9 FT20 1 4 3 2 J3061 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 J311 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J301 12 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J300 J3002LB J3002LA 3 4 5 6 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 1 J3233M 2 1 6 5 4 3 J3233F 5 6 4 1 2 3 J3002L 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J...

Page 1357: ...A MTR_A MTR_A MTR_B MTR_B MTR_A MTR_B MTR_B MTR_A MTR_A MTR_B MTR_B 1 4 3 2 J3042M J332 J331 3 4 5 6 1 2 J2098 1 4 3 2 J3042F J330 3 4 5 6 1 2 J2108 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 11 J2167 11 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 J2107 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 Duplex Driver PCB PCB4 ETB Motor M43 Reverse Motor M14 Duplex Feed Merging Motor M32 Registration Motor M34 Duplex Driver Cooling Fan FM41 Registration Motor D...

Page 1358: ...3269DH 1 2 3 J3265D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J3270D J3270DH 3 2 1 J3269D J3265DH 7 1 6 5 4 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Duplex Driver PCB PCB4 Duplex Merging Sensor PS67 Duplex Outlet Sensor PS64 Left Deck Merging Solenoid SL11 ETB Disengage Sensor PS55 ETB Engage Sensor PS56 PCB13 Transfer High Voltage PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 5V GND 5V GND GND 5V 5V T...

Page 1359: ... J2125 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J3242L 1 2 3 4 J2124D J2124DH 1 2 J2115D J2115DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 J3236D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J3242D 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J340 4 3 2 1 J2124L 2 1 J2115L 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 5V DECURL_FAN_ERR_DTC GND GND DUP L PAP DTC DECURL_FAN_ON 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 N C SL 2 1 2 1 J2176D J2176DH 1 2 J2176L P S 3 2 1 J2120 J2118DH 1 2 3 J2118D J2121DH 1 2 3 3 2 1 1...

Page 1360: ...156DH 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 1 2 3 J2019 1 2 3 J2018 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 2 3 1 J2156L J3009LH 2 1 FT26 MT07 J3001LA 2 1 J3095F J3001LWH 4 1 2 3 J3001L J3001LB 1 2 3 4 J2014D 2 1 J3096F J2015DH 1 2 J2015D 1 2 J2015L 1 2 3 J3009L 2 1 J2158L 3 4 5 6 1 2 J2157L 1 2 3 4 J3007L 1 2 3 J2011 1 2 3 J2012 3 2 1 2 1 J3096M 2 1 J3095M J2014DH 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ...

Page 1361: ...4 5 6 PCB1 PCB35 BD PCB Laser Driver PCB DC Controller PCB PCB 36 N C 4 J3018DH 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J3018D 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J3018L K_LDG_P K_LDG_N K_LDH_P K_LDH_N K_LDF_P K_LDF_N K_LDE_P N C K_LDE_N K_SD_DATA_E K_SD_DATA_F K_SD_DATA_H K_SD_DATA_G K_GAIN_PIX K_CTL3 K_CTL2 K_CTL1 K_CTL0 K_APC_SEL K_INT_APC K_AKM2_IC_SELN K_AKM1_IC_SELN K_DIO K_AKM_SCLK K_SD_DATA_B K_SD_DATA_A K_SD_DATA_C K_SD_DATA_D ...

Page 1362: ... 1 and 2 with encryption Removable HDD 1 and 2 without encryption Removable HDD 1 without encryption Removable HDD 1 with encryption J1 J2 J3 J2024 J12 J2024 J12 HDD1 HDD1 J1 J2 J3 J2024 J12 J4 J5 HDD1 HDD2 HDD1 HDD2 J2024 J12 J2024 J12 J2 J3 J4 J5 HDD1 HDD2 J1 J2024 J12 J2024 J12 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J2 J3 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J1 PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2 PCB51 RAID MIRROR BOARD HDD Encryption PCB Main Con...

Page 1363: ...2 J1002 J1022 J1004 J1000 TPM PCB USB Device Port A1 CPU PCB LAN USB H USB D Copy Control Interface Kit A1 Card reader or Serial interface kit or Coin manager Expansion Bus F1 F2 Flash PCB J1027 J1026 J1020 J1025 J1017 J1018 J1021 J1007 J1015 J1003 DDR2 SDRAM DDR2 SDRAM FM4 Main Controller Cooling Fan 1 2 3 J6001 Inverter PCB UN114 J1 J1007 J1006 J1009 J1008 J1005 Transparent touch panel LCD Hub P...

Page 1364: ...BK L2 N C CICNT GND USB_RST FC_USB_IN SLEEP_USB MONI_USB GND 3 3U GND HV N C Are2 Are1 N C N C R BK monitor 1 1 2 2 1 J3141L 1 2 J3140L J3140LH AREST_1 AREST_2 2 1 2 1 J751 2 1 J3140D 2 1 6 5 4 3 3 4 5 6 1 2 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 4 3 2 CI_12V 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 3 4 1 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 J3141DH 2 1 J3141...

Page 1365: ... information in your machine enables you to set the machine to deliver the same device information to other machines that are connected to the same network This enables you to easily manage multiple machines at the same time Your machine is capable of both sending and receiving device information which can be delivered manually and automatically parent machine child machines child machines child m...

Page 1366: ...tings Thin Plain Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Color Recycled Tracing Transparency Labels Bond Tab Pre punched Letterhead No A5R STMTR Original Selection A5R STMTR No B5 EXEC Original Selection B5 EXEC No Paper Type Management Settings Details Edit Name Category Basis Weight Type Finish Creep Displacement Correction Adjustment Color Yes Duplicate Delete No Register Multi Purpose Tray Defaults On Off No ...

Page 1367: ...n Off 2 No Default Screen Status Monitor Cancel Default Status Type Copy Print Send Receive Store Consumables No Status Log Job Status Log No Details Print Jobs Send Jobs Receive Jobs Copy 1 Fax 1 Forward Local Print Printer Cascade Copy RX Print Print Report No Copy Screen Display Settings 1 Regular Copy Express Copy No Display Fax Function 1 On Off No On Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function On O...

Page 1368: ...me On Off No Time Format 24 Hour 12 Hour No Auto Reset Time 0 Off 10 to 50 seconds in 10 seconds increments 1 to 9 minutes in one minute increments 2minutes Yes Function After Auto Reset Initial Function Selected Function Yes Auto Sleep Time 10 secs 1 2 10 15 20 30 40 50 min 1 hour 90 min 2 3 4 hours 1 mins Yes Sleep Mode Energy Use Low High Yes Weekly Timer Settings Sunday to Saturday 00 00 to 23...

Page 1369: ...Available User Data List Plint List Yes No Confirm Network Connection Set Changes On Off No Yes TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Use IPv4 On Off Yes No IP Address Settings IP Address 0 0 0 0 Yes No Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Yes No Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 Yes No DHCP On Off Yes Yes RARP On Off Yes Yes BOOTP On Off Yes Yes PING Command IP Adress 0 0 0 0 No No IPv6 Settings No Use IPv6 On Off Yes No Stateless...

Page 1370: ...Yes No LPD Print Settings LPD Print Settings On Off Yes Yes LPD Banner Page 1 On Off Yes Yes RAW Print Settings RAW Print Settings On Off Yes Yes Bidirectional Communication On Off Yes Yes SNTP Settings Use SNTP On Off Yes No Polling Interval Interval for performing time synchronization 1 to 48 hours 24hours Yes No NTP Server Address IP address or host name Yes No Check NTP Server Yes No FTP Print...

Page 1371: ...s No Use Proxy within the Same Domain On Off Yes No Set Authentication Use Proxy Auth On Off Yes No User 24 characters maximum Yes No Password 24 characters maximum Yes No Confirm Dept ID PIN On Off Yes No IPSec Settings Use IPSec On Off Yes No Receive Non policy Packets Allow Reject Yes No Edit Yes No Delete Yes No Policy On Off Yes No Register Policy Name 24 characters maximum Yes No Register Se...

Page 1372: ...rms as needed Minimize form changes across print queues Minimize form changes within print queues Yes No Rprinter Settings Print ServerName 47 characters maximum Yes No File ServerName 47 characters maximum Yes No Printer Number 0 to 15 0 Yes No NDS PServer Settings Printer Number 64 characters maximum Yes No Tree Name 32 characters maximum Yes No Context 256 characters maximum Yes No Print Server...

Page 1373: ...ommunity Name1 On Off Yes No MIB Access Permission Read Write Read Only Yes No Community Name Community Name 32 characters maximum public Yes No Community Name2 Settings Yes No Community Name2 On Off Yes No MIB Access Permission Read Write Read Only Yes No Community Name Community Name 32 characters maximum public2 Yes No Use SNMPv3 On Off Yes No User Settings User On Off Yes No Register User MIB ...

Page 1374: ...gorithm Issue Destination Start Date of Validity End Date of Validity Issuer Public Key Cert Thumbprint Certificate Yes No Display Use Location Displays what the key pair is being used for Yes No TTLS Settings Use TTL On Off Yes No TTLS Settings MSCHAPv2 PAP Yes No PEAP Settings Use PEAP On Off Yes No Same User Name as Login Name On Off Yes No Firewall Settings IP Address Block Log Time Category I...

Page 1375: ...s No RX Filter Use Filter On Off Yes No Default Policy Allow Reject Yes No MAC Address Up to 100 IPv4 addresses can be stored Yes No External Interface Default Settings Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available USB Settings Use USB Device On Off Yes Use MEAP Driver for USB Device On Off Yes Use MEAP Driver for USB External Drive On Off Yes Accessibility Default Settings Item S...

Page 1376: ...Y 0 0 No Adjust Action 1 Default Settings 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning Press Start No Adjust Saddle Stitch Fold Position 2 00 mm to 2 00 mm in 0 25 mm increments 0 00 mm No Adjust Fold Position Adjust Z Fold Position 2 0 mm to 1 5 mm 0 5 mm i...

Page 1377: ...Settings If the Staple Finisher Booklet Finisher Is Attached Tray A Copy Access Stored Files Printer Receive Fax Other No 2 Tray B Copy Access Stored Files Printer Receive Fax Other No 2 Tray C Copy Access Stored Files Printer Receive Fax Other No 2 Tray Home Position Off Tray B Tray C No 2 Offset Jobs 1 On Off Yes Job Separator Between Jobs On Off Yes Job Separator Between Copies On Off No Differ...

Page 1378: ...Right Double Left Right Hole Punch Fold Face Up Face Down No 2 Sided Printing On Off No Delete File After Printing On Off No Merge and Print On Off No Output Report Default Settings 2 Sided Printing On Off Yes Register Form Register Solid Transparent 1 Delete Check Print Details No Register Characters for Page No Watermark Register Edit Delete Yes Copy Set Numbering Option Settings On Off Yes Numb...

Page 1379: ... 2 Yes Auto Online On Off Yes Auto Offline On Off Yes Generate File High Compression Image Quality Level Image Level in Text Photo Mode or Photo Mode Data Size Priority Normal Image Quality Priority Yes Image Level in Text Mode Data Size Priority Normal Image Quality Priority Yes OCR Text Searchable Settings Smart Scan On Off Yes No of OCR File Name Characters 1 to 24 Yes Trace Smooth Settings Out...

Page 1380: ... No Shortcut 2 No Settings No Shortcut 3 No Settings No Shortcut 4 No Settings No Shortcut 5 No Settings No Shortcut 6 No Settings No Auto Collate On Off Yes Image Orientation Priority On Off Yes Auto Orientation On Off Yes Photo Printout Mode On Off Yes Register Remote Device for Cascade Copy Register Seven devices maximum Details Delete No Cascade Copy Communication Timeout 5 to 30 seconds Yes P...

Page 1381: ...y Available Output Report TX RX User Data List Print List No Fax User Data List 1 Print List No Common Settings Register Favorite Settings Edit Favorite Settings Register Edit Delete M1 to M18 Check Content Yes Show Comment On Off Yes Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings On Off No Default Screen Standard Address Book One Touch Favorite Settings No Change Default Settings Register Initialize ...

Page 1382: ...On Off No User User name for SMTP authentication 64 characters maximum No Password Password for SMTP authentication 32 characters maximum No Allow SSL POP On Off No Allow SSL SMTP Send On Off No Display Auth Screen When Send On Off No Allow SSL SMTP Receive Always SSL On Off No Maximum Data Size for Sending 0 Off 1 to 99 MB 3MB Yes Default Subject 40 characters maximum Attached Image Yes Use SMTP ...

Page 1383: ...e On Off Yes Set Line Register Unit Telephone Number 20 digits maximum No Register Unit Name 24 characters maximum No Select Line Type Pulse Tone No Line If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed Line 2 No If the Super G3 FAX Board Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board and Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board are installed Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 No Select TX Line If the Super G3 FAX B...

Page 1384: ...Description Device Information Delivery Available Remote Fax Server Address Host name or the IP address 48 characters maximum No TX Timeout 1 to 99 hours 24 hours Yes No of Sending Lines 1 to 4 lines 1 No Select Priority Line Auto Line 1 Line 2 6 Line 3 6 Line 4 6 No Remote Fax Settings Use Remote Fax On Off Yes T 10 16 ...

Page 1385: ...Reduction Mode Auto Reduction 90 Reduction Direction Vertical Only Yes 2 On 1 Log On Off Yes Received Page Footer Print Do Not Print Yes Handle Files with Forwarding Errors Always Print Store Print Off Yes Forwarding Settings Type Validate Invalidate Register Registered Forwarding Settings Forward w o Conditions E Mail Priority Details Edit Delete Print List Yes 7 Set Fax I Fax Inbox Set Register ...

Page 1386: ...t No Change Default Settings Register Initialize No Mail Box Settings Set Register Mail Boxes Mail Box No 00 to 99 No Register Box Name 24 characters maximum Yes PIN Seven digits Yes Time Until File Auto Delete 0 Off 1 2 3 6 12 hours 1 2 3 7 30 days No URL Send Settings Yes Print upon Storing from Printer Driver On Off Yes Initialize No Settings for All Mail Boxes Time Until File Auto Delete 0 Off...

Page 1387: ...nt Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available SMB On Off No WebDAV On Off No Encrypted Secure Print Default Setting 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs 1 On Off Yes T 10 18 T 10 19 ...

Page 1388: ...e Address List Rename Yes Register One Touch Register Edit Delete Yes Change Default Display of Address Book Local LDAP Server Remote No Address Book PIN Seven digit number Yes Manage Address Book Access Numbers On Off Yes Register LDAP Server Register Details Edit Delete Register Edit LDAP Search Print List No Auto Search When Using LDAP Server On Off Yes Acquire Remote Address Book Acquire Addre...

Page 1389: ...mit Functions Yes Page Totals Clear Print List Clear All Totals Large2 Count Management No Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs On Off Yes Allow Remote Scan Jobs With Unknown IDs On Off Yes Device Management Default Settings 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available Device Information Setting...

Page 1390: ...ly No Communication Log Details Print List Report Settings No Report Settings Auto Print 100 transmissions On Off No Specify Print Time On Off No 00 00 to 23 59 No Separate Report Type On Off No Limited Functions Mode 1 On Off No Confirm Device Signature Certificate Certificate Details Certificate No Confirm User Signature Certificate Certificate Details Certificate No Certificate Settings Certifi...

Page 1391: ...Key Cert Thumbprint SHA1 Certificate No Delete No Certificate Settings CA Certificate List Certificate Details Version Serial Number Signature Algorithm Issue Destination Start Date of Validity End Date of Validity Issuer Public Key Cert Thumbprint Certificate No Delete No Certificate Settings Register Key and Certificate Register Key Name 24 characters maximum Password 24 characters maximum No De...

Page 1392: ...hen the appropriate optional equipment is attached Item Setting Description Device Information Delivery Available HDD Data Complete Deletion Timing of Deletion During Job After Job No Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode 0 Null Data 1 Time Random Data 1 Time Random Data 3 Times DOD Standard No Initialize All Data Settings Initialize No TPM Settings Use TPM On Off No Backup TPM Key Restore TPM Key No...

Page 1393: ... Scan and Send Fax Scan and Store Access Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Favorite Settings HDD Clear Clear Clear Yes 1 Remote UI Export Import PC Yes 2 SST Meapback PC 1 Backup is available only Favorite Settings in Scan to Send 2 Available only in the following case The download mode in safe mode is started when the HDD is faulty and backup of Meapback is available by SST In such a case perform the ...

Page 1394: ... available by SST In such a case perform the following procedure to restore Execute backup of Meapback using SST Replace the HDD Install the system Check if the system has been normally started Start in safe mode and execute restoration using SST Setting items for Main Menu Button settings in Main Menu HDD Clear Clear No No Button settings on the top of the screen HDD Clear Clear No No Wallpaper S...

Page 1395: ...tial startup after replacement of Main Controller PCB 2 Note 3 Restoration of Streaming is not available if the HDD is encrypted when the HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit is installed Web browser settings Web Access setting information HDD Clear Clear Yes Remote UI Export Import PC No Backing up available only Favorites MEAP settings MEAP application HDD Clear Clear Clear No Yes SST Meapback PC L...

Page 1396: ...again to restore Ver 13 or later After installation of the system execute restoration of the TPM key to restore 2 After executing each CLEAR operation the key information in the SRAM can be automatically restored from the common backup key in the HDD and the TPM setting becomes ON However only the UI display is OFF so it is required to change the TPM setting to ON manually 3 By initializing all da...

Page 1397: ... 6 Address book Setting for Forwarding Disabled APL_KEEP 7 MEAP stored data Disabled APL_LOG 8 System log storage area Enabled CRBDEV 9 Advanced Box area Enabled APL_CDS 10 Area for distribution server Enabled APL_GEN Details of universal data Category Data Category Data Settings Registration Preferences Setting for Advance Box User information of Advanced Box Adjustment Maintenance Registration i...

Page 1398: ...o 002 Remote copy full color 1 no 003 Remote copy full color 2 no 004 Remote copy mono color 1 no 005 Remote copy mono color 2 yes 006 Remote copy black and white 1 yes 007 Remote copy black and white 2 no 008 Remote copy full color large no 009 Remote copy full color small no 010 Remote copy mono color large no 011 Remote copy mono color small yes 012 Remote copy black and white large yes 013 Rem...

Page 1399: ...olor 1 yes 126 Total A1 yes 127 Total A2 yes 128 Total A large yes 129 Total A small T 10 28 Valid or invalid Number Counter Details no 130 Total A full color 1 no 131 Total A full color 2 yes 132 Total A black and white 1 yes 133 Total A black and white 2 no 134 Total A mono color large no 135 Total A mono color small yes 136 Total A black and white large yes 137 Total A black and white small yes...

Page 1400: ...mote copy small no 217 Copy full color 1 T 10 29 Valid or invalid Number Counter Details no 218 Copy full color 2 no 219 Copy mono color 1 no 220 Copy mono color 2 yes 221 Copy black and white 1 yes 222 Copy black and white 2 no 223 Copy full color large no 224 Copy full color small no 225 Copy mono color large no 226 Copy mono color small yes 227 Copy black and white large yes 228 Copy black and ...

Page 1401: ...290 Local copy full color small double sided no 291 Local copy mono color large double sided no 292 Local copy mono color small double sided yes 293 Local copy black and white large double sided yes 294 Local copy black and white small double sided T 10 30 300 to 399 Valid or invalid Number Counter Details yes 301 Print Total 1 yes 302 Print Total 2 yes 303 Print large yes 304 Print small yes 305 ...

Page 1402: ... 416 Copy print mono color small no 417 Copy print full color large double sided no 418 Copy print full color small double sided no 419 Copy print mono color large double sided no 420 Copy print mono color small double sided T 10 31 Valid or invalid Number Counter Details yes 421 Copy print black and white large double sided yes 422 Copy print black and white small double sided no 431 Clear mixed ...

Page 1403: ...ils no 619 Box print full color mono color 2 no 620 Box print full color mono color 1 no 621 Box print full color large double sided no 622 Box print full color small double sided no 623 Box print mono color large double sided no 624 Box print mono color small double sided yes 625 Box print black and white large double sided yes 626 Box print black and white small double sided yes 631 Memory media...

Page 1404: ... Advance box print black and white small double sided yes 743 Network print Total 1 yes 744 Network print Total 2 yes 745 Network print large yes 746 Network print small no 747 Network print full color 1 no 748 Network print full color 2 yes 749 Network print black and white 1 Valid or invalid Number Counter Details yes 750 Network print black and white 2 no 751 Network print full color large no 7...

Page 1405: ...ote copy scan color no 912 Remote copy scan black and white no 913 Transmission scan total 1 color T 10 36 Valid or invalid Number Counter Details no 914 Transmission scan total 1 black and white yes 915 Transmission scan total 2 color yes 916 Transmission scan total 2 black and white yes 917 Transmission scan total 3 color yes 918 Transmission scan total 3 black and white no 919 Transmission scan...

Page 1406: ...olor no 956 Transmission scan Local print black and white no 957 Transmission scan Box color no 958 Transmission scan Box black and white yes 959 Media scan color yes 960 Media scan black and white yes 961 Application scan Total 1 yes 962 Application black and white scan Total 1 yes 963 Application color scan Total 1 yes 964 Super Box Local scan color yes 965 Super Box Local scan black and white T...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands